
o 0^ 




* .0 s 0 ^ ^^-^-^ * 






^0 



8 I A * ■ 



I) - 0 ^ V ,o 



1^ ,0 = 



^^^^^ 



■ o 



0 * V ^ 



0^^ 



a 0^ 



-Co ■ 



" I 



• 0- 



A 

PEACTICAL INTRODUCTION 

TO 

GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 

BY 

THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A., 

RECTOR OF LYNDON, 
AND LATE FELLOW OF TRIXITY COLLEGE, CAIIBRIDGE. 

CAREFULLY REVISED AND CORRECTED 

BY 

REV. ^A^^SPENCER, A. M. 

FROM THE FIFTH LONDON EDITION. 



NEW YOEK : 
D. APPLETOlN^ & CO., 443 & 445 BROADWAY 
1863. 



Enteeeo, r.ccording to Act of Congress, in the year 1S46, by 
D. APPLETON & CO., 
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern 
District of New York. 



48 65 5 5 

AUG 19 1942 



PREFACE. 



The plan and object of the present volume are so fully 
and so satisfactorily stated by Mr. Arnold in his Preface, 
that it is quite superfluous for the American Editor to add 
any thuig to what he has there said. It is simply incum- 
bent on him to state, that he has bestowed much care and 
attention upon the volume in order to perfect its arrang^e- 
ment and render it uniform v/ith the other works of the 
series, and also to ensure, as far as possible, correctness, 
neatness, and even elegance of typography. While he can 
hardly dare to promise himself that there is an entire 
absence of errors of this kind, he ventures to express the 
hope that nothing of consequence has escaped attention, and 
that, the Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition 
will be found equally acceptable and equally valuable with 
any of its predecessors in the Arnold Series of Classical 
Books for Schools and Colleges. 

J. A. S. 

New York, Nor. 20th, 1846. 



PREFACE 

TO THE 

ENGLISH EDITION. 



The plan of this Introduction requires some ex* 
planation. Its object is to enable the student, as soon 
as he can decline and conjugate with tolerable facility, 
to translate simple sentences after given examples and 
with given words ; the principles trusted to being those 
of imitation and very frequent repetition. It is at 
once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise-book; 
the Syntax being in substance that Biittmami's ex- 
cellent School Grammar. 

One object I have steadily kept in view, that of 
making the general construction of sentences of more 
importance than the mere government of cases, which 
is nearly all that most Exercise-books pretend to teach. 
The Exercises are adapted for viva voce practice ; but 
if the book is so used, they should by all means be 
written down afterwards. The Vocabularies, if possi- 
ble, but at all events the Examples, should be com- 
mitted to memory and carefully kept up. 

It is due to Mr. Ollendorff^ whose Introduction to 
German has appeared in EngUsh, to state that the pub- 
lication of a work like the present was suggested to me 



viii 



PREFACE. 



by the advantage I myself derived from the use of his 
book. I had originally drawn it up exactly on his 
plan ; but the probable expense of publication deterred 
me, for some time, from publishing it in that shape.* 
The present work differs therefore from his, in requir- 
ing from the pupil a general acquaintance with the 
Accidence. 

For the convenience of those who may wish to use 
the Syntax as such, I have added a complete set of 
(Questions to the work. 

T. K. A. 

Lyndon, 1841. 



* The very great success of this work, and the similar one on 
" Latin Frose Composition/' — which are now used at all, or nearly all, 
our public schools, — ^has encouraged the author to send to press the 
more elementary Exercises here alluded to, under the title of a " Prac- 
tical Introduction to Greek Accidence." [This volume forms the 
" First Greek Lessons," carefully revised and improved by the Araeri- 
earn Editor.] 



CONTENTS. 



SECTION PAea 

1. On the Tenses—The Article . 11 

2. The Article continued . ...... 13 

3. The Article continued 16 

4. The Article continued . . . . . . . . 18 

5. The Article continued 20 

6. The Article continued 22 

7. The Article as demonstrative Pronoun — Pronouns . . .24 

8. Pronouns continued .27 

9. Pronouns continued . , 29 

10. Of the Neuter Adjective 31 

11. Subject and Predicate [Vvords with which the copula is often 

omitted], ........... 33 

12. On the Moods 35 

13. The Moods continued [et, av, &c.] . , . . , .33 

14. The Moods continued . , , 40 

15. The Moods continued . . 43 

16. The Moods continued 46 

17. The Moods continued ....... ,47 

13. The Moods continued 49 

19. ov and /j?? 50 

20. Verbals in reog . . • 53 

21. Double Accusative 55 

22. The Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs . . . 57 

23. The Accusative^ continued 60 

24. The Genitive • . 63 

25. The Genitive continued 65 

26. The Genitive continued [Voc. of Verbs governing the gm.] . 69 

27. The Genitive continued [Voc. of Verbs governing the gen.] . 71 

28. The Genitive continued 73 

29. Comparison 75 

30. Comparison continued 78 

31. The Dative [Voc. of Verbs governing the c?a^.] ... 80 

32. The Middle Voice [Voc. of middle Verbs] .... 64 

33. Middle Voice continued [Voc. of mi(i(i/e Verbs] . . .87 

34. On the Perfect 2. [Voc. of second Perfects] .... 89 

35. Additional Remarks on some of the Ivloods and Tenses . . 91 

36. On the Infinitive . .94 

37 The Infinitive continued [Voc. of 'E/c] -97 

33 The Infinitive continued 101 

39. The Participle [Voc. on the use of some Par/ficipZes] . . .103 

40. The Participle continued [Voc, of Verbs that take the P^tidple] 195 



CONTENTS. 



41. The Participle continued : Tvyxav(xi^ XavOdvoiy (^Bavoi [Voc, on *A.i:6 



and Iip6\ 103 

42 The Genitive Absolute, &c. [Voc. of Words used in ISom. Absol.j 110 

43. The Relative [Voc. on 'Et^, 'Ai/a, Et's] 113 

44. The Relative continued [Voc. on Ata.] 117 

45. h oiog cv dvfip [Voc. on Kara] . , 120 

46. ovSelg oarig ov ♦ . , . , • « . . 123 

4:7, oLos, Seco, fjiWco [Yoc. on* Aix(pifTlcpL] , . . • . -.125 

48. oTTco?, ov fjfi [Voc. on 'Errt] .... , . 128 

49. [xfi, ^if) ov [Voc. on Merdl 130 

50. uri with Relatives, Infin., &c. [Voc. on Ilapa ] . . . 133 

51. Some Adverbs of Time, &c 136 

52. On Interrogative Sentences [Voc, on Upos] .... 139 
53 Indirect Single Questions [Voc. on 'Ynd] 143 

54. Double Questions 145 

55. Observations on ei, idv 146 

56. Condensed Questions 148 

57. Various Constructions 150 

58. Various constructions continued 152 

59. List of Particles, &c 154 

[Tables of Prepositions in Composition] . . . 168 

Table of Differences of Idiom 169 

Questions on the Syntax 181 

Index 1. (English) 157 

Index II. (Greek Phrases explained) 231 

Index III. (Irregular Nouns and Verbs) ..... 235 



EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS, &c. 

B., K., M., R., T., denote respectively the Greek Grammars at Butt- 
mann^ Kuhner, Matthid^ Rost, and Thiersch. Kr. stands for Kruger. 
E. refers to the Eton Greek Grammar. 

R., after a declinable word, stands for root. Thus, y6vv^ R. y6var^ 
means, that the regular terminations are to be added to yovar. 

V. refers to Vomel's Synonymisches vVdrterbuch. 

A Greek letter added after a verb, shjows that the simpler root {z.s \% 
appears, for instance, in aor, 2 ) ends in that letter. 



PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 

TO 

GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 



^ 1. On the Tenses, — The Article. 

1. It is taken for granted that the student knows 

(1) That the verb agrees with its nominative case in number 
and 'person* 

(2) That ewery adjective word — whether adjective, participle, pro- 
noun, or article — must agree with its substantive in gender^ num- 
ber^ and case. 

(3) That the transitive verb is followed by the accusative. 

(4) That one substantive depending upon another is put in tha 
genitive case. 

(5) That any verb may have the same case after it as before it, 
when both words refer to the same person or thing. 

2. The Imperfect, besides the usual meaning of 
that tense,t is used to express continued or repeated 
actions^ taking place in past time. 

3. The Aorists express actions completed in past 
time.t m 

* But a dual nominative is often joined with a plural verb ; and a 
neuter plural generally takes a singular verb. 

t The Imperfect expresses 1) an action continuing during another 
action which is past ; 2) an action continued by being frequently re- 
peated ; and (occasionally) 3) an action begun or intended, but not 
completed. (See Jelfs Greek Gram. Vol. II. p. 53.) — Am. Ed. 

X The Aorists mark actions simply past, without reference to other 
actions, at the same or a different time ; as eypaxpa t^v iTZLaroMvy " I 
wrote the letter (without specifying time or circumstance). Hence, the 
aorists referring to time past indefinitely , are used to denote momentary 
acts, and also actions repeatedly done in past time. In this latter case 
it may be rendered by the present or by the phrase " to be wont, or ac- 
fustomed/* &c. (See Jelfs Greek Gram. Vol. II. p. 57 ) — Am. Ed. 



12 



THE ARTICLE. 



Hence the Aorist is used of momentary and single Actions j th« 
Imperfect, of continued and repeated ones. 

The dog hit him (aor.) : the. dog hoided all night (imperf.) 

Obs. The Imperfect (of habitual actions) is often rendered by 
^used to,' &c. 

4. The Perfect expresses actions contiiiued or re- 
maining in their effects up to the present time. 

a) Hence the aor, is nearly our perfect indefinite 
(the perf. formed by infiection) : the pe?/". our jjerfect 
definite (or perfect with ^have^), 

b) But when the connection of the past with the 
present is obvious from the context, the aorist may be 
used for the perfect; or, in a narrative, for the pluper- 
fect. 

c) It is only when a particular stress is to be laid on 
the time of the occurrence, that the perfect or pluperf. 
must be used. All this is, however, greatly influenced 
by euphony. 

5. A governed genitive is often placed between an 
article and its noun. 

6. 70 77]g aQETtjg y.cilXog, the beauty of virtue. 

6 7a Trig Tzolsojg TTQuyfxaTa 'TTQazzcav, he who trans- 
acts (or manages) the affairs of the state. 

In this way two and even three articles stand together. 

7. 6 TTQaiTcor, {the person doing =) he ivho does. 

Hence the artic. with a participle is equivalent to a personal oi 
demonstrative pronoun with a relative sentence. 
Thus, 

b -nparrcjiVj equivalent to IksXvo^ dg TiOdrrei, he icho does, 
rov irpi^TovTog, of him who does. 
&c. 

PI. ol TrpdrrovTsg^ equivalent to iKsXvoi 01 Trpdrrovaiy those who do. 
Tcov irpaTTovTOiv, of those who do 
&c. 



8. Vocabulary 1 
Virtue, 
Beauty, 
City, 

Thing or affair, 



xdllog, eog, ro, 
Tzolig, eoog, ij, 
nqayiia,^ azog, to. 



• Nouns in jua from verbs, generally denote the thing produced by thi 
set. They may be compared with the pass, participle (rd TrcTrpayixerop') 



THE ARTICLE. 



15 



To do, transact, manage, TToduco. 

Wonder, or am surprised / d-av[j.dLo:} (with fuL ?nid.j 

at, admire, ) but aor. 1 act.). 
Well, el 
111, y,ay,^g. 
Often, frequently, nollci/Ag. 
Citizen, " 7touii]g,'^ oi', 6. 

Judge, y-QiTjjg, Gv, 6. 

rroarrojj Jo, has also the intransit. meaning of our to he doin^ icell 
or ill: i. e. to be prosperous of unfortunate. In this sense it has 
the perf. 2. -i-oaya. The a is long throughout. 



Exercise 1. 

9. I admire the beauty of the city. The citizens are 
doing well. I have often admired the beauty of the 
cities. The judge often admired the beauty of A'irtue. 
I admire those who transact (7) the affairs of the state. 
He transacts the affairs of the state iU. The citizens 
are doing ill. I have often admired the virtue of th<^. 
citizen. The citizens admire the virtue of the judge. 



% 2. The Article continued. 

10. {a) Proper names often take the article, if they 
are the names of persons ivell knoicii. 

Hence the names of Deities, Beroes, &c., generally take the arti* 
cle ; and the names of persons recently mentioned. 

11. (6) But if the proper name is followed by a de- 
scription which has the article, the proper name is 
without the article, unless it is to be expressed e7n- 



^ Nouns in of the first decL from verhs, denote the 7nale doer cj 
the action : those from suhsiardives denote a person standing in any 
Txcar relation to what is denoted by the substantive: as -:o>tr?7? from 
nc-Xi^. Those in tr??? from suhst., have the i long. KoTr/lj is from Kpivoi. 



14 THE ARTICLE. 

fhazically^ as being well-known^ or as having been 
previously mentioned.'' 

12. (c) The Greek has no indefinite article (our '•a ). 
[d) Our 'a' should be translated by lig, when a 

particular person or thing is meant, though not 
named: in other words, wherever we might substitute 
' a certain ' for • a \ 

13. (e) The subject^ generally has the article, the 
predicate not. 

14. (a) 6 ZcoyiQaxriQ^ Socrates ; at 'A&iqvai, Athens. 

(b) J^coKQuirjg 6 cptloaocpog, Socrates the Philoso- 

pher. 

(c) iTTTTog szexs laycov, a mare brought forth a 

hare. 

{d) yvvri 7ig oqviv eJxsv, a looman (or, a certain 

woman) had a hen. 
{e) rj KOQtj sytvsTo d^y.og,^ the girl became (or, was 

turned into) a leather bottle. 

15. Vocabulary 2. 

Socrates, 2J(ay.QdTr]g,^ ovg, 6. 

Athens, ^A{)7]vai, cov, at. 

Philosopher, cpiloaocpog, ov, 6. 

Horse, mare, innog, ov, 6 et ij. ^ 

Yj ^ luyoig, oo, 6 (acc. laycov or 

) layc6). 

Woman, yvv?], yvvamog, rj {voc. yvvai). 

Hen, oQvig,^ oQvTdog, 6 et ?/. 

Water, . vdojQ, vdarog, to. 

Kr. who quotes Baccll. 1314: vvv ek Sg[jlojv arifxos tK(3e(3\ficrojmL j h 
KaJfto? h [xeyag. 

^ That is, the nominative before the verb. The predicate is what is 
affirmed or said of the subject. (See note ®). 

® Or, do-vo? iyevsTo h Koprj, So, Qedg Tju o Adyof, the Word was God. 
This arises from the nature of a proposition. We usually assert of a 
particular thing that it is included, as an individual, in a particular 
class ; not that it is the whole of that class. 

^ TiO)KpdTr]g, G. ovs, D. £t, Slc. A. TlcxiKparr] (Plato), TiO)KpdTr]v (Xeno- 
phon), V. llcbKpar£<;. 

8 * Bird/ but in Att. generally cocJc, hen ; just a? we use fowl. G. 
'jpvlQoi^ &c. A. a and v. Plur. reg., but also boveis^ G. opveuv, D. dpi/l* 
si{v) only, Acc. opveig (6pvls). 



THE ARTICLE. 



Wine, 
Boy, son, 
To have, 

To brii]g forth, or (of birds) ; 

to lay, ^ 
Damsel, maiden, 
Leather-bottle, 
Become, 
An egg, 
Three, 



ohog,^' ov, 6. 
naig, naidog^ o. 



tooVj ov, to. 
TQugy TQeig, iqla. 



aaxog, ov, 6. 



Exercise 2. 



16. I admire the beauty of the hen. A (14. (cZ) boy 
had a hare. The water was turned into (= became) wine 
(14. (e). The hen laid three eggs. A certain damsel 
had three hens. I admire the virtue of the maiden. 
The hare was turned into (-= became) a horse. The 
boy admires the beauty of Athens. The citizens ad- 
mire the beauty of the woman. I admire those loho 
transact* the affairs of Athens. I have often admired 
the virtue of Socrates. I admire Socrates the philoso- 
pher. The woman shall have a hen. The water has 
been turned into (= become) wine. A certain judge 
has three hens. 



um horn ; become, tyevoinqv and ytyova also serve for preterites of the 
verb " to he." When yiyova may be construed ' I am^ it means, ' / am 
by hirth; ^ have heco?ne.' (B.) — yeivonai, am horn, poet. : aor. eyeivdjxrjv 
hegot, hore (in prose as well as poetry). 

* Numerals like this at the top of the line refer to the Table cf 
Serences of Idiom at the close of the volume. 




oHvo?, with the digamma ^^oTvu?^ vinum. So (hov^ cLFoV, ovum. 



16 



TUE ARTICLE. 



<§> 3. Article cojitimied, 

17. (a) V/hen the m]/. thy^ his^ their^ &c. are em 
fjhatic they are to be translated by possessive pronouns 
with the article. 

18. (h) My^ your, his^ &c. are to be translated by 
the article, when it is quite obvious whose the thing in 
question is. 

"Whenever there is any opposition (as, when nine is opposed to 
yours or any other person's) the pronouns must be used. 

19. (c) When an adj. without the article stands be- 
fore the article of the substantive, the thing spoken of 
is not distinguished from any thing else, but from 
itself under other circumstances.™ 

{d) When a noun which has just preceded, is to be 
repeated again, the article belonging to it stands alone. 
19*. (a) 6 oog dovlog, thy or your slave (emphatic 

and precise) ; but oog dovlog, a slave of 

yours (indefinite). 

(b) alyco ir^v y,£Cfah]v (I am pained as to the 

head=) I have a pain in my head. 

(c) 71^8X0 inl Tilovaloig roTg no^ATuig, he rejoiced 

(or ivas glad\ when the citizeris were 
ivealthy^ (or, on account of the citizejis 
icho loere icealthy). 
{d) 6 efxog Tzaii^Q y.ai 6 lov cfilov, my father and 
my friends., (literahy, my father and 
the of my friend). 

20. Vocabulary 3. 

Slave, 8ovXog, ov, 6. 

To feel or suffer pain ; to . 

be pained a^, J ^^'^''""* 

Head, y.eq^a).?}, rjg, ?/. 



" Thus in the example following it is not, ' rich citizens/ as op 
posed to other citizens; but 'he rejoice i in their being rich; or in the 
wealth o/ , . &c. 



THE ARTICLE. 



17 



To rejoice, be glad, or 

take pleasure in, 
Wealthy, rich, 
Father, 
Friend, 
Thine, thy. 
Mine, my, 
Jaw, 
Tooth, 
Ear, 
Foot, 
Hand, 

Knee, 

Brother, 

Daughter, 

Mother, 

Wise, clever, 

Happy, 

To love, 

To be vexed at, 

Beautiful, 
Bad, 

Obs. 1. nSsaOai and 
dat.f (without a prepos.) ea 

Obs. 2. 'That,' when it s 
be translated by the article 



to ijdoiAut (with dative). 

nlovaiGg,'' ov, 

cjilog, ov, 6. 
oog, 01], OOP, 

p'ddog, ov, 7]. 
boovg, ovTog, 6. 
ovg, CDTog, to. 
Tiovg, TTodog, 6. 
XsiQ, yjiQog, rj (root ^sq for 
G. D. dual and T>.jjlur.) 
yovv, yovaiog, to (R. yovai), 
udelqjog, ov, 6. 
'Ovydzr^o,° aQog {Qog), ?J. 
l^titr^Q,' eQog {qog), rj, 
Gocpog, i\, oV. 
evdaificop, (OV, ov, 

ay^i^oixai, iooixai, i/y^ia&riv 

(^dative). 
y.al6g, ?], ov, 
y.ay,6g, ov, 

aOai are more commonly followed by thi 
:cept in the construction explained in 19. c. 
tands for a subst. before expressed, is tc 
. (See 19*. d.) 



Exercise 3. 

21. The mother of the beautiful daughter has a pain 
in her jaws. I am glad that my brothers are happy 

" Adjectives in log denote what helongs to, concerns, or comes froi> 
what the root expresses. They are formed from substantives, and some- 
times from other adjectives in og. V/hen the root ends in r it is some- 
times changed into o- : -Xoyro?, icealth, rrXovaiog. 

° Jlarfip, [xriTTjp, Bvydrrjo, yacrrfjo, throw away e in G. and D. sing, and 
D. pL They have V. eo, and insert d before ai in D. pi. 

P "Axdonat, and in the poets nSoixai, are also followed by the acc^ 
ftspecially cf neut. pronouns. 



18 



THE ARTICLE. 



The father rejoiced in his son's being wise (c). My 
friend and my brothers (c/). I often have a pain in my 
foot. My mother was suffering from a pain in hei 
hands (6). I am vexed that the bad are weaUhy (c). 
The daughter loves her mother. My slave loves my 
brother's. I admire your virtue and that of your 
friend. The beautiful damsel shall be turned into a 
horse. I am pleased with those ivho transact^ the 
affairs of the state. He was vexed that the citizens 
were rich. I take pleasure in my daughter's being 
beautiful (c). 



§ 4. Ai^ticle co7itimied, 

22. a) The Greeks often place the genitives between 

the noim governing and the article ; or they 
repeat the article after the noun. 
b) A 710U71 or participle is often understood, so 
that the article stands alone. 

23. a) -rj 70V 7TOfr]Tov oocpia,'^ or rj Gocpia ij rov 7T017]zov, 

the wisdom (cleverness &c.) of the poet, rj 
ycalrj yieqalrj, or rj y.8q>aVr] ?) y.ahj'' zrjg y^OQtig, 
the beautiful head of the maiden, 
b) 'AUiavbQog 6 (PiXltttzov, Alexander the son of 
Philip {vlog, understood). 6 ^coq^Qoriaxov, 
the son of Sophroniscus, elg zrjv <lHlln7iovy 
into Philip^s country {yjiqav, country un- 
derstood), ra rr^g TToleoog, the affairs of the 
state {jiQayiiara understood), za i/xd, m/y 
affairs, my property, ol iv cecrrf/, the people 
in the city^ those in the city, ol avv zoj 
^aaiXei, those with the king. 

^ Substantives in id are derived from adj., and express the abstract 
notion of the adj. — The other positions of the gen. are frequently met 
with: Mr7<5£ir/j rvv apTrayriv. (Herod. i. 3.) /; di/a;^copr7crtf rcov ^ A.drjvai(x)i/. 

(Thuc. i. 12.) For a partitive gen. these are the only correct positions. 

' The latter position gives emphasis to the adjective or dependent 
genitive. 



THE ARTICLF.. 



19 



24. Vocabulary 4. 
Poet, 

Wisdom, cleverness, 

Alexander, 

Philip, 

Sophroniscus, 
Son, 

Country, 

Our, 

Your, 

Marcli an army (when 
spoken of its general), 

March {of the army^ and 
of a person undertaking 
an expedition^ also jour- 
ney, set out; &c., 

Persian, 

Scythian, 

Cyrus, 

King, 

Madness, 

People, 

Army, 

Geometer, 

With, 

City, town, 



^hllinnog, ov, 6. 
2^(oq)Q07'LC)'Aog, ov, 6. 
vlog, ov, 6. 
XcoQa,^ ag, ?/. 
rjfxsrtQog, a, op. 
vixstsQog, a, or, 

iXavvco.^ 

roQEvofiai (withaor. i pa^s,, 
Ittl Tiva^ against a per- 
son). 

IltQarjg, ov, b. 
2^'Avdqg, ov, 6. 
KvQog, ov, 6. 
^aailevg, tcog, 6. 
fAWpiUj^ ag, 7], 
dJjfiog, ov, 6. 
OTQUTeviia,^ arog, to. 
y£03fisTQ7]g, ov, 6. 
Gvv {dative). 
a(JTv,^ €og, TO. 



Exercise 4. 

25. I admire the wisdom of the geometer. The pea- 



• iXavucjj fXaao) (a), eXfiXuKa^ sX^Xa/^at, riXaOriv, Att. fut. n^, 5, &C., 
infin. eA'/!/. It is trans, {drive, urge on), but used as intrans. {marchj 
ride), by omission of acc. 

* This word was formed from an adj. [xavos, mad, which is quoted 
by SiLdas. 

" nrparos, Grpann, armif ,* (Troartia, expedition. CTpaTevjxa haS both 

meanings ; the latter often in Herodotus. 

▼ aarv never means the state, as tzoXis does. It is often used of an 
old or sacred part of aTroXtj, as Londoners speak of' the City,' as a part 
of London. 



20 



THE AUTICLE. 



fie in the city admire the beautiful mother of the dam 
sel. The people in the city admire the very beautiful 
daughter of the very beautiful mother. The king 
marches into the country of the Scythians. The army 
of the Persians marches into the country of the Scythi- 
ans. Cyrus marches against the king of the Persians. 
The son of Sophroniscas is astonished at the madness 
of the people. The poet admires those who manage'' 
the affairs of the state. I rejoice in the king's being 
wealthy.^ I am vexed when the bad are wealthy. The 
people in the city (d) admire the son of Philip. The 
king has the toothache (i. e. suffers pain in his teeth^). 
The clever geometer has a pain in his knees. A certain 
poet had a very beautiful horse. Those with the king 
will march against the son of Philip. 



§ 5. Article continued. 

26. An adverb with the Article is equivalent to an 
adjective. 

27. ol Trdlai,'^ the loiig ago men =the men of old. 

6 fisra^v XQovog, the between time = the intermediate 
time. 

7j avQiov, adv. {juiiQay day^ understood), the morrow^ 
the next day. 

28. Vocabulary 5. 
Long ago, 



Man, 
Between, 
To-mor/ow, 
Time, 
Near, 

One's neighbour, 
Then, 



ndlai. 

avd^Qamog ov, 6 {^homo). 

avQiov [adv.) 
XQovog, ovj 6. 
TzeXag: nlri<Jiov. 
6 nlrjaiov. 
zozs. 



^ So in Euglish, ' the then Mayor.' 



THE ARTICLE. 



2i 



Nowj 
Here, 
There, 




Up, upwards. 
Down, downwards. 
Move, 
Crocodile, 
Both, 



'/Qoy.odeu.og, ov, 6. 
aucfxx) : aiuq^oTEQog : (the lat* 



auq.oTEQcc ra &Ta^ hotJthis 



ter often in the ^^Z^^^r. : 



Life, 
This. 



ears. Xen.) 
^iog, ov, 6. 

ovTog, avri]^ tgvzo, cvC. 



Exercise 5. 



1^ In doing the exercise, consider which of the adverbs comes 
nearest to the meaning of the adjective or equivalent phrase. 



29. The men of old did this. They did this the next 
day (^Za^.) The crocodile moves its upper The 
son of Sophroniscus has a pain^ in both his ears. I am 
surprised at the madness of the Persians of old times. 
I wonder at the men of the present day.^ I admire the 
icise men of old. They love the present life. We won- 
der at the madness of our neighbours. The people there^ 
are astonished at the madness of those with the king. 
I am astonished at the cleverness of those who manage 
my affairs. 



30. He had a pain {imperf.) in both his knees. The 
people here admire the son of Sophroniscus. The cro- 
codile was turned into a hare (14. e). The people here 



* Of countries, av^ is used of marching into the interior ; f.arojj of 
marching down to the coast. 

y The now men. 

* Veo^le = persons must not be translated by cr,aoi The pcopU 
there, ol IkzI. 



Exercise 6. 



22 



THE ARTICLE. 



admire my daughter and my brother's. The peoj^ie 
there are domg well. I have often wondered at the wis- 
dom of our present geometers. The crocodile lays eggs 
The king of the Scythians has a pain in* his lower 



§ 6. Article continued. 

31. a) To express that a person 4ias a very beau- 

tiful head,' the Greeks said : ' has the head 
very beautiful.'^ 

32. 6) TO ^caAoV, is: Hhe heaiitiful^^^ Hhe honorable^ 

in the abstract; beaMty, la xald, are: 
beautif ul (or honorable) things ; whatever 
things are beaiitifiil ; what is beautiful ^ 
or simply, beautif ul things, 

Obs. We learn from (34*. 6), that the Jirst person plur. of the 
pres. svJbj. is used in exhortations ; and from (34*. c), that /x^ is 
used with it for ^not' (See 107*. I.) 

33. d) The infinitive with the article becomes a 

substantive declinable throughout, and an- 
swering to the English ^participial sub- 
stantive^ in — ing. 

34. e) Abstract nouns, and the names of materials ^ 

generally take the article. When a whole 
class^ or any individual of that class, is 
meant, the noun, whether singular or plural, 
takes the article. 
34*. a) 6 QivoHEQcog 7t]v doQav laxvQozaTTjv 6j^£t, the rhi- 
noceros has a very strong hide, 
b) q)8vyo!)fi8VTa alayQcc ' diojxcousv ra xald, let us fly 

• The article must not be used, unless it is assumed that the thing 
in question has the property, the object being only to describe of 7J)hat 
kind it is. If the writer wished to inform us that the rhinoceros had a 
hide, which was moreover a strong one, he would not use the article. 
Thus of the crccodile : M koX owx^ag Kaprepovg, it also has strong 
claws. 

Thus in English, " Burke on the Sublime and Beautiful.** 



THE ARTICLE. 



froJii what is base: let its ^pursue what is 
honorable. 

c) dicoxo3usp rd alo/od, let 2is not j)iirsiie what 
is base. 

d) TO rayh /.alah',t3Mvmg fast ; tov tw/v la/.eh',of 

talking fast, &c. : to ndvTug y.ay.ojg Ityeiv, 
the speaking ill of every body. 

e) ij dq^Ti], virtue: 6 yQvaog, gold ; ol dyaOoi, the 

good ; ol dezoi] eagles. 

f) TO Televzaiov.at last: to drro Tovde^'' henceforth. 



35. Vocabulary 6. 

Rhinoceros, 
Nose, 

Horn. 

Hide,' 

Strong, 

To fly from, 

Base, disgraceful, 

To pursue, 
Fast, quick, 

Talk, 

Speak, say, 

Speak ill of. 

Speak Avell of. 

Treat ill, behave ill to. 

Treat well, do kind offices 

to, confer benefits on, 
Elephant. 
Stae, 
Gold, 



lOS- 



oiroy.boojg, ooiog, o. 
oig, oTi'GJ, r (plur. 
' triis-). 
yeoag, arog (aog, oog), to. 
doodi,^ dg, /;. 
L(7'/vo6g, d, cv. 
q:8vy(x). 

ala/oog, d, 6v : cdcymv. afcr- 
yiGTog. 

8 1 (6x03.'' 

Tu.'/y^, tui, V (neut. adi. =^ 
adv.) 

y.ay.cog Xtyeiv {acc.) 
ev /Jyeiv (acc.) 
y.ay,(X)g ttoieIv [acc.) 

ev TTOietv [acc») 

e/.8ri:(ig, avzog, o, 
tXacfog, ov, 6. 
yoVaog, ov, 6. 



^ Literally, ' the from this' (time). 

Nouns in a and 77, from verbal roots, are generally oxytone. The 
abstract notion predominates in them (B.) ; the vowel of the roct ia 
often changed into 0, as in perf 2. (mid.) c.'.ij. flay ; cool. 

® The fut. mid. is the more common in Attic Greek. 



24 



PEOXOUNS. 



Good, 



Eagle, 



Tog. 
asTog, cvy 6. 



SiooK£iv is also, to prosecute; (pevyeiv, to he prosecuted : Slcokciv tlv^ 
(povovj to prosecute a man on a charge oj" murder ; (pevyeiv 0oj/ov (un- 
derstand dLKrjVj causcj trial), to be tried for murder 



36. The elephant has a strong hide. The maiden 
has very beautiful hands. The stag has very beautiful 
horns. The Persian's boys pursue lohat is honorable. 
Let us fly from those who pursue^ lohat is disgrace- 
ful. Do not let us fly from what is honorable. Let us 
avoid {fly from) talking fast. Let us fly from the mad- 
ness of speaking ill of every body. Let us do kind 
oflices to our friends. The citizens ^prosecute Philip 
on a charge of murder. Sophroniscus was tried for 
murder. ^'^ Let us henceforth pursue the honorable. 
Let us not treat our (18) slaves ill. He took pleasure 
in doing kind offices to the good {Obs, 1. jj. 17). The 
Scythians admire the beauty of gold. The boy Avon- 
ders at the horn of the rhinoceros. 



^ 7. Arlivle as a demonstrative pronoun , Pronoun 

37. a) 6 fisv — 6 ds,^ this — that; the one — the other, 

&c, ol fiev — at dt, these — those ; some — ■ 
others. (More than one 6 ds may follow.) 

38. b) In a narrative 6 ds stands (once) in reference 



indeed; — df, hut. Often, however, there is no considerable 
opposition between words so connected, the use of fxiv being principally 
to prepare us for a coming 6e. It need not be translated, except when 
the context plainly requires an indeed. — In translating from English 
Into Greek, whenever the second of tv/o connected clauses has a hut 
.he first should have a jxtu. 



Exercise 7, 



25 



to an object already named. So -/mI og, when the refer 
ence is to a person, 

39. d. 1) avTog is '^eZ/,' when it stands in the nom. 

v}ithout a substantive^ or, in any case 
with one. 

2) cu'zig is Liin^ her^ it, &c. in an oblique 

case witnout a substantive. 

3) 0 aviag is ^ sa7neJ 

4) at'zoV stanaing alone in an oblique case, 

is never ^self^^ except when it is the 
first iDord of the sentence. 

40. a) r a avta Tovg fA,&y Ivnei, xovg ds tbqtiu, the 

same things pain some persons^ but de- 
light others. 
h) Xvy.og a\.ivhv edioixsv * 6 as clg vaov y.aTECpvys,^ a 
wolf ID as pursning a lamb ; and (or but^-) 
it fled for refuge into a temple, 

c) Hcu og i^aTTaztjd^e^g dm-Aei dra y^Qarog, and he, 

being deceived^ pursues at full speed (lit- 
erally, ' at or with force or strength'). 

d) avTog kprj^ he himself 5ai(i (it), avrog 6 dovlog^ 

or, 6 dovlog aviog, flie slave himself: 6 avrog 
dovlog, the same slave, (auXIop tovto cpoBov- . 
'fica 7] TGv 'Odvarov avt 6v, I fear this more 
than death itself, tdcoxsv avtoig ro ttvq, 
he gave them the fire, avTov yag eldov^ 
for I saw the man himself: eJdov yaQ av- 
1 0 \\ for I saw him. 

41. Vocabulary 7. 

Same, o aviog, tj, 6, 

Some — others, ol I'Jv — ol dt'. 

To pain, annoy, Ivnm, 

Delightj ttQTzoj, 



S Ka-ra'pevyo). (2. aor.) 

» ci is not only but, but also and, and in Homer for. It is used 
where no other particle is required, to avoid having a proposition in the 
middle of a discourse unconnected with what goes before. It is often, 
therefore, omitted in translating into English. 

o 



26 Px.ONOUNJ. 

Wolf, Xmog^ Of, 6. ^ 

Lamb. avirog, ov, c. 

Fly for refuge, 'AaTacpevyio. 

Temple, 'yaog,' ov, 6, 

More — than, uaXXop — 

To fear, (po^tof^ai^. 

Death, d^o^yazog^ ov, 6, 

Fire, nvQ, nvqog, ro. 

Say, cpyjl^L 

Give, bidcoin. 

Sheep, oig, olg.^ 

Dog, y.vm', y.vv6g, 6 et rj (m. il 

the sex is not to be spec- 
ified. R. yvv, V. avov). 

House, ohog, ov, 6. 

Deceive, anardco, i^aTzaTuco (the lat- 

ter being stronger, to de- 
ceive thoroughly). 

At full speed, uva y,Qdrog {at force). 

Force, strength, ycQazog, sog {ovg), ro. 

Ride, ihwveiv [to drive o?iy innof 

* understood). 

For, 



Can yap begin the sentence! {No.) Can cH (Au) Can^'? 
(iVo.) 

Exercise 8. 

42. A dog was pursuing a sheep, and it fled-for-re- 
fuge into a house. Some admire the mother ; others the 
daughter. Cyrus rides at full speed. I™ myself sdij it 
I admire the mother more than the daughter herself. 
They will give him the gold. I will give the gold to 
(;the man) himself (39. 4). I deceived the slave himself. 



* VCWJ, Alt. 

* In act. frighten. It has /. mid. and pass. ; aor. pass. 

' The forms in Attic Greek are ; ^S. o7?, oioj, olt, oi'p, — D. ouy oloiv. 

P. oleg, oicjv, oiai, o7as and o7g. (It is m. and /. 

* The nom. of the personal pron. is not to be expressed. 



PRONOUNS. 



21 



And they (40. c\ being deceived, fly-for-refuge into a 
temple. And he, riding at full speed, flies from those 
who^ are pursuing him.° The wolves fly at full speed. 
Let us pursue the wolves at full speed. The same dogs 
are pursuing the hares. Let us pursue them" ourselves. 
Let us not deceive our neighbour. The Persians of 
those days^^ pursued honorable things. Speak welj 
of those who^ have done you kind offices. 



^ 8. Pronoims continued, 

43. The noun with ovmg, ode (this), iy.mog {that), 
takes the article; the pronoun standing before the arti- 
cle, or after the noun. 

44. nag in the sing.° without the article (= exuGiog), 
^each,^ ''every f with the article, ^ whole,'' ^ alL^ 

45. a) ovTog 6 av)]Q, or 6 aj^'^o ovzog [not 6 ovrog 

this man. ^xdvog 6 avriQ, or 6 dvi]o iy>thog 
that man. avjog 6 ^aadevg, or 6 ^aaiXevg av- 
rog, the king- himself. 

b) Tzaaa nohg, every city ; nuaa i) nohg, tJte Avhole 

city, all the city. 

c) allot, others ; ol alloi, the others ; ol eieooi, the 

others (with a stronger opposition), the other 
party. 

d) ij all 7] xoioa, the rest of the country, 

e) nolXoi, many ; ol nolXoi^ the many^ the mul- 

titude, most people, 

46. Vocabulary 8. 

Others, allot. 
The others, ol allot. 



■ The acc. of the pronoun is seldom expressed when the person 
meant is quite obvious. , 

• In the plur. ixavTeg must have the article, when there is reference tc 
particular objects : when not, the usage is variable. 



28 



PRONOUNS. 



The other pa^t3^ 
The rest of. 

Many, iniichj 
Great, 

The many, the niuhitnc]e, 
Most people, 
Every, each. 

The whole, all, 

This, 
That, 
Man, 
To cut, 



01 tregoL 

6 a71oQ (agreeing with its 
suhst.) 

ol ttgUoI. 

nag (in the sing, without 

the art.) 
nag 6, or 6 nag (in the si7ig, 
P] . ndrieg : see note on 44.) 
ovTog I 68s. 
r/,Hi'ogj T], 0. 

av)]q^ dQog : av\}QCx)nog, ov, 6. 
Tiixvco,'^ (of a country to rav- 
age or lay waste by cut- 
ting down its treeSj crops, 
^&c.) 
01 nolffiiot {adj.) 

Obs. dvfip^ {vir), man as opposed to woman^ and used in a good 
sense. aiSowno^ {homo)^ man as a human being, opposed to other 
animals ; and often used, like homo, when contempt is to be ex- 
pressed. , 



The enemy. 



Exercise 9. 

|:^Obs. With HMs,'' 'that,' the order is, 

Pron. An. Noun, 

(or,) Art. Noun, Pron. 

47. The enemy laid waste the lohole country. The 
other party are laying waste the rest of the country. 
My brother is pursuing the same Persians. 1 admnre this 
city. I often admired that city. The many do not {ov) 
admire the beauty of wisdom. The Ww^himselfis, lay- 
ing waste the rest of the country. A certain nian was 
pursuing his slave ; h2it Aefled for refuge into theup])er'^ 



9 TaXt)?, ~oXX?7, 7i0\v^ 

TToXXoiJ, rr^AXjjf, ttoXXo?, &,c. 

S T^IXVO)^ T£jUO, T£TjXy]Ka, ETEjXOVj tTfirjQrjV. (Roots! TZfl^ TfJ.Z,'^ 

« See Jelfs Greek Gram.y Vol. I. p. 81, 97. 



PRO^'OU^'S. 



29 



City. The others were turned into eagles. I rdll give 
the iclmle egg to my brother. He gave all the water to 
his (IS) horses. I feel pain^ \\\ every part of my head 
(m my whole head). Most people rejoice Avherr^ their 
friends are wealthy. The other party manage ihe 
affairs of the city. 



§ 9. Pronouns contijiiied. 

48. a) In the reflexive pronouns {luavzov, fcc-}* the 
avzog is not emphatic. To express - self' emphatically^ 
avzog must precede the pronoun, ahiov cj/, (fcc. 

49. b) ' Own^ is translated by the gen, of the i-eflex- 
ive pronoun (iavzov). ^ His by the gen, of caToc. (Sj 
Hheif by gen. ]jlur.) 

50. c) iaviov is often used (like sni) in a dependent 
sentence, or in a clause having acc. and injin., for the 
subject of the principal sentence. ^ 

But tHe simple airci^ is often used, or ? (ar, oT, &c. ^Tjc'?;, cr-j-Ij, 
&c.) 

Gv is never si772p/?/ reflexive in Attic prose, but is confined to 
this kind of reflexive meaning. (B.)'^ The forms ^v, £, occur in 
PlaiOy but not in the other great Attic prose-writers. (Kr.) 

51. a) 8^u8 aai'Tor, accustom yourself. 

b) 8q:r^ ndiTug rovg di'd'ocorroig id iavzcov dyuTTaVj 
he said that all men loved^ their own thiiigs. 



• G. iaavTov, eiiavrrg, 
jy.euavTO), euavrn^ 
A. kixavTOv, iwivrrii'. 

* Of course only when it cannot be mistaken for the subject of the 
inf^n. or dependent verb. 

° This passage is misconstrued, and so made incorrect, by the Eng. 
Translator of Buttmann, p. 325. 

It is an idiom of our language to use a past tense in a sentence 
Hpnning with ' t^'at' (and other dependent sentences), when the verb 
on which they depend is m past tense. The /'res. infin. must be used 
m Greek, whenever the actioQ to be expressed by it did not precede the 
time spoken of. 



50 



PT10N0UN3. 



c) rofiitsi lovg no^urag vTirjosTeTv savr^y he think i 
that the citizens serve him. 

Xenoclides was their general {Jiimsclf the 
fifth = ) with four others. 

52. Vocabulary 9. 

eiOiofxai or eicod^a (a perf. 2. 
from ed^co : koctw to eico&og, 
neut. part. accg. to my^ 
his^ &c. custom ; as mt/j 
his, &c. custom was.) 
dyarzdco : also, with acc. or 
cZa^. "I am contented 
with." 

V7Tr]087t(OJ 

CTQarijyog, ov, b. 
GTQaTriytw. 
TQiTog, 7] J or. 
TtzaQJog, 7], ov, 
nag tig. 

nQL^-miii. {ra naQovja pres- 
ent things^ circum- 
stances^ or condition.) 



Accustom, 
I am accustomed, 



Love, like, am fond of. 



Think, am of opinion, 
Serve, perform service, 
General, 

To command ( an army), 
Third, 
Fourth, 
Every body, 
I am present, here, &c.. 



To perform this service, v7:riptTeXv tovto. 

these services^ VTrtipereiv ravra 



Exercise 10. 

53. Accustom yourself to confer benefits upon'* the 
good. Every body loves his own things. I accustom 
myself to serve the state. Cyrus, as his custom was, 
was riding at full speed. I will give the gold to you 



^ From arpa-og army, ayw lead. 
* Augment. £, sWi^oi^^ eWiafjai, It is used in j^a^s. 
J vTTOj lpir)ig, rawer, properly, to row for a person, or at his com* 
maud. 



NEUTER ADJECTIVE, 



31 



rourself (48). Philip was their general with two others. 
He thinks that the citizens have conferred benefits upon 
him. Accustom yourself to be contented with your (18) 
present condition. Let us not treat those ill who^ have 
done good to us. He accustomed himself {imperf.) to 
perform these services for the good. I will perform this 
service for you. He has a^^ large head. I am accus- 
tomed to perform you these services. 



<^ 10. Of the Neuter Adjective, 

54. a) In Greek, as in Latin, the rieut. plur, of an 
adjective is used without a substantive, where we 
should rather use the singular. 

55. b) The neut. article wath a gen, case, is used 
in an indefinite way for any thing that relates to^ or 
proceeds from^ what the gen, expresses. 

56. c) Neuter adjectives are used adverhially ; and 
.generally, 

The neut. sing, of the comp. ) serve also for comp. 
The neut. plural of the sup, ) and sup, of the adv. 

57. d) When an adjective is the predicate, it is often 
in the nent, singular^ when that is not the gender, or 
even number, of the subject. 

This can only be, when the assertion is made of a class or gener- 
al notion; not of a particular thing. It may be supposed to agree 
with thing understood. 

58. e) TTolvg [nJJwv or ttIelcov, nlHaxog)^ superlatives, 
and the adj, rjfxiavg' stand in the gender of the gen, that 
follows them, when we might have rather expected the 
nent, adj, (Not to ttoIv Trig yrjg, but // noUJi,) 

59. a) H7T8 ravza, he said this. 



« Acc. plur. eTs and eag. G. ovs in later writers. 



32 



iNEUTER ADJECTIVES. 



6) ra t (Xiv ecov cpeQ^iv deiy 2De should hea?' whaj 
comes from the gods. 

c) aocpcoTEQov TioiHc, vou act more wisely. 

aiG^iGtoL diertleaev, he lived in a most 
disgraceful way. 

d) 7] aQST^ iariv in aiv 87 6 r, virtue is praise- 

worthy. 

e) 7] no 111] Trig xo^Qag, the greater part of the 

country, 6 i]i^iavg tov XQ^^^^y ^^^'^ ^^^^ 
tifne. 



60. Vocabulary 10. 
We ought, should or must, 
To bear, 
Said, 
To live, 



Praiseworthy, 
To praise. 
To act. 

Forwardness, zeal, 



Pelopomiesus, 



dn^ {oportet), 

dia-T£lt(o, b'aco (properly Ji/t- 
ish, go through ; ^tov or 
XQorov understood). 

iTTUirerog, i], 6v. 

TTOltOj. 

70 7tq6(^vixov {adj. for ?/ nqo^ 

d villa). 
TleloTzoi^rr^Gog, ov, 



Exercise 11. 

61. The others laid waste half the country. The 
other party^^ act more wisely. The rest^^ of the 
Scythians act more wisely. He spent half his life in a 
most disgraceful way. The others are doing better.* 
The rest of the citizens are doing very well.* The 
king of the Persians has ravaged the greater part of the 



* 0£t ( — SeoL, Ser]^ SeTi', Siov), ^sfjazi. Tmperf. eSei. 

^ (pipco, oto-o), zvr]vo')(^a\ aOV. 1. }']i'eyKa, PasS, h£^dr]aoijai and oiaQvicTO* 

« eliTov (eiVf, &c.) an aor. 2. Also eiva aor. 1., of which etVarf, 
raroj, and also a:ra?, are used by Attic writers. 

— cb-oi (Xen. but generally ia^nai^) ijveua, ijveKa, ijviOr}^: but jivrijiai, 
® By 56 the compar. and superL of good must here be used. 



SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 



33 



Peloponnesus. Wisdom is praiseworthy (57^ d). Tha 
son of Sophronisciis' said this (54. a). Let ns bear 
-what comes from the gods. The son of Philip will 
command (the arm}") loith three others,^^ Accustom 
yourself to bear Vv^hat comes from the gods. One ought 
to like one's own things. A certain man had a hen 
Eagles have a^^ very beautiful head. 



%\\, Subject and Predicate, 



62. a) The nam, neiit^flur. generally has the verb 
in the singular ; but often not b) when" j^ersons or liv- 
ing creatnres are spoken of 

63. c) The verb 'to be - is often omitted. 

64. a) TOL foa« the animals run,' t(Sv ovtoov 
Tu fxtv ear IV icp tiulv, k/. S oiy. icp f^fUPf of existing 
things some are in our poicer, and others are not in 
our povjer. 

b) Toadds e&rrj iazQarevov, so many nations went 
on the expedition. 

c) ta Tojv cfilojv y.oirdy the property of friends is 
common. 

65. Vocabulary 11. 

Animal, ^ooov, ov, to. 

Run, T^Q^l^n^ (dQaix). 

In a person's power, mi with the dat. of the^per- 

son (fV f'ao/, in my pow- 
er ; in ejxovy in my time , 
enl Tov TzaTQog, in my fa 
therms ti??ie). 

So many, roaog, joGoade, rocsovTog. 

Nation, s&vog, eog, to. 

Go on an expedition, oiQareix}}. 



■ 2* ■ 



84 



SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 



Existing things, things, 
that are, or (54, a) what is. 
To go away. 

Now (== already, at once, 
without waiting any 
longer). 



7 a ovra (part, from eifu. 
ovTij in reaUty, really.) 



(Words after which the omission of the copula (' is^ ' are' &c.), ii 
very common.) 

sToTfiog,^ 7], or, 
qjQovdog,' 7], or, 
ooQa. 

Qcidiov (neut. of Qadiog). 
^aleTTOv (neut. of )(^aXe7z6g). 
a^iog, a, ov. 
dvvarog, rj, or, 
abvvarog^ og ov, 
avdynT] {=it is necessary), 
^tfjiig^ dtixidog, tj (= fas). 



Ready, 

Disappeared, vanished, 
(It is) time, 
Easy, 

Hard, difficult, 
Worthy, 
Possible, 
Impossible, 
Necessity, 
Lawful, 

. &c., &c. 



Exercise 12. 

66. These things were not in my power. These 
things took place in our fathers' times. This (plur,) is 
good. It is now time to go away. They are ready to 
do this. The judge is worthy of death {gen,) The 
boys have disappeared;'^ the father has disappeared. 
Many nations will go on the expedition. It is easy to 
the wise, to bear ivhat comes from the gods,^^ It is ne- 
cessary to bear what comes from the gods. Let us go 
away at once. Socrates, the son* of Sophroniscus, was 
really wise. For it is not lawful to speak ill of the gods. 
It is hard to deceive the wise. 



» EiHL has a fut. meaning, and is more common in this sense than 
Cktvcroixai^ fat. of epxot^aL- In the moods it is used as pres. or fut. (B.J 
^ Afterwards eroijxos, 

* From irpo, hSog : only found in nom. of all numbers. 
^ Begin with adj. Have, has, are not to be translated. 



ON THE MOODS. 



§ 12. On the Moods. 

67. a. 1) The moods of the aorist do not refer to 

past time^ and are therefore rendered by 
the present in EngUsh. 
2) The moods of the aorist express moment- 
ary\ actions ; those of the present, ton 
tinued ones. 

^ , ^) J^ni Xhe participle of the aorist does refer 
% • , • tQ\p^st time. nB(y(iv, having fallen, 
, 68. a] \vHen it forbids^ takes the imperative of 
the pfeseiat, i he subjunctive of the aorist.'" 

[In doing the exercises, consider (1) whether a single 
definite action is spoken of: or a continued action, or 
habit. Having thus determined whether the aorist 
should be used, or the present, (2) if yon use the present ^ 
you must also use the ifnperative ; if the aorist, the sub- 
junctive.] 

Of course the subj. of the present must be used for the.^rs^ person 
(when the present is to be used), as the imperat. has no first person. 

69. The optative is the regular attendant of the 
historical tenses. Hence, 

70. b) The relatives and particles (except the com- 
pounds of ap] see 77,89), which take the subjunctive, 
after the present and fiture^ take the optative after the 
histcrical" tenses. 

Th*? optative is thus, in fact, the subjunctive of the historical tenses, 
answering to the imperfect and pluperfect of the Latin subjunctive. 

71. c) So the particles and pronouns, which go Avith 
the indicative in direct,"" take the optative in oblique"* 
narration. 

* Momentary is here used in a somewhat loose way, to express sin- 
gle definite actions, not contemplated as continuing. 

™ /ii with imperative present telis a man to leave off what he has 
already begun : /^j? with aor. subj., tells him not to begin the action. (H.) 
This is a consequence of the distinction pointed out, not a new dis- 
unction. 

■ i. e. Lnperf., aorists, and pluperf. 

• Oblique narration (sermo obliquus) is when the opinions assev 



so THE MOODS. 

72. a) {ifj xXtTzre, do not steal (forbids stealing gener 

ally\ 

yu] y.l{:\pr^q, do not steal (forbids stealing in a 
particular instance), 
ft) ^ TTUQeiftf, iva /'0CO5 /am here to see, 
( naQTrj V, iva id 0 t fi i, / was there to sec. 
" ovx s/co (or ov'A oida)^ otiolp TQancoixai, I doiiH 
. knoiv tvhich loay to turn myself, 
' ovy. uypv (or ot'x rjdtiv)^ ottol^^ rQanoijJir^v, I did 
not know lohich ivay to turn myself. 
c) rjQsro, 8L ovTcog t^oi, he asked if it were so, 

eXe^s [XGi, on 7] odogcpeQOi eig Trjv ttoIiv, ijVTTEQ 
6q(v7]v, he told me that the road led to the 
city which I saw. 

73. Vocabulary 12. 



Steal, vlinr^, 
Theftj vXon)], ijg, ij. 

Know, oJda.'i 
Whither, noi ; (in dependent ques- 

tions onoi.) 



Hons, &c., of another are related in the third person. " He said that he 
thought, &c." — " He said, */ think,' &lc." would be in direct narratior 
{scrmo rectus), 

P In dependent (or i.idirect) questions, the regular rule is to use, 
720^ TToaog ; voTog ; -nriXiKog ; 

(quantus?) (quails?) how old or big? 
but bnoaog^ bTToiog, onrjXiKog. 

not TTOT£ ; TTO? ; TtOV TTCO? J TToOcu y IT?} j 

when ? whither ? where ? how ? whence 9 how ? whither 1 

but OTZOTf., OTTO I, OTTOV, GTTCOg, OTToOcu, OTTr]. 

So, also, not rig, but bang. But the direct interrogatives are ver^r 
often used in indirect questions, as : jjpwra /^s n' g £ir,v, he asked me wh 
[ was. 

<i Properly a perf. from eUoj, see. I have perceived=I know. 

o76a,'icrdi, elhirjv^ £iJco, eidevai^ sijcof. 
Plup. rjSeiv. Fut. SLGOjiai {clSncrw). 

Perf. oiSa^ olcQa, o7Se I iCTTuv^ Xarov J XauEv^ icrre, ^cdcri, 
Plup. S. rjSeiv, Att. 7jor] (from liosa). 

rjSeig. commonly fihiaQa^ Att. rjSrjaOa, « * 

ijSei^ Att. iiSscv, and §6rj. 

p. jSeineu and rifJim'. 



ON THE I\T00D5. 



81 



Turn, 
To ask, 



tqIttco (Mia, turn myself). 
r^Qo^fjVj aor. 2 : (f^ojT^co used 



Road, 

Lead (of a road), 
See, 

To be so, 



for the other tenses.) 
cdog, ov, 1:. 

ovTODg tyeiv (to have thenv 



selves so.) 



To be found or brought m 



alonai^ (with gen,) 



guilty, 
Battle, 
Fight, 



ha (=^^^0 



That, in order that. 



That, after verbs of telling ozi, (with indie, unless the 
&c.,forLatinacc?^5. with optative is required by 



For what is s'yu sometimes used? [to know: so 'non habeo quo 
me vertam.') What are strengthening particles, and with what 
words are they often used 7 (yl, at least; -io^ very ; en, nov:. They 
are frequently used with relatives.) 



74. I am here to see the battle. I was here tu set the 
battle. Do not pursue what is disgraceful.^^ The 
road leads to Athens. The boy says that the road leads 
to Athens. The boy told me that the road led^ to Athens 
Do not deceive youi^father (of a particular instance of 
deceit). The Persian was found guilty of murder. J 
asked him what he Avas doing. He asked me who 1 
was. Who are you {plur.)l: I asked them who they 
were. He told me that Xenoclides comm.anded them 



The tenses supplied from the roots d;:, d6: ooaco, oxpofim^ 'tcoooKa, €^3- 



* a^iaKOjjiaL (am taken or caught), oKojao^ai^ laXtOKa. Aor. £aAfj» 

The a is long in the augmented, short in the unaugmentcd forms. 
See lote on 51. 6. 



infinitive. 



71. The acc. Avith in fin. 
al^o* occurs. See 91. b.) 



Exercise 18. 




38 



ON THE MOODS. 



icith ttvo other s.^^ Do not steal these things. Do iiol 
accustom yourself to deceive your mother. I was there 
to fight. He asked me whether these things were 
so. 



§ 13. The Moods continued. 
On el and av. Conditional Propositions, 
Introductory remarks on «V. 

75. This particle (of which Hermann considers the 
real meaning to be by chance^ perhaps ; but Hartung, 
else^ otherwise) gives an expression of contingency and 
mere possibility to the assertion. 

76. lis principal use is in the conclusion of a hypo- 
thetical sentence ; and when it stands in other sentences, 
it often refers to an implied condition, 

77. It coalesces with several particles, so as to form 
one word with them. 

Thus with 81, ore, ineibfi 

it forms idv, i]v, av, ozav, insiddv, • 

78. The av = idv, ei av, regularly begins the sen- 
tence, and is thus distinguished from the simple ay, 
which must have some words before it 



79. d (like our ^i/') has the two meanings of ^y* and 
whether : it goes with the indie, or optative ; but not, in 
good writers, with the subjunctive. — (See example in 
72. c.) 

80. a) Possibility without any expression of uncer- 

tainty ; H with indie, in both clauses. 



* See 334. 



ON THE MOODS. 



39 



b^Uncertainty with the prospect of decision , 
idv with subjunctive in the conditional, and 
the indie, (generally the future) in the con- 
sequent clause. 
c) Uncertainty without any such accessary no- 
tion : ft with the optative in the conditional 
clause, and dv with the optative in the con- 
sequent clause. 
d) Impossibility^ or belief that the thing is not 
so : H with imperfect or aorist indie, in the 
conditional clause ; dv with imperf or aor- 
ist indie, in the consequent clause. 

1) The imperfect is used for 'present time, or when the time U 
quite indefinite. 

2) Jf both condition and consequence refer to past time, the aor- 
ist must be used, at least in the consequent clause ; unless the con- 
sequence is to be represented as continuing. 

3) The condition may refer to past, and the consequence to pres- 
ent time. 

el iireinQrjv, ovk av rippcxtarovp^if Ihad (then) been persuaded, I should 
not (now) be out of health. 

81. a) ( el e^QovTr^as xai r/GrQaipev, if it has thunder^ 

< cd it has also lighteiied, 
(bit I h/Eig, h 6 if y ou have any things give 
it. 

b) idv 71 €)rcofi8v, dcoaofiev, if we have any 

things we will give it. 

c) eirigravza TiQdrrot, iieya \i dv ca qp s P. o"Tr^, — 

if any one should do tliis.^ he loozild do me a 
great service. 

d) ur\ elj^ev, ididov dv, if he had any thing,"" he 

would give it. 
€1 ri 'iaiev, adco^ev dv, if he had had any 
things he would have given it. 

82. Vocabulary 13. 

To benefit, to do a service, (xicpeUco. 
Hurt, injure, _ ^Idnrco. 
Kill, put to death, dno-^ijelvco. 



° It is implied, that he has not any thing. 



40 



ON THE MOODS. 



Speak the truth, 



TalavT-jr, ov^ to, 
ovdt\ 



Mina, 
Talent, 



Not only — but also 
Even, 
Not even. 



^^s. todjcXciv^ ,6\a~T£iv, take besides acc. o£ person, an idj 
in the acc. neut.plur., where ue should use adverbs ; rery, more. &c 



83. If I have any thing,^^ I will givt, it. If you 
were to do this, you would confer the greatest benefit 
upon me (c). If any one should do this, he would 
greatly injure me. If I had a mina, I would give it to 
the slave. If he had had even three talents, he would 
have given them to his brother. If any one were to do 
(c) this, he Avould do the greatest^^ injury to the state. 
If you speak the truth (i. e. if lohat you say should 
"prove irue\ I will give you three talents. If the wise 
were to manage the affairs of the state, they would con- 
fer a great benefit^® upon all the citizens. If this be 
so,^^ I will go away at once. If you were really wise, 
you would admire the beauty of virtue. I am here to 
see not only tlie city, hiit also the whole^° country. If 
the citizens were wise, they would have killed not only 
Xenoclides, but also Philip. If you should he found 
guilty'^'' of nmrder, the citizens v/ill put you to death. 



84. a) The optative with liv is equivalent to oui 
*nay^ might, would, should, &c. 

^ fach a verb as ^ I do not say* is understood : I saw, not that my 
on, hut also &c. = I saw (/ do not say) that (Z saw) my Bon, but 
also, &c. 




Exercise 14. 



14. The Moods continued. 



ON THE r.roODrs. 



4i 



K properly refers (as our tcould, &c.) to a condition supposed, 
Thus.m (36*. a), ^ I icould gladly see it,' (/it ^vere possible; in (3G*. 6) 
'one could not,' &c. i/one were to look. 

85. h) The optative with ai^ is often translated by 
the future. 

The Attics v/ere peculiarly fond of e^^pressln^ themselves in a 
doubtful way ; of avoiding all positiveness in thf ir assertions ; and 
hence the optative with au is used of the most positive assertions. 

86. c. d. e.) av gives to the infinitive and the parti- 
ciple the same force that it gives to the optative. 

Thus (as in S6*. d) the injln. gets the force of an injln. future."^ 
This is the common way of expressing the future after verbs of 
hoping thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, confessing, &c., when 
it is dependent on a condition expressed or implied. 

Of a positive unconditional expectation, the infinitive without 
av is to be used ; the future, if future time is to be strongly mark- 
ed ; if not, the aor. or present, according as the action is raonimtary 
or continued. (K!.) 

86*. a) ijdtcog av {}eaGCiiu7]v tuvtu, I would gladly 
see this, or, / should like to see this, av- 
'd'ooDTZop di(/[dt(j7toop ovx av Tig evooi, a 
man^ or, one could not find a more shame^ 
less felloiv. 

b) ov'A av cpevyoig, you vill not escape. 

c) Tioaov av DISC evQEiv ra oa y.Ti]uaTa ticolov* 

fxera ; hoio much do you think your pos- 
sessions ^voiild fetch (hteralh/, find) ij 
they were sold ? 

d) ovx eaTLv eia avdoa a v bvvrd'Jjv a i ttote anavia 

ravzaTToa^ai, it is not possible that one man 
should ever be able to do all this. 

e) zalla^ aiconco, tto/j! dp i'/pv unuv, I hold niy 

tongue about the rest^ though / should have 
much to say. oiizei uigOop^ dig tt s q i y e v 6 fx 



^ yoabnv av=-scripturum esse. 

yeyoa-jZiaL ai = SCripturu m flllSSe. 
ypd'paL av = {G) scripturum fuisse, or 

RS pres. (6) scripturum esse. 
ypj-'SsLv av=scripturum fore. (K.) 
ypdrpsLv av is proved, I think, to be correct by Hartung, against P(?r« 
ton, Hermann, &c. Kuhner and Rost both agree with Hartung. 
For ra aAXa, 



^2 



ON THE MOODS. 



vog av\ 7^v TTohfiicov, he asks for pay on 
the plea that he could then conquer his 
enemies. 



87. Vocabulary 14. 

^ Would (or should) like 
to ' (how trans- 
lated?) 

See, behold^ 
Shameless, 

ShamelessnesSjimpudence, 
Find; (of things sold)fetch, 
Possession, 
Acquire, get, 

Sell, 

Can, am able. 

How is ^it is possible^ 

sometimes expressed ? 
One, 

Hold my tongue about. 
Ask for : in mid, ask for 
myself. 

Pay, 

Conquer, get the better of. 



ridscog^'^ gladly, {ridiut at 
should like ex- 
tremely ; r^dTov av 

I would rather than.) 

avaibrig, rig, eg. 
avaldsia^^ ag. rj, 

xr^^w,^ atog^ ro. 
ardoixai, (perf. yJnTrjfiai == / 
possess.) _ 

by 8GZfv. 

eig, fiia, tv. G. hog, fiiag, &C> 
aiodndco, (with fut. mid.) 

aiT8G). 

fAiod^og, OV) 6. 

7T8Qiy{yvofiai,{\Yiihge7i. See 
15, note 1.) 



t Literally ' as thus being-likely-to-conquer.' 

y From i]Svg, sweet. Adverbs in ojj are formed by adding w<r lo the 

root; icaX-df, Ka\cog' ra;^-i5?, ra;^£-os", Tw^^e'cog, 

» The termination la becomes eia when derived from adjectives in 
r??,by contraction with the e of the root ; dvaiSfny dvaiSe-og, dvaiSeia. The 
a is then shortened, and the accent thrown back to the last syllable but 
two. a is an inseparable particle, meaning ' not ' in compound words. It 
generally takes v before a vowel : a, not, aiS, the root of words denoting 
reverence, respect, shame, &c. 

* evpiaKO)^ €vp)]ao), cvprjKa^ evprjfjiai. evpov^ evpojjrjv^ evplQriv. Verb adj. 

^ See 8. note a. 

* Juva/^atj 6viYi<joiiaf.^ SsSvvrjuai, fj^vvrjOrjv. (2 sing. cvvaaatJ) 



> ox THE 310 ODS. 



49 



Escape from. 
Black, 

Flatterer, 
Flatter. 

Ever, at any time, 

Just, 

Faithful, 

How much, 

Think, 

Hope, 



qevyco, {acc, fut. mi<l.) 
fitXag. air a J av. 

y.olay.H'O}. 

diy.aiog, «, or. 
niaiog, oV. 
noGor^ (neut.) 



Exercise 15. 



S8. One cannot find a more shameless flatterer. One 
cannot find a blacker dog. You will not escape from 
those who are pursuing you. If I possessed a talent. I 
would not ask you^ for pay. It is not possible that yoUj 
being a man, should be able to deceive the gods. You 
will not deceive God, the judge of all. I should like to 
find these things. I should like to see the old geometers. 
Let us fly from the shamelessness of wicked men. You 
will not find a juster judge. Do not steal the poet's gold. 
Do not flatter. If you do this, you will conquer your 
enemies. How much do you think the eagle will fetch, 
it offered for sale? I asked him how much (72, note] 
his possessions would fetch, if sold? I will ask for 
three talents, 07i the plea that I shall then conquer 
(86*. e) all mv enemies. I hope that you Avill be able to 
do all this (S6*. d). 



15. The Moods continued. 



89. a) The compounds of lir [hlr, orar, Ineibdv^ &c. 



^ -6-e ; inierrog. when ? 

• o^iouai and e"" at (2 Sing. oUl), oif](rQ^ai, r,yfj9r}V, Imperf. wc/tTjJ', ^i^n^^ 




4S 



ON THE MOODS. 



77) regularly take the subjunctive. The 
same rule applies to relatives with av, 

90. h) When they come mto connection with j)ast 
time or the oblique narration^ they either remain 
unchanged, or the simple words (i/, or£, imiht] — ow", ociztg, 
oao^*, &c.) take their place with the optative (69). 

90*. c. c?. e) When these compounds cf uV, and rela- 
lives with aV, go witli the suhjiinctive of the aoristyihey 
answer to the L3,iin future perfect futuruDi exactuni), 

91. a) naqiGoiim iav ti dtri- (60,^), / will coine to you 

(or, be loith you), if I am loanted, 
6) iq)}] TraQtaead-ai^ tiridtoi or dai^aoi, he said 
that he would come^ if he were loanted. 

c) ^t6is dt]j^ oTCip a iq]]' Ttoirig, eifzvx^i^^ then only 

are you prosperous^ ivhen you do what you 
ought, tore 5//, oiav a lorj noujai^g, evTv^riaeig^ 
then only to ill you be jjrosperous, when you 
have done*^ yoit ought {ium demum, 

quum ofFicia tua expleveris, felix eris). 

d) intidav aTzuvia a>iOv a 7]t e, KQivaiSj when (oi 

after) you have heard all, decide, 

e) dtacpOnQEi 0,71 av hi^ri, he will destroy whatever 

he takes or lays hold of (ceperit). 

92. Vocabulary 15. 

At all, r/, (neut. of t40- 

Also, xaL 

One ought, XQ^- 

If there is any need, or oc- v> ' v . 

^ tav Ti Ctrl, or ei xi otoL 

casion. 
Am prosperous, or fortun- 
ate; prosper, ^ 

§ TL=at all. eav TI OCT], if it should be at all necessary. 
^ Then truly (and not hefoYe)=then only. 

» ^pfj (oportci) — %f>£''7, xPlh XP^'^'^h P^'^'i- TfiG''-f-t. (to) %j9£cor. Imperf. 

c;^jOf;2/ or %pj7i^ {^not, e^P^) • fut. '^pfiaei. 

^ Properly, * when you shall have done but in English a future 
action, that is to precede another future action, is generally put in the 
present or perfect tense. We do not, that is, mark that it is now fu- 
ture, but consider ourselves as removed by the * whenl &c. to the tirnf. 
of its happening. 



ON THE MOODS , 



45 



For tune J 
Hear^ 

Judge, decide^ 

When, 

Tlieu, 

When ? 

Destroy, 

Take, 

Whosoever, v/n^^tsoever, 
When, after, 

{rrapsTpai, to be present {lu 
to assist; where we should 



y.oirco. 

0 

TOTB. 
TTOZe / 

STisidri, or ivith cir^ Inuddv, 

or there)^ is often used of being present 
e ^coine to you^^ or ' be with you/) 



Exercise 16. 

H^When the consequent verb is in the fut. ^ how is ' z/' transk- 
ted 7 with what mood ?— 81.6. 

93. He sa^^s that he will come, if he is vrantea (91. b). 
If we do what we ought, we shall be happy. If the 
citizens were to do^^ what they ought, they would be 
prosperous. If the citizens had done what they ought 
{imjjerf.)^ they would be prosperous {noio). When I 
have any thing, I v/ill give it. When they see this, 
they v/ill fear. When you have managed the affairs of 
tfie state well, you shall manage mine also. He hopes 
that he shall (thus) be able to deceive the gods also. I 
am glad that the enemy are destroyed.^ If the enemy 
had done this, they would have been destroj^ed. The 
judge said, that he v/ould come, if he were wanted. 



* Fut. d<ovcrou.ai (but aor. 1. rjKOVaa)^ fiKriKoa^ rjKOVcr^al. 

orav when the subj. should be used with au. 
^ CLar^pdeinoj, ciai)Qcp'2^- cit-pOapKa. 

P The neut. of ocng has sometimes a mark like a comma (called 
iiasiole or hypo diastole) after the to distinguish it from ort, that, (ojn.) 



0 



46 



ON THE MOODS. 



§ 16. The Moods continued. 

94. a) The optative is used of what happened often^ 
when the time spoken of is past. 

1) *For pres. or future time^ the relatives with av and compounda 
of av could be used. 

2) To relatives au gives in this way the force of our ever. Sg 
(= quicumque, siquis) whoever, any man who; in plur. all who. 

^5. a) vnEQcoov"^ er/^ev on ox iv aarei'' diazQiBo t,* \e 
had an upper chamber whenever he stayed 
in town. 

b) sTTQaTTsv ct 3 6^8i £v uvTM, ho did what (in each 

case) seemed good to him. 

c) ov(; (pi^v) i'doi evTccKJCog y.ai ai(07iy lovzag, in^vet,^ 

he used to praise those whom (at any time) 
he saw marching in good order and i7i si" 
lence. 
96. Vocabulary 16. 
Upper chamber, vneQ^ov, ov, to. 

Whenever, onoie. 
Stay (in a town), diaroi^M, 
It seems good, (= videtur,videntury 

a doxH [xoiy what seems 
good to me^what I please 
or choose to do). 
Ir. good order, tvrdyjcag. 
Rank, zdlig, fo^/ ^. 

^ vTreptooVi adj. understand uhiifia. v-irepcoiogy aws from vTrep^ as ira 

rpcoVo?, cpog from Trarfip. (P.) 

' aaTv is used of Athens as we use * town' of London. 

• SiaTpiPeiv^ to rub (or wear) away, ^P'^uou. Piov {conierere tem.pus 
terere vitam). Without acc. to linger, stay, &c. 

* The imperfect of an habitual action ; translated by * used to,' &c 
See 2. Obs. 

« SoKco) ^eem and also think), 66^cj, SiSoyfxai (visus sum), aor. 1. 
XSo^a. (The 3 sing, SokcT, imperf. eooxsi, Jy(£t, £jo|£(j/), SeSoKrai). 

▼ raaaoi, real root ray. Hence Tay-(Tiqr=.rali<;. Nouns in ai^y ciQj 



% 



ON THE MOODS. 



47 



Order, arrange, 
Dining-rocm, 

March (of a single soldier), 

Silence, 

Horse-soldier, 

To charge an enemy, 



GLCxlTTl], Tjg, i], 

iTiTTevgy €cog, 6 {plur. caval- 

iXavveiv 8ig{with ace, some- 
times, f;?/). 



Exercise 17. 
i;^ What is tnefut, of cTraij/fw?— 60, note d. 

97. He had a dining-room whenever he stayed in 
town. The judge had an upper chamber whenever he 
stayed in town. I praise all whom I see (94. 1) acting 
well. The judge praised all whom he saw acting well 
1 will do whatever (94.1) I please.^^ / ^j^gj^j^y^j. 
took any city, he used to kill all the citizens. When I 
have taken^- the city, I will kill all the citizens. When 
you have taken the city, do not kill the citizens. I praise 
those who march in silence. If you march in good or- 
der, I will praise you. Who would not admire cavalry 
marching {riding) in order? The cavalry of the Per- 
sians charge the ranks of the enemy. / should like to 
see^^ cavalry charging the enemy. 



§ 17. On the Moods. 

98. The subjunctive is used in doubting questions 
either alone, or after ^ovXsi, ^tXeig {do you wish ?), 

So also after oi;/c ex(^ (or oUa: 72. b), and dTTonc^ (soj) lamataloss^ 

iffom verbs, denote regularly the absLract notion of the verb. Hence 
rc|t5s=the putting in order ; but also, order j a place assigned, &c. 

^ =sdi/coya.toi/ from aj/co, yata, earthy ground. 

* £7/i:, ihoy (not to be confounded with ££>i', surri). 



4S 



ON THE MOODS. 



eo'^-rco (dco) ask (rjrio (eoj) seek. (Optat. after ihe historical tenses 
72.6.) 

99. a) §ov).Eiy olv oaoTZKt fxEv ; do you, ivis/i then^ that 
we should consider (tlie question) ? 
h) noOtv ^ovlti uQl(oixai ; lohat do you icish me 
to he gin voith 7 

c) 11 noL(a; what shall I do7 what am I to do7 

TIB I rpuTTOjfxai ; lohither shall I turn myself 7 

d) a 171 CO ovv aoi to aiziov ; shall I then tell you 

the cause ? 

e) fi'v a'/.ov a CO'- al^ig — ; shall I noiv hear 



100. Vocabulary 17. 
Wish, 

Consider, examine, 

Whence. 

Begin, 

Cause, 

Again, 

Then [of inference)^ 
Am at a loss, 
Seek, 



^ovlo^ai, {^tXo3 or iOeXo). 

aoyofxai, 
aiTtov,^ ov, r6» 
avdig. 

GIV. 



{dcp'' vuoju, drro (7oO, &c. dp^dix£vog<i {having begun with you =) and 
you among the first ; and you as much as any body.) 



y 2. sing, of povXnixai, which with mronai and ot'o/mi always make u 
111 2. sing. pres. (o;//£i, oitt). 

* The subjunctive used in this way (subjunctivus dvhitativus or de 
liberaiivus) must not be mistaken for the future. 

» iOiXo) (the most general expression for wishing) denotes particu- 
larly that kind of wish in which there lies a purpose or design : conse- 
quently the desire of something, the execution of which is, or appears 
to be, in one's own power. PavXojxai, on the other hand, is confined to 
that kind of willingness or wishing, in which the wish and inclination 
^ towards a thing are either the only thing contained in the expression, 
or are at least intended to be marked particularly. Hence it expresses 
a readiness and willingness to submit to what* does not exactly depend 
upon oneself. — {Butt. Lexilogus, Eng. Trans. 134.) 

^ Properly adj. 

c From a, not, iropog, passage, outlet. 

^ The dp(dix£vos must be in the case of whatever it refers to. 



ON THE MOODS 



49 



Exercise 18. 

After what tenses must the opt. be used in dependent sen- 
tences 7 

101. What shall I say? Do you wish^ then, (that) 
u'e should go away? AVhat shall Ave do? Do you 
wish, then, thatAve should tell 3'ou the cause? Do you 
wish that I should hold-my-tongue-about this ? "Do you 
wish, then, that I should begin ? All men, and you as 
muck as any body, praise this man. This eagle has a^'^ 
black head. They praise 7iot only'^^ the mother, hut alsc 
the daughter. Not only yon, but also your friends, Avill 
prosper, if you do this. We must bear wliat fortune 
sends [ichat comes from for tiine^'^). You yourself shall 
hear. I am at a loss what (72. note p) to do. They are 
at a loss w^hich Avay to turn themselves. They did not 
know which way to turn themselves. 



% IS, The Moods contmned, 

102. a) un^^oc {or i^dcoaen:' ^ Compare ex- 

b) u . i ,yo,, dov^ac «,-. . ^^^^^^^^ 
C) ei 1 1 bv/tv.bCfi] ooi vai av. ) ^ 

103. a) Vv'hen conditional propositions become de- 

pendent on another verb, the consecfuent 
clause is in the infinitive, 
h) Instead, therefore, of the optative with civ (in 
81. c) Ave shall haA^e the infin. ivith up. 

c) Instead of the imperfect or aorist with av (81. 

d) AA'e shall haA'e the present ox aorist infin. 
Avith av, 

104. a) Instead of the indie, future (81. b) Ave shall 

haA^e the infin, future : and d with opta- 
tive instead of tdv with siibj., if in connec- 
tion AA^th^^a^^ time. 



Also €1 Ti l-)y£i (or ^x^f), z(pr] ccoceiv av. See 86. note w. 

3 



50 



OV AND 1^7]. 



105. Thus where we should have had in the coiisB 
que7it clause, 

, \ TZOioTu av, ^ Tzoimaiu aVy \ TzenoimQia av^ 

' ^ I ETiotovv ai', ( 87TOi)](ya av, ( mEnoiiqKEiv aVy 
we shall have, 

7Z0Li]O£iv, Tiomv av, noiqaai av, TTETZoirjasvai av 



Exercise 19. 

106. He said that, if you were to do this, you vv^ould 
do him the greatest service.^^ I said that, if any one 
should do this, he would greatly injure me. He said 
that, if he had a mina, he would give it to the slave. 
He said that, if any one were to do this, he would do the 
greatest injury to the state. He said that he was there 
to see the battle. How much do you think that youi 
horses would fetch, if they were sold (86''. c) ? Who 
would not wonder at the shamelessness of this basest 
flatterer ? He told me, that his daughter had very beau- 
tiful hands. ^2 i should extremely like to see'^^ the wise 
men of old.^ ' If the Persians of the present daif^ were 
wise, they would be doing better. I should wish to be 
contented with what comes from the gods.^^ 



% 19. Qv and [x]]. 

107. 1) OV deip.ies independently and directly. 

2) fii] does not deny independently and directly, 
but in reference to something- else ; to some 
supposed case, condition or purpose ; or in 
the expression of some fear, solicitude, or 
care, 

JOT* 1) jw^ is used in all prohibitions (see 32. Obs.) 
2) With all conditional particles, ei, idv (^y, av). 



01' AND ft/;. 51 

oiav, STTBiddvy &c., and with ore, OTToze, 
'when^^ if a condition is implied (111. d). 
3) With all particles expressiijg intention or 
purpose ; ha, oncjg^cog, &c. 
Note, — In the same cases the compounds of fii] will 
be used when required. 

lOS. But ov is used with on, clog {that) : and also with 
imi, iTzeidt] {lohen^ after, and as ctt7/5aZ conjunctions, as^ 
since), because they relate to actual facts. 

109. a. b,) ov is also [generally) used when the 
opinions^ &c. of another person are stated in oblique 
narration. 

For though these seem to be dependent, they are only distingui tri- 
ed from direct assertion in form. 

110. c) In negative propositions, positive pronoung 
and adverbs should be translated into Greek by the cor 
responding negative forms. 

Hence the particles for neither — nor are to be lised for either — oi 
after a negative ; and 770, nobody^ nowhers, for any, anybody, any 
ichere, &c. (See note t " Questions on the Syntax. § 19.) 

111. a) ov'A i&sleiv^ ctr^GiVy he says that he does not 
choose, 

b) fofil^si ov y>aXop thai, he thinks that it is noi 

honor able, i^*) 

c) ov dvvarai ovz ev Ityeiv, ovx ev noitlv rovg qsi 

lovg, he cannot either speak ivell of his 
friends, or treat them well, 

d) oi'ii i^riv sl(J£)Mhp nuQa rov arQarriyov, ottots fiij 

ciold'C,oi, persons were not allowed to go in 
to the general, loheji he ivas not at leisure. 
(Here a condition is implied: if\\Q was not 
at leisure at that time.) 

112. Vocabulary 18. 

Nobody, ovdsig, f^irjdsig, -fAia, -iv^ 

Not a single person, ovbi slg, fir^ds £ig. 



' Of edsXw, deXoj (see 100, note a), the former is the common prosa 



52 



OV AND fXl], 



No longer, 

Not even. 

Neither, nor, 

Neither, nor yet, • 

Both, and, 

Unle-ss, 

Go into, 

Go away. 

Company (= intercourse 

with), 
Bid, order, 

One is allowed (licet). 
To be at leisure, 
Leisure, 



ovyJzi, fzi]H8nJ 
oide, {xr^ds, 

0VT8 — ovrs : firirs- — fii^ti, 
ovTS — ovda: ^i^rs — (Ai^ds, 
aai — xa/, or ti — v,aL 
ii 117], 

5 t 




fry 

oyola^co, 

cyolr] {(Jxolriy dcwly : with 



a verb = am slow to do a 
thing, &c.) 



Obs. re — Ku'i is very often used, where we should only use ^and,* 
— The notions are thus brought into closer connection, and the rl 
prepares us for the coming kul. 



V^^hen should /</; K\ii:Te be us^d 7 when nh KYixprji ? 72. 

113. 1 will go away (65, note g), that I may not see 
the battle. Let us no longer pursue tvhat is disgrace- 
ful.^^ He told me, that the ro^^d did not lead to Athens 
^108). Do not think, that the citizens serve you. If you 
Jo not do what you ought (91. c), you v/ill not prosper. 
No longer accustom yourself to deceive your father. I 
will not take it, unless }^ou bid (me). Let no one steal 
this. Let not a single person go aAvay. He says that 
the boys do not wish to go away. Let us not fly-from 
the company of the good. He said that, unless the citi- 
zens performed him this service^^, he v/ould lay Vv^asto 
the rest'® of the country. I shall be slow to do that.^^ 



9 en is yet, still; with negatives, any longer. 

^ cp%Ofta', eXevcofiaij e\fi\vda, (iiXvOov) rjXdoi'. See G5. note g. 



Exercise 20. 



VERBALS IN ziog. 



53 



<| 20. Verbals in rtog. 

114. These verbals are formed both from titans, and 
intrans. verbs: and also from mid. {deponent) verbs, 
since they are sometimes used in a passive meaning. 

115. a) They are passive, and take the agent in the 
dative ; but they also govern the object in the same case 
as the verbs from vv^hich they come. 

116. a) When used in the neuter (with the agent in 
the dat, omitted), they are equivalent to the participle in 
dus used in the same way, and express: ^ one mustj 
ought &c. ; ^loe, you, &c. must^ought,^ &c. ; or, Hsto 
he^ (fee. 

117. h) When formed from transitive verbs, they may 
also be used in agreement loith the object, the agent 
being still in the dative. Here, too, they exactly agree 
with the participle in dus, 

118. Two peculiarities in Attic Greek deserve notice : 

1. The neut, plur. is used as well as the 7ieut. 

sing, 

2. The agent is sometimes put in the accus. 

as well as the object. 

119. c) '\'5i'hen a verb has two constructions with 
different meannigs, the verbal adjective sometimes has 
both : thus 7zeic>7i!ov with accus. has the meaning oi per- 
suade {ttsl&sl^ wot); with the dat. that of to obey 

120. a) G. icn^vfXTjtsov iarl zr^g 6:Qsr7]g, we, you, 

should desire virtue. 
D. S7T i^^F! (^^7^r b. ov iarl cqy(;\wcyyou,&LC, 

shopJd :^^et aboirt the loork. 
A. y^olaari^v it^z^ tov Tiatda, we, z,'oUf &c. 
should punish iVit? boy. 
7 \ 5 / 5 , , , ^ ) VOH sh<^uid 
^ . ' / , r V , ^ , ' ' V cultivate ^n*^ 



' Perf. 2. (or mid.) trt-noi.da^ I trust, or Jtcl smt : I am persuaded. 



64 



VERBALS IN rtog. 



c) 7T816TS0V laiiv avTov, we must persuade him. 
neiareov lozh avTco, loe must obey him, 

N. B. These examples may all be translated passive 
ly. Virtue should be cultivated, (fcc. 



121. Vocabulary 19. 
To practise, exercise, culti- 
vate. 
Desire 

Set aboutj take in hand, 

Work, task, production, 
Parent, 

Attempt, endeavour, try, 

Permit, suffer. 

Restrain by punishment, 

punish, chastise. 
Run or fly to the assistance 

of. assist in the defence of. 



ETTi-d^vfjieco [gen. from c/r/, 
on, d^vfiog, mind, passion), 
mi'X^iQ^co, {dat, from ini^ 

tqyov^ ov, to. 
yovevg, icog, 6, 

TTSiQcHofiaf, (verb. adj. neiQa- 
reog). 

idco^ (verb. adj. iajsog). 
HoXc/Xco, (fut. -daofAUi), 

§or]^eo3i (dat,) 



Obs. These verbals should be formed from aor. 1 pass.'^hy reject 
ing the augment, turning Oriv into rio?, and therefore the preceding 
aspirate (if there is one) into its mute {i. e. nr, kt^ for cpO, '^Q). 

Form verbals from Jico/cw pursue^ <peuya) Jly from^ to(pe'\£c»3 

benejit. 



Exercise 21. 

l22. The great work must be .set about. We must 
not shun the labour. All the citizens should confer 
benefits on the state. He said that all the citizens 
ought to confer benefits on their country (state), when 
there is any occasion. We must fly-to-the-assistance of 

^ Augment t. 

^ From 00 fj cry, dcco run. 

* For if the aor. 1. has a different vowel, &c. from perf, pass., the 
verbal adj. follows it, and not the perf. 



DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 



55 



our country. We must set about the task of chastising'* 
the boy. If the slave had done this, it would^^ be ne- 
cessary to punish him. If the boy should do this, it 
would be necessary to punish him. He told us, that if 
this were so,'^'' we ought to set about the t£Csk. We must 
punish not only^^ my boy, hut also my brother's.^ Pa- 
rents^^ and poets^ love their own productions. He said 
that virtue should be cultivated by all. Whoever {oang 
ap, 94. 2) is^^ caught, ^shall be punished. We must not 
be slow^^ to obey our parents. 



^ 21. Double Accusative, 

123. Verbs oi taking away from^ teachings conceal- 
ing, askijig, putting on or off^ take two accusatives. 

124. a) Qt] ^ a lovg yQijiiar a° fiir^aav,^ they asked 

the Thebans for money. ^ 

b) ov 6 8 ano'AQv\p(o ravra, I will not hide this 

from you. 

c) lovg TtoXei-iiovg tijv vavv a7TE6TEQi]xafi8v, 

we have deprived the enemy of their ship. 

d) didddxovai rovg Tzaidag (j(oq:Q0Gvv7iv, they teach 

the boys modesty {moderation or self-re- 
straint,) 

e) TOP nalda i^^dvae tov iirm'a^ he stript the boy 

of his tunic. 

125. Vocabulary 20. 
Thebans, Qrj^aToi, ol 

Money, ^QijfxaTa, id {pi. of XQW^O- 

" The art. must be repeated before ^poets' or the meaning would 
be * those who are parents and poets ;' in other words, hsth attributes 
would be spoken of the same subject. 

° From ;^pajf<at (see 8, note a).^ It is only in the plur. that it 
means money, etc. Properly, a thing used, 

P alrcTaOaL in the mid. (sibi aliquid expetere) does not take two ac- 
cusati^ es, but one acc. ard Trapa, or one noun and an infin. (Poppa.) 



59 



DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 



Hide, 
Ship, 

Deprive of, 
Take away from, 
Teach, 

Modesty, moderation, self- 
restraint, 

To be wise, (i. e. prudent), 
or in one's right mind. 

To be mad. 

Die, 

Mortal, 

Immortal, 

Strip, or take off, 

Put on, 

Tunic, 

Misfortune, 



dcp-aiQsco." 
dldday.co.^ 

OOJCpQOPtW^ 

'{}vi](JX03^'^ dnoOvijay.o}. 

dv-qrog, ?/, 6v. 

dOdvaTog, og or, 

exdvoj,^ I in ??iid, " on or ofl 

iydvco,'' \ myself." 

yjToip, y covog, 6. 

dvaTTQuyia, ag. rj. 



But for, 
All but, 



Phrases. 



£1 [A}] did (acc.) 
oaov ov (i. e. just as much 
as not). 



^ In aor. 2. this verb has /i for charact. 

' ' - vrjeg, vccoVj vavat, 



These are the forms 



Act. I teach. Mid. I have (them 



as used in Attic Greek. 

• alpeoj (rjiTO), ^c), eiXoVf -^piBriv. 

* ^i6aGK0i, (5c(5a(w, -ojxaiy Sedioa^^a. 
taught. 

^ '^oj(ppo(Jvvr]v .... quam soleo equidem quum temperantiam turn 
moderationem appellare, nonnunquam etiam modestiam. (Cic.) — ivvnt 
abstract noims from adj. in coi/ (especially) and others, cujfpwv (from 
crw? salvus, (bpfiv mens), moderate, temperate, — jirudent. 

^ [iaLvojxai, fxavovixai^ liCfxuva (with meaning of pres.), aor. eixdur]v. 

^ OufjaKco, Qavovjxai^ riOvrjKa, edavov. The pevf. and aor. = I am dead. 

» ^uco, go into, and also make to go into, — sink^ enclose. Act. fut. 
and aor. with the trans, meaning. Mid. Svofxat, {Sva-ojiaL, tSixrnnrjv) en- 
close 7nyself=zput on (a garment). I'Svu {6v0i — Swai^ 6og) has also this 
meaning. Hence evSvco, put on : ekSou)^ put off, strip (with fut. and 
aor.) ; both oi another : mid. of myself. 

y And under-garment v/ith sleeves, over v/hich a mantle y/as worn 
out of doors. 



THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VERBS. 



51 



Outside, without. 



outward things. 



External, 
Within, 



6 ?Sco (27). 



spdov (also, in doors, at 
home; hbov '/.aiala^tiVf 
to find a man in, or at 
home). 



Exercise 22. 
What is the literal English of el cid 1 

126. I will put on my tunic. Do not hide your mis- 
fortunes from me. We will teach our daughters mod- 
esty. O mother, do not teach youi daughter impudence 
We will take away this from the vvoman. Let us not 
teach these most disgraceful things to our boys. The 
rest of the Thebans were there to see the battle. He 
would have died^^ but for the dog. Let us not fly from 
the all but present war, I will put his tunic on the 
boy. If the enemy do this,^^ we will deprive them of 
their ship. I should have died^^ but for my faithful 
slave. This man has stript me of my tunic. If you do 
not perform me this service,^'^ I will deprive you of your 
pay. If we find him at home, we will kill him. He 
killed all who were within. Let us love the company 
of the temperate. Let us not fear external evils. 



<5> 22. The Accusative after Passive aud Neuter Verbs 

127. The accus, of the active becomes the nom, of 
the pass, 

128. a) If the verb governs two accusatives, that of 
person haQ^omesihe nominative ; that of the thing 

continues to be the object of the passive verb, as in Latin. 
But also, 

X29. b) The dat, of the active sometimes becomes 



3* 



58 THE ACCUSATlV^E AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VERBS. 

the novi. of the passive ; the object of the active co:r 
tinning to be the object oJf tlie passive in the accnsative 

130. d) Intransitive verbs take an acc. of a noun of 
kindred meaning ; and (as in qeiv ydla) of one that 
restincts the general notion of the verb to a particular 
instance. 

e) Here the ordinary accus. of the object is found together with 
this limiting accusative. 

131. a) aq!aiQs{>e]g* zyv aQxV"^, having had his 

government taken from him, 

b) 6 ^^coxQCiTTjg ETnTQSTTeTai irjv dtairav, Socra* 

tes is entrusted with the arbitration ; 
7T£77L67ev^ai^ 70VT0, this is entrusted to me, 
or lam entrusted loith this. 

c) h>y.07ii:)g Tovg 6 op al no v g, having had his 

eyes knocked, out. 

d) QHv ydla^ to flow with milk ; Iriv^ ^lov, to live 

a life ; yjidweveiv yurduvov, to brave a dan- 
ger ; TToXefiov TTolsfiEiv, to Wage a ivar ^ 
iinvov yioifxdad^ai, to sleep a sleep. 

e) ivixr]os t oh g ^ag^dgovg rrjv iv Magadiovi 

fxdy 7]v,he conquered the barbarians in 
the battle of Marathon. 

132. Vocabulary 21, 

To commit, confide, or en- , , . 

trust to, ' ' emzQeTZCo.t 

Entrust to, niorsvcot (also with dat, 

only, to trust a person). 

Arbitration. dtaira, r/g, r). 

Faith, • TTiarig, scog, ?/. 

Disbelieve, disobey (a pei- , / / 7 ^ \ 

son or law), ^ ^ 



« 1^25, xiote s. 

• lyod riarevoiiai (urrd tlvos)^ I am trusted j coTifided in, or believed. 
^ ^aw, ^pdo[jiai, TTsivdo), Siipdoj (live, use, hunger, thirst), contract at 

iU><0 r] (nc' a). ^w, ^^s', &C. 

t For the distinction between these words, see Index under * en- 
tr».si to 



THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, (SsC. VERBS. 



.5^ 



LaWj 

Cut out, knock out, 
Cut to pieces, 
Government, magistracy. 



Danger, 

Brave, incur, expose one- 
self to a danger, 
Eye, 
To sleep, 
Sleep, 
Fountain, 
Flow, 

Flows with a full or strong 
stream, 

Honey, 

Conquer, 

Victory, 

Barbarian, (i. e. one who is 

not a Greek), 
To hold a magistracy or 

office. 
Milk, 

River, 



rofxogf ov, o. 

ix-y>C7TTC0. 

'Aara-yiOTTZG), 

hqiY], rig, fj (also, begin- 
ning: acc. aqiriv, or 
aQxijv, used adverbially 
for at all, or ever, after 
negatives, Avhen an ac- 
tion is spoken of). 

yuvdvvoL;, ov, 6. 

mvdvveveiv Mvdvvov. 

oqjd^alfiog, ov, 6, 
y.oil^dofxai (aor, - d^^iv), 
vnvog, ov, 6. 
TTTjyri, rig, ri, 

nolvg QH, (the adj. being in 
the case and gender of 
its noun). 

^flf, ITOg, TO. 

ny.rj, rjg, rj. 
^d^UQog, ov, 6. 

ydla, ydlaxTog, to (R. ya* 
noraiiog, ov, 6. 



Exercise 23. 

133. I have had the arbitration entrusted to me. He 
said, thathehad had the arbitration entrusted to him (72. 
c). The eagle has had its eyes knocked out. The foun- 



® /5ccj, pvfiaronai, sppvrjKa ; aor. ippvrjv (flowed) ; {hppzvaa and pevao^ai^ 

not Attic). 



60 



THE ACCUSATIVE. 



tains flow with milk and honey. If the fountains flo\9 
both with milk and honey, we shall become rich.^^ If the 
rivers had flowed with wine, the citizens would have be- 
come rich. If the citizens are wise, they will put liiin to 
death. If the citizens are mad (aor.), they will put you 
to death. You will not be able (86*. b) to disbeheve 
your mother. The rivers are flowing with a strong 
stream. The thing has all btit^^ been done. I should 
have killed you, but for^^ your father. Sophroniscus 
had his governmen t taken away from him. He has had 
his government taken av\^ay from him. Hares have 
large eyes.^^ Let us try to bear what comes from the 
gods.^^ We must try^^ to bear what fortune sendsr^ 
He conqu3red the Persians in the battle that took place 
there {in the there battle), I will not expose myself to 
this danger. The people outside were cut to pieces. 1 
asked the boy himself, whether (72. c) the river was 
flowing with a strong stream. I asked Sophroniscus 
what magistracy he held. 

-V 

§ 23. The A ccusative continued. 

134. a) The accus.is used after nouns and adjectives 
where xa7«, as to^ might be supposed understood. 

It tlius limits the preceding word to a particular part^ circum- 
stance^ &c. 

135. b) The accus. of a neut. pronoun or any gener- 
al expression, is otten used in this way after verbs that 
would govern a substantive in another case. 

136. c) The accusative is used to express duration 
vf time, and the distance of one place from another. 

137. a] y.a),og to aco^a, beautiful in person, ^ooxQci- 

7rjg Tovrofia^'^ Socrates by 7ia?7ie, 7tX)]7T0}Aai 
7:i]v y.£(pal^r, lam struck on the head, ndv- 
7a evdcafxovH, he is happy in all respects. 



THE ACCUSATIVE. 



3\ 



b) TL'/Qocffxai avTcr, ; ivhai use shall I make of it'i 

what am h to do V'ith it 7 ovx olda o.ti ao I 
yQoctuui, I don't know what nse to make oj 
you ; I don't know what to do ivith you, 

c) 7io).vv yQovov, a long time, TQeTg olovg (AJjvag 

three whole vwnths, 7a noXld, mostly^ (for) 
most of his time, antyu dty.uaradLOvgy it is 
ten stadia off. 
d. TovvavTLOv/ on the contrary, to leyoi^evov, as 
the saying is. 



138. Vocabulary 22. 

Whole, 
Body, person, 
Month, 
Name, 
To strike, 



Unjust, 

Do injustice to, injure, 



InjusU: 

Staff, 
Insult, 



Insult, insolence, 

Reverence, 

Run away from, 



olog, ?/, ov. 

o^fia, UTog, 70. 

fj}':r, iir^vog, 6. 

ovofia, aiog, ro. 

Tzl/^acco {Att, 7r).i]rTG) : used 
by the Attics only in 
pe7f. act. and in the 
2^ass. For other tenses 
TTazdaao), tco, is used.) 

adixog, og ov, 

adixeoo [ace, of person and 

also of thing) 
adr/.ia, ag, rj (ddr/.eir ddi'/uaVf 

to commit an injury). 
Qa^dog, ov, Tj, 

ifgl^co (ace. : v^qiX^iv eig ri- 
va, to act insolently to- 
wards). 

v^qig, ecog, rj. 

aideofxaif aaofiai, et aor. 1 

pass.: (ace.) 
aTTodidQciaxco^ {acc.) 



• The suhj. used as in 99. c. expresses more doubt as to v/hat is tr 
he done than the fat, 
' =ro cvavTLov. 

.>acf Spas). 



iopav (^SpdOi, 6pair]Vf cpo-' (as, &,c.) cpS' 



4 



62 



THE ACCUSATIVE. 



To have no fear of, to be 



d^aoQtco iacc.) 



without fear of, 
Mild, gentle, 
Disposition, 
To be distant from, 



noaog,^ TiQccsTa, ttquov. 
ri&og, £og, ro. 

uTTE/co (mid. abstain from; 

gen.) 
y^QOLOixai {dat.) 
ojddiog or arddior. 



Use, do with, 
Stadium, 



Exercise 24. 



Why is oarig used in 137. b ? 72, note p. 

139. The boy is of a mild disposition. He told me 
that his daughter was of a mild disposition. If any one 
of your slaves should run away from you, and you 
should take him, what would you do with him?^^ A 
certain philosopher, Socrates by name, was there, to see 
the man. Accustom yourself to have-no-fear-of death. 
I am not without fear of the king of the Persians. I 
have been struck on my head.'' ^ He struck the boy with 
a staff. Accustom yourself to reverence your parents. 
Insult nobody. The injury (nom.) which they commit- 
ted against you. We ought to do^® what is just,^^ and 
abstain^ from what is unjust. The city is three stadia 
off. Let us avoid insolence, we must pursue what is 
just. Let us insult nobody. Let us no longer act mso- 
lently towards those who^ manage the affairs of the 
state. 



^ TTp^pg B. (-odos P. R. K.) lakes all fern, and neut. plur. as if 

from TTpavg^ TrpaeXa^ l\. pi. -rrpaia. Plur. mas. "rpaoi, Trpaeis'. G. TrpaCo)v I D. 
rrpdjig, rpaiai^i^) '. A. -rrpaivg^ -paug. 

» The verbal adj. from d-e-^eaBai is d'paKreog, a word not found in ~ 
Paseow's Lexicon, but used by Xenophon. It, of course, governs ths 
gen. 



THE GEN1TIV"'£ 



63 



§ 24. The Genitive. 

Obs. The fundamental notion of the genitive is separation,fnm^ 
proceedtnsr from; i. e. the notion of the prepositions //-otti, out of 
(B.) 

140. a) Partitives, numerals, snperlatives, &c. gov- 
ern the genitive. 

141. b) The genitive is used with adverbs of time 
and place. 

142. d) The genitive also expresses .he 7naterial 
out of which any thing is made; and generally such 
froperties^ circit??istances, &c. as ive should express by 
'of.' 

Obs. 1. b) Our indef. art. must be translated by the Greek (def.) 
art. in expressions like 'once a day,' ^c., where 'a' is equivalent to 
' each.' 

Obs. 2. e) The gen. stands after possessive pronouns in a kind of 
apposition to the personal pronoun implied. It may often be trans- 
lated as an exclamation. The gen. is also used alone, or after inter- 
jections, as an exclamation. 

143. a) ol qoonuoL tco v dv {)■ o co tt co r, sensible per- 

sons, oidug El ). 1] V CO i', none of the Greeks, 
7] j-isyiGTri TCOV voacovj the greatest of dis- 
eases. 

b) rolg 7 7j g ?) fi 8o a g, th ree times a day. nov yrjg 

in ichat part of the world 7 ttoooco Trig rjl 
y. lag, far advanced in years. 

c) sdcoy.d aoi J cov ygr^ udr CO r, I gave yon (some) 

of my money. ttIi^iv vdarog, to drink 
.some icater, lad^ltiv y.Qacov, to eat some 
meat (of a particular time : with the accus- 
ative the meaning would be to do it habitu- 

a) (jiecfaiog v ay, Iv cov, a crown of hyacinths, 
dtidoov TTollcov £ 7 00 7', a tree many years 
did. %v ydo diicofxarog ixey dlov, for he 
was of great consideration. 

e) ^laQTid^ovai rd ifid tov Kay.odaipiovog, they are 



64 



THE GENITIVE. 



Plundering my property, wretched man 
that I am ! '^r^g dvaidelag, what impiidtnce ^ 



144. Vocabulary 23. 

Sensible, prudent, 

Greek, 

Greece, 

To what place? whither? 

Where? 

Far, far on, 

A person's age, 

To drink, 

To eat, 

Flesh, meat, 

Crown, 

Tree, 

Year, 

Consideration, reputation, 

Violet, 

Lily, 

Golden, 

Place on. 

Worthless, despicable, 

Arrive, 

To be given, 

Plunder, 

"Wretched, unfortunate, 
Alas, 



Cfonnixog, og ov, 
EXlr^v, 7]vog, 6, 
'EXXdg, ddo^y 35. 
TToT ; 
7T0V ; 

Tjlr/ua, agj t]. 

yQtag"^ zo, 
GTtcfavog, ov, 6* 
devdQOv,^ ov, TO. 
erog, eog (ovg), to. 
d^tcofza, arog, to. 
lov (jlov) ov, TO. 

XQLi'OV, ov, TO. 

XQvaeog, )[QVGovg,^ 
ini-TLd^Tiiii (dat,) 
q)avXog, rj, ov, 
dcp-f-AvtoiA.ai.'^ 

doTEog (from ^86d^r^v,dLdG)i.iL} 
haQudXco (fut. mid.) 
y.a'Aoda/^cov, oov, ov. 
gsv: oifxoL 



^ KLVO), (irreg. fut.) Triofiai, TrerrcoKa, rriTTonai, CTriov, errdOrjv. 
^ caOio) (from €6w), (irreg. fut.) eSonai, eSnSoKa, (Sr,SeGixai. z(payoi 
(from root 0ay), riSeaOiju. 
™ G. aog, CO?, &c. 

■ SevSpoVf D. plur. SevSpsat (also plur. ^ivi^^pea, SsvSpioig from anothei 
Ionic form). 

• Kphov has in plur. a collateral form npivla., D. KpU'sci^ as if from 



Xouo"fo?, ovSf -^pvaerjj r], ^pvacov, ovu. 
^pV(T£ov, ovj ^pvaerjg^ rjg^ ^pV(7€GVj ov. 

^ iKvioiJtaif "i^ofiaif lyiiai, iK6jxriv, 



THE GENITI7E. 



55 



Phrases. 



Till late m the day, 
Willingly at least, 



ty,(hv si rut ^ 



So to saj^, to speak gener- cog Inog eIttuv ^ (showing 



145. I will place a crown of violets on the boy's head. 
The mother placed a crown of lihes on her daughter's 
head. Let us imitate sensible persons. Let us not imi- 
tate worthless persons J"^ I will be with you three times 
every year. If he were not [a per soil) of great consider- 
ation,^* the citizens world have put him to death. At 
what part of the earth am 1 arrived? I will give each 
of them a golden crov^n. He told me that we ought to 
give to each of ihem a golden crown (71). If he had 
not been advanced in years, he would not have died. 
They slept [itsed to sleep) till late in the day. Let us 
hear whatever the gods please'^ (90*). All men, so to 
say^ admire rich men. No Grecian will do this, at least 
willingly. I will not drink any of the wine, at least 
willingly. I will give some ^f the flesh to this eagle. 
Mr property was plundered, wretched man that I am ! 
Alas, what injustice ! Alas for my possessions ! Let us 
fly from the greatest of diseases, shamelessness. 



^ 25. The Genitive continued. 
146. a) Verbal adjectives with a transitive meanmg 

' Such short phrases with the infin. are inserted in t'ae sentence.* 



ally, 



that a general assertion is 
not absolutely true.) 



Exercise 25. 



V 




66 



THE GENITIVE. 



govern the genitive. That is, the object of the vertt 
stands in the gen, after the verbal adjective. 

146*. b) Words relating to plenty^ want^ value^ (fcc. 
govern the genitive. 

147. c) Verbs relating to the senses, except sight^ 
govern the genitive. 

Obs. dKcvsLv, hear, generally takes a gen. of the sound, and an acc. 
of the person producing it : but in neither case without exception. 

148. e, f) The genitive is often nsed where we may 
supply ' in respect to ' in English. 

In this way, the gen. restricts a general expression to a particu- 
lar meaning; to some particular circumstance, object, &c. 

The genitive so used may often be supposed governed by IvEKa, 
on account of. It is very frequently used in this way after words 
compounded with a privative. 

149. d) TTQocy.nytog tmv y.alwp, apt to jperfoi^m (or, in 

the habit of performing) honorable ac- 
tions, 

b) fiEGTov iaii 70 ^riv qiQovzidcoVy life is full of 

cares, ahog rif^'ijg, worthy of honour, dsta- 
-dai yQt]fid7cov, to ivant fnoney j also dnai^ai 
rivog {gen. oi person).^ to beseech a person, 

c) o^eiv fxvpcoVy to smell of perfumes. anTeoOai 

r8KQ0Vy to touch a corpse, axovetv Tzaidlov 

TilaiovTog^ to hear a child crying. 
Tovg dovXovg 'iyevoe rijg ilevO^eQiag, he allowed 

his slaves to taste of liberty. 
aysvGTog Tijg ilEvd^sQiag, one who has never 

tasted of liberty. 

d) sxead^ai Tivog, to cling to, or be next to. (Tw- 

TTiQiag execj&ai, to provide (carefully and 
anxiously) /or one^s safety. 

e) anaig aQQEvcov naidm', without male offspring, 

iyyvTara avicp el^iL y iv ovg, I am very near- 
ly related to him (literally, very near to 
him loith respect to birth), daavg dtTdQcor, 
thick with trees ; thickly planted ivith 
trees. 

f) evdai^opi^co 68 x ov t q on o v, I think you hap* 



THE GENITIVE. 



67 



py your disposition, oixtSiQco jfi rov 
7zd\>ovg, pity you on account of your 
affliction. 



150. Vocabulary 24. 

Apt to do or perform ; in 
the habit of doing or per- 
forming, 

Apt, or fit to govetn, 

To govern, 

To smell of, (i. e. emit a 

smell). 
Ointment, perfume, 
Touch, 
Corpse, 
Free, 

Freedom, liberty, 

Hear, 

Child, 

Cry, 

Give to taste, allow to 
taste, 

One who has r.ot tasted, 
Childless, 

Male, 
IS ear, 

Race, family, birth. 

Thick, crowded, 

Think or pronounce hap- 

py- 



TTQuxrrAog, * rj, or, 

ioyixog, 6v. 
uQXco {gen.) 

fiVQGP, Of, 70 r 

amofxai. 

TS'AQog, 01', 6 (adj. ^'dead"). 
iXevOeoog^ a, ov, 
ilsv^EQia, ag, ?], 
ay.ovoj. ^ 
TTcaoLOV,"' 01', to'. 

ayevo'Tog, og ov, 

anaig (one termin. G. anai* 

Jog). 

aoQr^v, * r^Vy ev, 
iyyvg {ge7l,) ^ 
yevog, eog, jo. 
daavg, tia, v. 

Evdaiixoril^co. 



• iKoSj appended to verbal roots, denotes fitness to do what the verfl 
expresses. Appended to the root of substantives, it has the same lati- 
tude of meaning as 105 (20, note n.) 

* 6^(0, u^fiaoj, oocoSa (with meaning of pres.) 

" UKOvoj^ (XKOvcrunaij dK)]Koa^ r]KOvanai, ijKOVaa. 

^ — lov the principal termination of diminutives : -a??, Trat Jtoji 
Those that form a dactyl are paroxytone ; the rest proparorytone. 

KXaioj {KXavaojjtai, KXavaovnai) but aor. iKXavaa. Alt. /cAaco (o). 
« In old Att. ap7r]v. 



63 



THE GENITIVE'. 



Disposition, 
Pity, 

Sulfering, affliction. 



ndO^og, Eog {org) ro [pliif 



Worthy, 

Honour, 

Want, beseech, 

Full of, 

Life, 

Cares, 

Not at all, 



"the passions'*). 
ahoQy .a, ov. 



nil)], rig, 
UEGTog, ri, oV. 

q^QO^vztdsg, al (pi. ci q^Qovtig) 
ovdev, fir^dtv^ often followed 



Who in the world? 



by 71 : ovdtv ri, &c. 
lig 7T0T8 ;* 



What is the rserhal adj. in riog from zv^aiixovL^w 7 evSaiiioviareog, 
What is the meanino^ of e'xco-Oat with gen. ? 149. d. 



151. I asked Avhether (72. c) the children of the judge 
were in the habit of performing just actions. If you are 
in the habit of performing just actions, you will be hap- 
py. I will make the boy fit to govern men. I am not 
at all in want of money. I would not touch a corpse, at 
least willingly. If the physician had been present, my 
child would not have died. Let us ask the next (sub- 
jects) to these. I think you happy on account of youi 
virtue. They pitied the mother on account of her afflic- 
tion. The boy is nearly related to Socrates (149. e). 
He told me that the boy was very nearly related to So- 
crates. We ought to think the temperate happy. I would 
not willingly touch a corpse.^ I asked the boy whethei 
he thought life full of cares. What in the world am I 
to do with him (137. 6)? 

y rooTTo? from Tpe-n-oj, to turn; as we say, a man's turn of mind. 
N. B. Nomis in eg. from verbal roots, generally change c of the root 
into 0. 

» -ore (enclitic), at any time ; used with interrogatives, it expresses 
surprise. 

• tKojv ilvai is confined to negative sentences. 



Exercise 26. 



THE GEXITIVE. 



69 



Exercise 27. 

152. "Who in the rcorld admires these things I Who 
m the world is this ? If these things are so, let us care- 
fully provide for our safety. Let us speak what^ comes 
next (149. a) to this. Yv'hat in the world are you admir- 
ing? I asked the judge, what in the vrorld the citizens 
were admiring. The boy is nearly related to Sophronis- 
cus. Xenoclides will be general with three others. Let 
us rule over our passions. W^e must set about^' the task 
of ruling over our passions. He told me that he Vv^as 
one-who-had-never-tasted-of liberty. Let us chng to our 
liberty. He told m.e that the vv hole^^ country Avas thickly 
planted with trees. The judge is most worthy of honour. 
What in the world shall we do vrith the boy ? 



^ 26. The Genitive continued. 

153. a) Most verbs that express such notions diSfree* 

ing from, keeping off from ^ ceasing from, 
deviating or departing from, ccc. govern 
the gen. 

b) Most verbs that express remembering or for- 
getting ; caring for or despising ; spar- 
ing : ai??ii?i^ at or desiring : rnlinfy; over 
excelling : accusing of or condemning, 
&c. govern the genitive ; hvA not Avithout 
many exceptions. 

154. Vocabulary 25. 

(Verbs governing the genitive: the transitive ones with acciis 
also, of course.) 

To free from, aTzalldircx) iy) also, to 

come out of an affair/' 
come oif " get off I-a, 
ano. Mid. take oneself 
off.'^ Aor. 2. pass, with 
mid. meaning. 

I 



70 



THE GENITIVE. 



Exclude from, 
Make to cease, 
Leave off, desist from^ 
Miss, err, '] 



Differ, 
Way, 

Chase, hunting, 
Sea, 
Disease?, 
Physician, 
With impunity 

Toil, labour, 
Market-place, 

'Heavy-armed soldier, Hop- 
lite, 



navcx) [mid. cease"). 
A//700. 

a^uaQidvco ^ (also to shi, eig 
or TiEQL with accus. 
against.) 

diacptQco (60, note b). 

odog, ov, rj. 

-O^riQa, ag, y, 

voGog, ov, fj, 
larQog, ov, b. 

yaiQcov [part, literally re* 

joicing"). 
novog, ov, 6 (also trouble"). 
dyoQci, ag, rj. 

OTzXirr^g, 01;, 6. 



Exercise 28. 

155. Death will free us from all our toils. They 
will exclude the Persians from the sea. He told me, 
that the Athenians were excluding the Persians from 
the sea. They are here to exclude (72. b) the Grecian*^ 
Hoplites from the market-place. Speaking^^ fast is a 
different thing [differs) from speaking well. A good 
king does not at allt differ from a good father. The 
physician was there, that he might free the boy. from 
his disease. Pie told me, that the physician had 
missed his way. If the judge had been there, you would 
not have escaped, with impunity. If the king is there, 
they will not escape with impunity. They who have 
sinned^ against the srate, will not escape with impunity. 



In Attic Greek, el'pyw is e:rcludo, dpyoj 272cludo. (B.) 

® Cifiapravoi^ aixapTQa ojxai, rjjxaprriKa. i]ixa.pTov, 

^ Of the Greeks. 

+ oi^iv Ti, not dpxni' ' for ' at all' docs not here refer to an action 



THE GENITIVE. 



71 



The boy is desisting from tiie chase. If I had knowD 
this, I would not have tried at aW^ to persuade him. 



V 



§ 27. The Genitive continued 
156. Vocabulary 26. 

Verbs governing the genitive. 

Rememberj 
Forget 



Care for^ have any regard 

for, 
Hold cheap, 
Despise, 
Spare, 
Desire, 
Desire, 
Aim at. 
Master, 
Overcome, 

Get the better of, surpass, 
Accuse, charge, 

Condemn, 
Impiety, 



imlav&dvoiiaiJ 



q}8ldofiai. 

inid viJiia, ac, ?]. 

OT0'/d(^0lAaL 

neQiylyvoixaL 

ITEQieifXl. 

y,DCTriyoQ8co [pass, to be 
laid to the charge of"). 

aat'^eia, ag, rj [impious^ 
dae^^g. 87, note z). 



• The third (paulo post) fut. is the fut. used for verbs that have a 
pcrf. of the pass, form with the meaning of a, present : as ixt^yTQi^ai^ ncjx- 
vr\(jOfxaL. 

\avQavu)^ X^croj, XeXrjda. eXaOoi/. 31id. XavOdvojxaL, Xf]aj[j.ai, ^-tXrjaijiai. 

g yiyvdjaKWy yvd)aonai, I'yj^oj/ca, £yvojcr[uiL. Aor. eyvcov. (^syvcovj y-vcaOi^ 
yvoiiqvy yj/co, yvwvai^ yvoti). 

Obs Kar-qyop&w may have ace. of the charge or crime, gen. of the per- 
•on : or, if no crime is mentioned, gen. of person. KarayiyvcoaKw his ac- 
cus. of the charge., or punishment; gen. of person. In the pass. th» 
acc. will of course become the nom., and the gen. of the person remaiix. 



THE GENITIVE. 



Piety, 




Banishment, 
Former, 
Folly, 
Laughter, 

I at least, I for my part, 
Far (= much, greatly). 
Forefather, ancestor, 



Exercise 29. 



What is the usual opt. contracted verbs? oLrjv, ihqv. 

157. I remember my former^^ troubles. They 
asked him whether he despised the Persians. Do not 
despise your neighbour. Let us spare our money. 
They accuse the judge himself of injustice. They con- 
demned them all to death (156, note g). Do not aim at 
producing'^ laughter. The men of the present day' 
have forgotten the virtue of their ancestors. Much in- 
justice is laid to the charge of Xenoclides. The father 
of Xenoclides was found guilty^' of impiety. Most 
persons desire money. Let us master our desires. Do 
not desire the property '° of your neighbour. Let us fly 
from the company of the impious. Let us not only 
speak well of the pious, but let us also confer benefits^^ 
upon them. 



158. They have condemned Sophroniscus to banish 
ment (156, note g). He accuses the others of folly. If 
you had done this,^^ I for my part should have accused 
you of folly. If you do this, I for my part shall accuse 
you of folly. If any one should do this, the prudent 
would accuse him of folly. He said that, if any man 
did this, the prudent would accuse him of folly. I think 
you happy on account of your piety (149. /). This boy 



Exercise 30. 



THE GENITIVE. 



73 



far surpasses his brother in virtue {dat.) Alas what 
folly !-° These things happened in the time of our 
forefathers. He said, that to be prosperous v/as not in 
our (own) power.^s 



28. The Genitive continued. 

159. a, h) After verbs of jyvice and value, the piHce 
or value is put in the genitive. 

180. After verbs that express or imply exchange^ the 
thing for ivhich we exchange another is put in the 
genitive. 

161. d. e) A noun of tiine is put in the gen. in an- 
swer to the questions when ? and since, or ivithin what 
time ? 

If the point of time is defined by a numeral adjective, the time 
uhm is put in the dative: it stands however in the gen. with the 
Jbrmer, the same, each, &c. 

162. f. g) The ge7i. expresses the part by which a 
person leads, takes, ov gets hold o/any thing. 

162"^. a) b qaiuTig ayoQu^eiv r/, to buy something for 
a drachma. 

6) ttI 8 la 7 ov^ Tovro zifxojfzui, lvalue this at a 
very high price (very highly). 

c) TQEig fxrag 'AaTt\}t]'Ae 7 ov Innov, he laid down 

three min(B for the horse. 
yoriliara tovtojv TTQazzazai, he exacts the 
money {ox paym^ent) for this. 

d) vvATog, by night ; r^iit'Qag, by day ; ^Qorov 

6vyvov,for a considerable time. 

e) TzoX lojv 7]fA£Qcov OV lAeiAtlaTTj'ACiy I havc noi 

practised for many days. 
/) Xa^slt' (generally lasted ai) Tzodog, to take 



* TToAtj, TrXeioiv OX TrXtojj/j r:\eiaros. 

4 



74 



THE GENITIVE 



(a person) by the foot, aysiv x^iQog, if} 
lead by the hand. 
TOV IvKov zoov (Sroov hqcjczm I get hold of 
the wolf by the ears. 

h) rovzo ovK 86TIV av d Qo g a o cp ov, this is not 

the part of a wise man. 

i) ov TzavTog eirai, not to be a thing' that every 

body can do. aavTov ehai, to be one's 



ownmastei. 
163. Vocabulary 27. 
Purchase, buy. 

Drachma, 
To value, 
Mina, 
Lay down, 

To exact, to exact pay- 
ment, 

Considerable,long(oftime.) 

To practice, 
To take hold of. 
To get hold of. 
Equestrian exercises. 



dyoQd(^G) i {properly '^amin 
the market-place,'' dyoQa) 
dqayjxri, rig, i), 
TiixdofAai. 
fxvd, dgj yj. 

TTQaTTEad^ai. 

Gvyvogj 1], 6v [prop, "con- 
tinuous"). 

la^iodai (92, note^). 
TiQaxico {prop. to master'^). 
iTTTiixd. 



Exercise 31. 

164. The king will not fight (these) ten days. INo 
one has arrived for a long time. I should like to pur- 
chase'^* this for three min^. It is the part of a good man 



* (a) The being or having what the root denotes, is expressed by 
verbs aw, Iw, fuw, wo-crw, (wrrco), a^co, t^co. (h) The making a thing 

into J or furnishing it with what the root denotes, is expressed by 
verbs in 6a), t^co, vpo), (i)), atvoj, 

Obs. These meanings are not invariably ODStrved ; e. g. those m 

i^oi are set down as belonging to both classes. The least subject to 
^hange are those in evo), aco. (R.) 



COMPARISON. 



7^ 



to confer benefits upon his friends. He told me that he 
vaUied this very highly. He said that if he had a talent, 
he would lay it down for this horse (102). It is not 
every man that can master^^ his desires. He took hold 
of the boy by his foot. The mother leads her daughter 
by the hands. I have not practised equestrian exercises 
for a long time. Two dogs had got hold of the same 
wolf by the ears. Three dogs had got hold of the wolfi 
by the same ear. The boys are practising equestrian 
exercises. They exact payment for the horse. If you 
care for yourself, provide for your safety. If they cared 
for the boy, they would not do this. I had got hold of 
the wolf itself by the ears. It is not every man who can 
get hold of a wolf by the ears.^ It is not every man 
that is-without-fear-of death. A slave is not his own 
master. I will go away by night. The Scythians went 
away by night. 

V 



§ 29. Comparison. 

165. a) The thing with Avhich another is compared, 
is put in the genitive. 

The fuller construction is with than ; which however is used 
only v/here the genitive cannot be en^ployed. 

b) The gen. is sometimes used, where it is not the immediate ob 
ject ot comparison : e. g. in the phrase, k^WTm' iuov acsig^ the things 
compared are not and 'you?' singing,-' but ^ my singing' and 
' y&urs.^ 

166. c) Greater, (kc. than ever, than at any other 
time, is expressed by using aiTog, before the gen. ol 
the reciprocal pronoun. 

167. d. e) Too great, &c. is expressed by the com- 
•parative with // v^ara^ before a substantive ; ?} coare be« 
fore a verb in the infinitive. 



^ To get hold of, &c. 
1 Or fi Trpos, 



is not the part of, Slc. 



78 COIMPARISON. 

168. a) fxdt(xiv ijjLov, taller (greater) than L 

h) xdllTov ifxov adeig, you sing better (more 
beautifully) than /(do). 

c) dvvaiojTEQoi av 7 ol avr wv"^ tylyvovro^ they 

hecame more powerful than ever (lite- 
rally, more jpoi»erful themselves than 
themselves^ i. e. than themselves were at 
any other time). 

d) iJ,8 l^ca rj X ar a 8 dxQv a nenovdsvai^ to have 

suffered afflictions too great for tears. 
fE'AQog fi8t^03v 7] 'A at ci V x)- Q oj 77 0 V, a 

corpse of superhuman size. 
on7.a 7t7J(o i] kcci a t ovg ve^Qovg, more 

arms than could have been expected 

from the number of the dead [quam pro 

numero). 

e) € CO 7 8 Q 0 I 8161V ^ OJ 6 T 8 Sldtvai OICOV 7TaZ8QCOV 

i^TtQTjvTar, tJtey are too young to knov/ 
what fathers they have lost. 

168*. Vocabulary 28. 

Sing, «^co.° 

Sing better, yAllTov a88iv. 

Powerful, dvrarog,^'}], oV. 

Tear, dcvAQvov, ov, ro. 

Sntfer, Tidcjyco.i' 

Arms, oTrla."^ 

Young, fsog, d, ov. 

Deprive, o78Qtco : ^ d7ioo78Q80i}^ 

Dance, 'j^oqsvco. 

Master, teacher, diddaxaXog, or, 6. 



™ So in superl. ^jsivdrarog aavTOv rjo-Oa^ 

° Literally, greater than in proportion to (or acco.^ling to) man. 

° a6(x<i {liei^oi) , fut. aTOjxai, but aor. rjaa. 

? TTfXcrycL), TrFAaofJ-di, ncnovOa. inaOoi/. 

q Properly, instruments or tools of any kind. 

^ This verb is most common in the pass, form, with fut. mid., in the 

sense, am deprived of : — arepovixnij (7Tepr,(Tnf.iai, eariprjixai. larEpfiOi^v, &C. 

cyroo-repew (124, c) is more common than arspecj. [(TTspiaKci is the 
common form of the pres. act. : crepoixai of the pres. pass.] 



COMPARISON. 



77 



Pupilj iiadrjiig, o?, o. 

Words that go with comparatives to niarli the degree of excess or 
delect. 

Still, hi. 
Much, TTo/lo),' 
Little, a little, o/.iyop. 
Tiie — the ogoj — togovtco {qiiantQ — 

tanto). 



Exercise 32. 

169. The boy is taller than his father. The boy is 
wiser than his master. The daughter sings better than 
her mother. You have become more powerful than 
ever (168. c). The Athenians have become more pow- 
erful than ever. The good judge is sufiFering afflictions 
too great for tears (lf)7. d). More arms were taken than 
could have been expected from the number of the dead 
(167. d). He told me, that the corpse was of a super- 
hum.an size. If I had practised. I should have sungt 
better than my mother. If you do this, 3'ou will be- 
come more powerful than ever. If they icere to do^^ 
this, they would become more powerful than ever. If 
they had done this, they would have become more pow- 
erful than ever. He said that, if they did this, they 
would become more pov/erful than ever (102). He said 
that, if they had done this, they would have become 
more poAverful than ever. He is too wise (167. e) to be 
deceived by his slave. The masters are too v/ise to be 
deceived by their pupils. The pupils practise by night, 
that they may become wiser than their masters. He 
said that he should have died biitfor^^ the dog. The 
boys dance better than their masters. Practise virtue, 
that you may become really wise. They are too young 
to know that virtue ought^^ to be desired. The boy is 
still taller tlmn his father. The girl is a little taller than 



* Sometimes the acc. is used ; piya, toXv, (Sec. 

^ Imperf. because the meaning is, ' T should novo he a better singer. 



COMPARISON. 



her mother. The daughter sings much better than hei 
mother The more they have, the more they desire 



<§> 30. Comparison continued. 

170. a) Two comparatives are to be translated by 
more — tlian^ or rather — than^ with the positive. 

For adverbs it is often convenient, as in the example, to use a 
substantive. 

171. b) c6v and on (like the Latin q^iam) are used to 
strengthen superlatives. (So also oncog, ^, (fee.) 

172. d. e) ti zig y.al uXlog {si quis alius)^ and tig avrjQ 
{iinus omnium maxime), have the force of superlatives. 

(clg ys hi/rip lev is also used.) 

173. /) TTEQiTTog {exceeding^ over and ahove)^ and 
adjectives in -nldoiog {-fold), govern the genitive from 
their comparative meaning. 

174. a)T:ayvTeQa tj aocpojzeQa {Herod,), ivith 

more haste than ivisdom, 

b) cog Td)[L(j7a, as quickly as possible, aiyij chg 

avvaxov TTQoarjtoav, they came up as 
silently as possible, on f^tyLGiog, as great 
as possible. 

c) oaovg ijdvvato 77 Islorovg'^ ud^QOLdag, 

having collected as many men as he 
possibly could. 

d) xaimQ, H 7 1 g 'Aoi alio g, 8][eig nQog 7 a hrj ixi- 

Icavav Tr]v tqi^^cjc, though if any body has 
black hair for his years, it is you {i. e. 
you have remarkably black hair for your 
years). 

e) Tovg dycovi^OfiEvovg TiluGza elg dvrjQ bvva^evdg 

^(jjtlttv, being able to be of *moxQ service 



Or, on ■i:\duTOVs dOpoiaas, 



COMPARISON. 



79 



to the contending parties, than any otliei 
individual. 

f) neQiTxa tojp aoxovi'Tmv more than enough (of 
money, &c.) nollanldaioi i]uS)v avTcov, 
many times as numerous as ourselves, 

175. Vocabulary 29. 



Silently, 

To come on, come up, 

As many as, 

Most, 

Feasible, 

Although, 
For your years, 
Hair, 
Collect, 

To be enough or sufRcient, 
Many times as many or 

much, 
Twice as many, 
Brave, 
Slow, 
Slowly, 
Gift, 

To give a share of, give 
some. 



TTQog-eiiJii. 

060 1. 

drvGTog, og 6v 
perform). 

'/.(UTTeO. 

7700 g 7 a ezT]. 

a&oouco. 
any.tco 



(fr. arvTSiy, to 



(fut. 860)1 



TToXlanldaiOL 

dvdQHog, a J or. 
^QCidvgj sTa, v. 
^Qudtcog. 
daQOv, ov, TO, 
^era'didojixt {gen. ( 
dat. of person). 



thing j 



Exercise 83.^ 

176. One could not find (86"^) a blacker dog than this. 
They are more wise than brave. If any man practises 
temperance, it is he. He received more gifts than any 



In doing the exercises of the form : " if amj one — it is" (174 d), 
replace mentally ' it is' by the verb ; " if any man practises temperance, 
it is he"=?/ any man practises temperance, he practises temperance, 
i. e. he, if any other man (does), practises temperance. 

In those of the form more than any other single person" replace thi? 

form by rrAercrra eis dvf]pj OT cis yt 0.7 fjp coV. 



80 



THE DATIVE. 



Other man. If you had done this, you would havedonH 
more bravely^ than wisely. I shall collect as many 
men as possible (174. c). The Persians came on as 
slowly as possible. He has injured the state more than 
any other single person. He has collected as many 
ships as possible. When you have coUected^^ as many 
men as possible,, march against Cyrus. The just judge 
has been of more service to the state than any other 
single person. The army of the Persians comes on as 
silently as possible (174. b). If you have more than 
enough, give some to your friends. If they were bold, 
they would conquer twice as many as themselves. More 
hares were taken than could have been expected from 
the (small) number of the dogs.^^ One could not find a 
more beautiful woman than the mother of this Scythian. 
If any man has been of great service to the state, it is he. 

V/ 



•§31. The Dative, 

177. The notion of the dative is opposed to that of 
the genitive, as its fundamental notion is that of ap- 
proach to, 

178. The dat, expresses the person to or for whom a 
thing is done: it also follov/s words that express union 
or coming together^ and those that express likeness or 
(a) ideyitity. 

179. b) The instrument (c) the manner^ and [d) th<5 
cause, are put in the dative, 

180. e) The definite time at which a thing is aone, 
is put in the dative. 

181. /) The dative sometimes expresses the agent ; 
especially after the perfect pass, and verbals in t/o^, 
Tog. 

182. a) ra avra nd(Ji(o aoi, I suffer the same as you. 
^ Comparative sing, by rule 56 ; not plur. as in example. 



THE DATIVE 



81 



rog, Theseus who lived about the saiw 

time as Hercules. 
6) TTciTdddeip od^dcp, to beat loith a stick, 
c) dgofiop TzaoJ^/.&tv. he came running (literally, 

at a ruKaing pace), ueydlri OTTOvdrj, in 

great haste. 

d) g)0|5co, through fear. -AUf^reip roaco, to be suf- 

fering from (or ill of) a disease, dh/tiy 
Tin, to be pained at a thing. 

e) rQirr} r^ix^QCi, on the third day. 

f) ravra leleyaat 7)[aiv, these things have been said 
by us. 

183. Vocabulary 30. 

To live about the same 

time, to be contemporary 

with. 
Fear, 

Running, a running pace, 
To be suffering, or ill of a 

disease, 
On the next day. 
Heavy, severe, 
Thales, 
Solon, 
Yfhy? 
Haste, 
Hercules, 
Staff, stick, 

Verbs that govern the dative. 

Associate with, keep com- ^ / 

pany with. 
Follow, errofiat.^ 



* GaXrjf, G. OaAfcoj D. Qa^rj, A. 0aX>>. (rjroc, rjri, rjra, later.) 

J Voc. *HpdK\cig. The voc. co "Hpa/cXcj occurs only in this exclania* 

■ ezofxaif 6ipn[.iai. Imperf. £Lr:6i.ir]v^ aor. caTSu.rjv. 



'AUia rov avToy yoovov yEVE^- 

^o^og, oy, 6. 
dQai-wg, ov, 0. 

>cdiAro3 {yiciiioviiaiy xty.^Tjxat 

SKUf^or. 
zri vGZEQaia. 
^uQvg, eiUj V. 
QalJjg,^ 

2^6lcop, copog, 6. 
rl ; or dia tl ; 
Gnovdrj, r^g, ij. 
'HoayJJjg, ^ sog {ovg) 6 
QU^dog, ov, rj. 



82 



THE DATIVE 



Envy, grudge, 

To meer, fall in with, 

Blame, 

Find fault with, rebuke, 
Scold, rail at, speak calum- 

iiiously of, 
Accuse of, charge with, 

blame, 
Plot against, 
Fight with. 

Contend or dispute with. 
Contention, strife, 

Am angry with, 

Am in a passion or rage, 

Like, 

Obs. Verbs of 'reproaching^ ( 
dat of person), especially whei 



'cpd^orsoo^ (qj&ovoi;, envy), 
IvTvy^dvcx). ^ 

iTTlTlfAcicK), 

XoidoQeopiai {loidoQeco takes 
the acciis.) 

iTTi^ovXevco. 

£Q!g, idog, Tj [acc. tQida et 

ofAoiog, a, or, 

k,c. take acc. of the thing (as well as 
I it is a neut. pronoun. (eyKaXeLi', &c. 



Exercise 34. 

184. Do not associate with the bad (72. a). If you 
associate (67. 2) with the bad,^^ you will become bad 
yourself. The boys are following the dog. Most men 
follow their neighbours. I envy you your wisdom 
[note a). Do not envy your neighbour. Do not envy 
me. If you had struck^^ the judge with a stick, you 
would not have got off ivith impunity. They set out 
the next day. What do you charge me with (183. 
Obs.)? I asked whether (72. c) they were suffering the 
same as the geometer. If you had plotted against the 
general, you would not have come off with impunity. 
He will not fight with the king (these) ten days (161). 
I knew that he had suffered the same as I (had). I 



» (pOuvecx) takes gen of the object that excites the envy, or of the thing 
^dged. (See 149. /). 

TvyxoLuoif rev^ofxai^ T€rv)(^r]<a, eTV)(^ov. With a gen. to ohtain^ re* 
ceive (Traod from, "vrith gen.) ; also, to hit (a mark — (jkottos). 



THE DATIVE. 



83 



plotted against the king from envy. Do not contend 
with 3/-0Lir parents. I suffer similar treatment^ to you. 
I should blame the citizens, if they had done this. He 
scolds, not only^^ the others, hut also the judge himself. 
I should have scolded the boy, if he had done this. 
Why are you in a passion with your slave ? I have 
not met you (these) two days. I am angry with those 
who transact the affairs of the state. O Hercules ! 
what in the world^^ am I to do (99. c)? Through fear 
he did not hit the mark. 

Exercise 35. 

185. Do you wish, then (99. a), that I should strike 
him with this stick? He told me that his father Avas 
suffering from a severe disease. Thales icas contemjyo- ^ 
vary iviih Solon. I admire the wisdom of Thales. 
Hercules lived about the same time as Theseus. If any 
one was brave, it was Hercules.^ ^ O father, do not scold 
your son. If you had kept company Avith the bad, you 
would have become bad your yourself I asked the toy 
whether we ought to envy^^ our neighbours. The dam- 
sel has very beautiful eyes.^^ Let us aim at speaking^^ 
well of all the good. Let us abstain from acting inso- 
lently. All, and you among the Jirst^^^ admire these 
things. Let us be contented with our present condition. 
He said that, if Xenoclides had been wise, he would 
not have plotted against the general. He told me that 
he wished to give his slaves a taste of liberty (149. c). 
Letus keep company with sensible persons. Let us obey 
the laws of the state. I should like tohear^^the boy sing 
{part.) Do not associate with those who^ pursue what 
is disgraceful. ^3 Why do you charge me with injus- 
tice?^^ Through fear he missed the mark. I admire 
both^ your horses and those^ of your friend. The rest 



» Like tkinffs, 

I 



^ r£ following the article. 



84 



MIDDLE VOICE. 



of the country^^ has been laid waste by the Greeks. Hd 
told me that we ought to persuade the judge (120. c). 

V 



§ 32. Middle Voice. 

The middle voice denotes : 

1) That the agent does the action upon him- 

self ; or 

2) That the agent does the action for his own 

advantage ; or 

3) That the agent gets the action done for his 

own advantage. 

The strict reflexive meaning ie found but in very fewverbs ; prin- 
cipally those that describe some simple action done to our own per- 
sons; as as to clotne, crown, &c. The reflexive sense is often equiv- 
alent to a new simple meaning; which may be either transitive or 
intransitive, 

187. The tenses that have the middle meaning, when 
the verb has it at all, are 

1) Pres, and imp erf, ) ^r.i * ^ 

2) Perf. and Pluverf. \ passive form. 

3) Futures and aorists mid. 
And in some verbs 

4) The aor. 1. pass, L e, of the passive form. 

188. Vocabulary 31. 

To wash, XovHv, M. wash myself, bathe, • 

Strangle, aTidyx^iv, anay^ai, M. to strangle (or hang) 

myself, ana'^im^oLu 

a) With new intransitive meaning. 

To send, axilluv, M. (to send one's self) to 

journey, ortXXtaOaiJ 

« It may have an accus. of a part of one's own person. 
' oTiXXcadaty to clothe oneself, Vind to send for, has aor, arsCXaaOai': 
wriXXtodaip to travel, aTaXfjvat. 



3IIDDLE VOICE. _ 85 

To make to cease, navHv. 31. (to make m^^self cease,) 

to stop, cease, leave off, 

h) With new transitive meaning. 

To put a man over (a river), M. to cross (a river, acc,) 

nsQaiovv {riva). Tisoaiovad-ai. 
To pluck, tIIUlv. M. to mourn for {acc.) i. e, 

by tearing one's hair, til 

(2.) 

To make a man one's ally ] 
(to form an alliance with ! 

a persor), i. e. for one's \ ovuuayov noiuadcd riva, 

own advantage, J 
To place guards (over one's ) 

own property; for one's > '/.araorr^aaodai ? q:v}.axag, 

own protection.) ) 
To lift or take a thing up, M. to take up for one's ad 

aioeip 71. vantage, i. e. to keep for 

one's self, caosad'aL 
To find, ei'Qiay.eiv. M. find for myself, procure, 

get, EVQl6'AE6\^aL 

To provide, TzaQaGxevd^eiy, M. to provide (for one's own 

use), TTagaay.evd^ea^cii. 

(3.) 



I cause a table to be set be- ( ,^ / ^ 



fore me, \ ^ 

To let out for hire, fna^oco, M. cause to be let to myself, 

i. e. to hire, inad^ola^ai. 
To teach, diduc/ieir M. to get o?^ have taught, 

didda-Aead^ai. 

To weep for, y.araylaUiv. M. to. weep for (one's own 

misfortunes, acc.) ^ara- 
ylaUa^ai. 



86 



MIDDLE VOICE. 



Having shown his own 
wickedness, 

To enact laws (of an abso- 
lute prince who does not 
make them for liimself). 

To enact laws (of the legis- 
lator of a/ree state^ who 
makes them for himself 
as well as for his fellow- 
citizens),^ 



BTTidedeiyiAsvog rrjv movrjQiaf 



d^nvai ro/xovg. 



Obs. In general any remote reference of the action to self is ex- 
pressed by the middle. 



Wicked, 

To weigh anchor. 

To commence or engage in 

a war against, 
Sail-away, 



novriQog, a, 6v. 

aiQHv [ayyivQav, understood). 
{acc.) 



Exercise 36. 

189. Solon enacted laws for the Athenians. Wash 
yourselves, O boys. The son of Xenoclides hung him- 
self All of them washed their hands and their feet. Hire 
your neighbour's eyes. I will let you my house. I will 
take into my pay (hire) as many Hoplites as possible,^'^ 
The mother wept for her sufferings. I provided ^ myself 
long ago with this stick. O daughters, mourn for your 
mother. The citizens, fearing, placed guards. O ye 
rich, cease to act insolently [partic. 238). The soldiers 
crossed over the river. Let us form an alliance with 
the Athenians. If we had been wise, we should have 
formed an alliance with the Athenians. What kind-of 



^ This difference is not, however, strictly observed. (B.) 

• jtAsco, TrXevaoijaL and ■rr'Xevaovixai, — CTrXsvaa. JPcLSS* TriTiXsvafiaif iirXevaQriv 

k Ferfect, as I still keep it. 



MIDDLE VOICE. 



81 



laws has the kmg of the Persians enacted ? The boy 
has shown his wicked disposition. If yon do this, yon 
will get something good. The Athenians engaged in a 
war with the Persians. The Athenians having weigh- 
ed anchor, sailed away. He told me that we onght to 
obey the lav/s of the state (120. c). If the Athenians had 
been wise, they would have enacted laws. The Athe- 
nians crossed the river and attacked the Persians. 



33. Middle Voice contimiea, 

190. Vocabulary 32. 
1) To take,i alquv. 



To take, receive, la^nv. 



M. choose (followed by 

71 with gen.)^ aiQuaO^au 
M. take hold of, Id^ead-ai- 



2) Verbs whose Mid. Voice seems to have a reciprocal meaning. 



To consult; §ovIevhv. 



To reconcile (others), bia- 



M. to consult together, de- 
liberate: but also (with 
regular Quid, significa- 
tion) to counsel myself, 
adopt a resolution. (In 
the sense of deliberate it 
is foUovv^ed by tteqI with 

M. to be reconciled to each 
other {TTQog with acc.)^ 
dialvecj&ai. 



3) Middle forms of which there is no active and which must there- 
fore be considered simply as deponents. 

I receive, dr^ouaL 
I perceive, am informed of," aiaOdro^ai. 



^ alpcw. &C. fiAoz^, ei)^6jj.r]i> ^ i-peCr]./. 

■ alaQdvoaai, aia9riao[xai, T}(y9r]uai. ilf(jB6u.r}V 



88 



MIDDLE VOICE. 



4) Aorists passive with mid. meaning. 

Laid myself down ; laid 
down, 

Took myself off, anrilldyriv. 

So, i7TeQaico{)^7]v eqjO^}^\}}jVj fKO//^//i9-7;r, ^(jx?^!?/;^, 
(from TZBQaiovad^ai, qjo^itiaO ai, Koi,fxdG\}ai, aa'AHoOai) 

5) Some first futures oiwdd. form have Q.pass. meaning. 
co(peh]ooiiai^ bl^ioXoyijaoixai, cfvld^ofxai, dQt^ponai, 

from cocpslboj, .b^oloytM, cpvldiroo, 7Qtqj(o 
(aid, help,) (confess,) 

6) To be on one's guard, 
to guard against, (with 
acc, of thing ox person)^ 

7) By (agent after pass. 



(guard,) (nourish.) 
(fvldrrecjdai (mid,) 



verb), 



vTTo (with ge7i.) : also naQa 
et TTQog, 



Exercise 37. 



191. They will choose to obey rather than p to fight. 
I would choose liberty before wealth. Xenoclides was 
chosen general with three others. The multitude often 
choose ill. He took hold of his hair (phir.) Let us 
consult about the state. To deliberate quickly is a 
different thing (differs) from deliberating^* wisely. Let 
us consult together what we ought to do.^** They con- 
sulted together what they should do with (137. b) the 
unjust judge. I exercised-myself-in (190. 4) that art. 
Go to sleep. Having said this, he took himself off. 
The boy, having shown (188. 3) much virtue and tem- 
perance, died. O boys, receive this. I have rec eived 
this. The city will receive many times as mucli (174. 
/) as this (plur,) O slaves, receive some*^ of the wine. 
The physician being informed of what had happened, 
came in great haste. I crossed over the river in great 
haste. If you do this, you will be greatly benefitedc 



ON THE PERFECT 2. 



89 



I will guard against this danger. Having a v"-^^^ in 
bo^h my ears, I lay down. This will be confessed by 
all This will be confessed, iciUingli/ at least,;^ by 
none. The army shall be maintained from the kino-g 
country. I am glad that® the children are well brought 
up. The city shall be well guarded by the citizens. I 
feared the very men {those themselves) who^ guarded 
the city. 

/ 



^ 34. On the Perfect 2. 

192. The Perf. 2. (improperly called the Perf. 7nid.) 
prefers the intransitive signification, but 7iever has 
the pure reflexive meaning of the ?ni chile. 

1) If the verb has both the trans, and infrajis. mearjing, the perf. 
1. has the former; the perf. 2. the latter. 2) If the intrans. mean 
ing has gone over to the mzcZ., or to the pass, (as often happens), 
the perf. 2. belongs in meaning to that voice. 3) If the verb is in 
trans , the perf . 2. has the same relation to it that any other perf. 
has to its verb. 

193. YoCABULART 33. 

Perf. 1. ' Perf 2. 

Open, ci^'oiyco.'^ chsqr/^a, stand open, dvc'cpya. 
xlroUwSe, iyeiQco, iy/j'/eQ-AU, am awake, iyo/jyooa. 
Persuade, 77si{>co, ninw/.a, am confident; trust, havV6 

confidence, ntnoi&a. 
Break, ayrvui/ am broken, euyu. 

Destroy, qIIviu,^ olcouy.a, am undone, (perii), olcola. 
Fix. 7irji'i\ui,'- am fixed, am congealed 

ifcc. Tihnr^ya. 

Obs. d-5>Xv^a, Kar-lyvv^n, more comm.on than the simple verbs. 

a This verb prefixes the temporal to the syllabic augment — .; 
ii-co'la, inf. dt'orf i'.. avboyi. belongs to later Greek writers : d^sijy/to^ 
^9 used by the older authors. 

' ayvvfit, a|w, aor. k'a-;a, eiyyjv (a). 

*■ ^yvy^^iy -7]^w, &C. — -i-riyo., bxayrv (c). 



dO ON THE PERFECT 2. 

Pot, pitcher, X^'^Q^f V' 

One more, en elg. 

Gate, TivXr], r^g, rj. 

Spear, doQv, " doQarogj ro. 

Breast, cz^qvov, ov, ro. 

To watch over, iyQr^yoQtvai ttsql (with gen.] 

To raise a war, iyeiQeiv ttoXeixov (in pass 

arise). 

Safety, aaq^dlna, ag, rj. 

Roman, 'Pcofiaiog, ov, 6, 

Jupiter, Zevg, Jwg, 6 (voc. Zev), 

Early in the morning, ttqcoi. 



Exercise 38. 

194. The pitcher is broken. If we conquer the 
Romans in one more battle,^ ^ we are undone. The 
spear was fixed in his breast. All the water-" is congeal- 
ed. I broke the boy's head. The boy's head is broken. 
I have watched over your safety for many years. Hav- 
ing lost ^ all his property, he took himself off. The 
gates are open. The servants opened the gates early, as 
their custom was. Brave men have confidence in them- 
selves. Then only (91. c), when they obey the laws, 
will the citizens be prosperous. If we do not bear iv/iat 
comes from the gods^^^ we are undone. Who in the 
world^^ has broken this pitcher? It is the jpart^^ of a 
general to watch over the safety of his army. O Jupi- 
ter, the folly of the man If a war should arise {be 
raised)^ we are undone. If you break one pitcher more^ 
O worst of slaves, you shall not come ojff with irn- 
punity.^^ My property was plundered, wretched man 
that I am i^^ If any man is in the habit of performing 
just (actions), it was he.^^ I have not met either ray 
friend or my brother's.^ 



» ^6pv, 66paToq, &c. — Poet. Jo^df, Jopt : of which hpiiQ found in Attic 
p'ose, in the phrase hpl kXetv. 



MOODS AND TENSES. 



91 



§ 35. Additional Remarks on some of the Moods and 

Tenses, 

195. a) The fut, 3. (or future ^perfect) expresses a 
future action continuing in its effects. 

195. The fut. 3. differs, therefore, from the Latin 
futurum exactum^ in not being used to express merely 
the future completion of a momentary action. 

197. h) The fut. 3! is, however, sometimes used to 
express 1) the speedy completion of an action, or 2) the 
certainty of its completion'm the most positive manner. 

198. The fut. 3. is obviously the natural future of 
those perfects, that, from their marking a continued 
state, are equivalent to a present with a new meaning : 
e. g. (xbiJivrii-ica, yJ-ATrniui. 

199. Some verbs have the fut. 3. as a simple future : 
e. g. dedf.aouai,^ nEnavaoaca, y.exoipoiAai. 

200. c) In the active voice a continued future state^ 
or a future action continuing in its effects^ is expressed 
by i'(To//c6fc with perf. participle ; a circumlocution which 
is also used in the passive (as in the example 205. c.) 

201. d. e) The perf. has also a subjunctive and op- 
tative, and the future an optative^ which are used when- 
ever that kind of uncertainty or contingency peculiar to 
those moods agrees with the time of these tenses. 

Only, however, when particular distinctness is required ; and 
even then, the perf. -part, with eUv or w is generally preferred to the 
regular opt. and suhj. of that tense. 

202. The imperat. perfect is principally used in 
those verbs whose perfects have the meaning of a pres- 
ent : iii8firr](7n, &C. 

203. /) The third person of the imperat. perf pass. 
marks a decided resolution : it is a strong expression for 
let it be done, (fcc. 

204. Obs. with the optative — and also the opta< 



^ From o£oj to hind. 



92 



MOODS AND TENSES. 



tive alone ^ — expresses a i^/'zVi. If the wish expiesscd 
has not been (and now cannot he) realized^ ei&e is used 
with indie, aorist or imperf.^ according as the limeto 
which the wish refers is jjast^ or present. So oogrsAof 
{eg, a) alone^ or with uOs^ ei ydo or (hg, and followed by 
the infinitive. 

205. a) 7) no).iTeia TEh'cDg y. e x 0 (j i] a a r a i, iuv 6 ro/oD- 
Tog avT^jv aniay.onri q^vlaiy the constitution 
will have been iierfectly arranged, if such 
a guardian superintend^s it. 

b) q-od^a yal n an q d^ar at, speak and it shall 

[immediately) be done. 

c) 7 a dtovra ic 6 /nad^ a iyvco'Aoreg,^ ycae 7,6ycQv 

fiaiaicop drrr^llayfjLa'voij toe shall have voted 
on the subject as %ce ouglit^ and be freed 
from empty speeches. 

d) aids 6 viog v av ix ]]y 0 t, would that my son 

had conquered ! ,vv^m {i^%^\M^ [ 

e) alnav on i] S 0 1 ijutQa rQizTj, he said that he 

should come on the third day. 

f) n anaiQaaO 03, let it be attempted. 

206. YCCABULARY 34. 

Constitution, nohraia, ag, r^. 

Arrange, adorn, xoafxaco. 

Superintend, overlook, Iniaxonao:}. 

What Vv' e ought, ja dtovra. 

Empty, vain, useless fxdraiog, a, or. 

I am come, ijy.co ^ (with perf meaning). 

I am gone, am off, or/o{iat^ {p^^f meaning.) 

Endeavour, naiQaoi^iai. 



* As in CO Trai, y £ V 0 I 0 rrarpdg zvTV)(^iaTeoos. See also 293. e. 

7 yiyvo)GK£iv interdum de plebiscitis vel populi jussis. (Bremi ad 
Demosth. Phil. I. 54.) 

* r,KO}, riKov, ; no Other tenses in use. Stnv ev ijxeiv. to hate ar- 
rived at an advanced age {Herod.): a construction seldom found ii» 
Mlic Greek. 



MOODS AND 1ENSES. 



99 



Would that 



ei&s, f/V ojcfslov ^ El yao 



To make to disappear. 
If it is agreeable to you, if 



loi' alone). 



you are willing, 
And that too, 
For the present at least, 
As far as they are concern- 



H 601 ^ovloiisrqi iazi, 

iiai lavia. 
TO ye viv thai. 



ed. 



TO em TovToig thai. 



Exercise 39. 



207. For thus we shall have done (205. c) what we 
ought. For thus what we ought (to do) will have been 
done (205. b). I will remember my former^^ folly. He 
told me that they had forgotten their former virtue (205. 
c). Let us place the wise and good as guardians of this 
most beautiful constitution. If it is agreeable to you^ 
these things shall (instantly) be done. Let these things 
be done (205./). Do not attempt to deceive the gods. 
If you do this, I am off. The physician told me, that 
he would come on the fourth day. If you obey God, 
your soul will be adorned with all virtues. Would that 
the v\use superintended the state ! Would that the 
prudent managed the affairs of the state ! Would that 
th3 wise judge had -superintended the vv'hole constitu- 
tion! Would that Tbales were alive! JVould that 
the man had escaped death ! If you obey the physician, 
you will be freed from your disease. Vfould that the 
Greeks had conquered ! They condemned him to death 
(156, note g. obs.) and that too though he ?6^a5(say: 
' being') y^ur citizen. For the present at least, we will 
use him. I don't know what in the world^^ we are,^^ 
for the present at leasts to do <^ with him. As far as 



^ d(i)£i\co (debeo), owe, ought. d^MiXmco. Ao7\ oj(p^Xov {un- Attic o0£- 
\ov) used only in wishes, oj(pe\£ ^^v ^wKpdTrjg (Jiow Socrates ought to 
9e alive), would that Socrates were alive ! eWs kXsos i\a/?£g. 
XP^^'^^os is the verbal adj. from ^P^^l^^^* 



94 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



that (person) is concerned^ I am undone. For the pres* 
ent, at least, let us desist from the chase. O boy, may 
you become wiser ' 



§ 36. On the Infinitive. 

208. The use of the Greek infinitive is much nearer 
to that of the English than that of the Latin is ; thus : — 

209. b. c) It expresses the purpose, and {b. d)i^ often 
used in the active, after both verbs and adjectives, where 
the passive would be admissible^ but less common. 

Hence it must often be translated into Latin by the participle in 
duSj or by the supine in u. 

210. The particle co(jT£'* expresses a consequence, mid 
is used with the ijifinitive ; or, if the consequence be a 
definite consequence that has actually occurred, the in 
dicative. 

211. ^ So — as to = oo(7T£ with ivfinitive always. 

\ So — that = coazfi with infinitive or indicative. 

With the infinitive the consequence is more closely connected 
with the principal clause, as contemplated or resulting immediately 
and naturally from what is there stated. The consequence may 
be equally real. 

212. ^ So that^ should not be translated by the indic- 
ative, except where tlie sense would allow ns to substi- 
tute therefore or consequently [itaque) for so that. 
Thus : " the road was so bad that I did not reach my 
inn till midnight" ='4he road was very bad; conse- 
quently I did not reach my inn till midnight here the 
indicative would be properly used, ooars properly an- 
swers to ovioog, or some other demonstrative, in the pre- 
ceding clause. 

214. a) 0 avx^Qconog nnpvxE cpdeiv, it is the nature of 
man to love. 



^ More rarely wj. 



ON THE INFINITIVH. 95 

b) TtaQt'/co BfAavrov sQcoraVj I offer myself to ht 

questioned. 

c) r^l-^ov id 8 I V as, I came (or am come) to see 

you. 

d) rfivg d'/.oveiv, siveet to hear, deivog liyeiv^ 

clever at speaking, yalmog Xa^Hv, hard to 
take (or catch). 
. e) ovTcog avor^Tog iaiiv, cogtb noleiiov avi 8ioi]vijg 
aiQsTad^ai, he is so senseless as to choose 
war in i^reference to peace. 
ovTcog avoijTog ianv, coars Tiolsfxov avz nqr^vrig 
aioHxai, he is so senseless^ that he [actually) 
chooses war in preference to peace, 
f) cfiloiifuoTaTog riv, co cr r £ ndvra v n o jxelv ai rov 
ETzaivHod-uL spE'/.u, hc was very avihitious, so 
as to bear any thing for the sake of being 
praised. 

214. Vocabulary 35. 
To put forth naturally, 



Supply, afford, o3er, 
Sweet, pleasant, agreeable^ 
Terrible, clever, 
Hard, difficult, 
Senseless, 

In preference to, instead of, 
Peace, 

Ambitious, fond of honour, 

Undergo, bear, 

On account of, for the sake 

of, 
Leaf, 



g:i'co {niopvyAi et Hcfvv are in- 
trans. ; I am produced 
= I am by nature, or it is 
my nature to, &c. 

7j8vg, eta J v. 
dsirog./ 6v. 
yalenog^ ?/, 6v. 
dror^Togy og, or. 
dvTL. 

qilouitog, og, ov, 

V770-fX8PCO. 

eyexa {gen.) 

CfvlloV, OV^ TO. 



« izaoc')(£'yQai, mid. is also used for to afford^ without any percejJtihU 
difference of meaning. (See example in 298. 6.) 

^ — vog^ an old pass, termin. (like reos, t6s), whence ceivos terrible 
rrvfvis hateful, &c (B.) 



96 



ON THE INFINITIVE 



Bring up, educate, 

Very, 

Wing, 

Young bird. 

Art, also, contrivance, 
trick. 

Long, 

Not yet. 

Endure, bear. 

To get teeth, feathers, <fcc.. 

To give one trouble, to mo- 
lest, harass, (fcc, 



TTaidevco. 

TTzeQov, oVfto: nriqv^, vyog, ^. 
feoaoog, ov, 6. 

fia'AOog, d, ov, 

OVTZCO.^ 

dvr/Of^aiJ 
cpvco, 

novop oj^ TtQuyixaia TzaQtjeiv. 



Exercise 40. - 

215. It is the nature of man (213. a) to love those 
Vv^ho confer benefits upon him. The city is a difficult 
one to take. The woman is a terrible one to find out 
contrivances. The man is unable to hold his tongue. 
He told me that his daughter had been well brought up. 
If you give me any trouble, I will not endure it, at least 
(not) willingly .^^ The eagle has long wings.^^ f-j^ j^^^^j 
been so brought up as very easily to have enough. He 
is so beautiful as to be admired by all. You are so 
senseless, that you are always hoping for what is im- 
possible.'' They are too wise^° to choose war in prefer- 
ence to peace. The young birds have already got 
feathers. The trees are already putting forth their 
leaves. The child has not yet got (any) teeth. If you 
molest me, you shall not come off" with impunity.^ ^ They 
harassed them so, that the army was not able {indie.) 



s This word is often strengthened by the addition of tl (-.'h v n). 

^ n-cj, Tcono-e, ever yet, ever up to this time. The foniier is joined 
to ov. [jfj ; the latter to ovrji^ ptrjSi; and both relate to the past. OvuirtoTe, 
uiiSinme, are commonly employed only generally, or with reference to 
the future. (See 238*, note on examp. b.) 

* This verb has a double angment : imperf. r;u£i)(^6ur]Vj aor. r]v£a^6uT}i', 

^ Aor. 1., as perf,, has a different meaning. 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



91 



CO advance. i This wine is pleasant to drink. It is the 

nature of boys to pursue what is pleasant. 



^ 37. The Infi'/iLtive continued. 

216. a) The infinitive with the article in the gen. 
sometimes denotes a inotive or j^iirpose. 

It may be cocsidered as governed by l.eKa understood. 

217. b) Yv hen the infinitive has a subject of its own, 
the general rule is. that it stands in the accusative. 

This rule holds good, -when the infcn. is used with to, (as in 
221. c). 

218. b) A p?'e;;o5z7/o?2 with the nz/zz. may be equiva- 
lent to a sentence introduced by a conjunction. 

219. d) But when the subject of the infinitive be- 
longs to and is expressed vrith the former verb, it is 
generally not expressed with the infinitive. 

The examples in 221, show that this rule holds good, whether the 
subject of the injin. be the subject of the preceding verb or an 
oblique case governed by it. — In the second example the accusative 
would be expressed even in Latin ; dixit se festinare, 

220. e) When the subject of the infinitive is omitted 
because expressed vrith the other verb, an adjective cr 
substantive that forms the predicate with the infin. is 
mostly put in the same case that the subject of the im 
finitive stands in in the other clause. 

Thus (in 221. t) vU; conforms to 'A " : ' ' . - ^^ • -poOvuov 
to airov, iS:c. — This construction is ci. . . 

221. a) iTeiyiad-}] ds y.a\ 'Atcumatt, tov fir hiGiag y, a- 

y.ovoyaiv rrr EiSQiay, and At al ant a also 
teas fortified, tiiat robbers (or pirates) 
might not commit depredations in EnbcKa. 
b) oidli' Inndydri dia to iy.Eiiov LUj TiaQHyai^ 



\ 



5 ' 



9d 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



nothing was done, because he was not 
present, 

c) ovK OQ&ojg 'i^Bi to y.ay.(og n aa'iovt a anv- 

^sad" a I dvndQoivza x«xoa^, it is not right 
for one v/ho suffers wrong to avenge him- 
self by doing wrong in return. 

d) d80[xaL oov TzaQaiAsveiv, I beseech (or entreat) 

you to stay with us, ic^ri aTzovda^eiv, he 
said that he was in a hurry, ovvEinuv 
oixoXoyoj, I confess that I assented, 

e) 0 "^Xe^avdQog scpaaxsv aivai /Jiog vlog, Alex- 

ander used to say that he was the son of 
Jupiter. 

meiaa avzovg eivai ■d'eog, I persuaded them 
that I was a god. 

idsovro avtov ehai n o o v iio v, they en- 
treated him to be zealous. 

a^eGTi fA. 0 1 ysvead-aL Evdaii^ovi, I may (if I 
please) become happy. 
222. Vocabulary 36. 

7£T)(^og, Eog {ovg) to. 
'AaxovQyog {aaycog et eQyov), 
>tay.ovQyLcc, ag, rj, 
:<ay.ovQy7]ua, arog, to. 



To wall, fortify, 
A wall, 

Evil-doer, rascal, villain, 
Villainy, 
Misdeed, 

To do evil towards, de 
harm to, to inflict dam 
age on, &c. 

To ward off. 



To return a man like for 

like. 
To remain witn, 



^axovQyeco, 

aiivvEiv 71 7in (also with 
dat. only, cc/avveiv 7ivi, to 
defend. In Mid. ward 
off from myself ; repel, 
requite^ revenge Q/iyself 
on, with acc, of person ; 
also without case, to pro- 
tect oneself, 

7oTg o^ioioig aiAvvead^ai, 



ON THE IXFINITIVE. 



Say, 



qaay.(x3 {-^ give out "with 
a shght intimation that 
the thing is not exactly 
so." VbmeL) 



To feel or be thankful for, 



ydqiv eldti'ca {gen. of thiiig) 



return thanks for, 
One may, 
One might, 
It is rigiit, 
Master, 
Laugh, 




eSaazL [licet). 
lo\}6jg eysi. 



Exercise 41. 



223. The city was fortified, that no one might do 
injury to the citizens. Nothing was done, because 
(221. b) that villain gave us trouble. Let us beseech our 
friends to be zealous. He said that he would be with us, 
if it loas agreeable to us.^^ I persuaded them that I 
was a philosopher (221. e). I persuaded the judges 
that Abrocomas was a rascal. It is a hard thing (65) to 
conquer one's temper. He is too young^° to have mas- 
tered his temiper. If you ward off from me this danger, I 
shall feel thankful to you for your zeal. I v^ill revenge 
myself on him who has injured you. If you return like 
for like to him who has treated you ill, you commit a 
sin. You used to say (221, e) that you were master, 
AVe ought to defend the laws of the state. It is in our 
power^^ to become happy. You m.ay (if you please) be- 
come a philosopher. He says that he vv'ill deliberate. 
Nothing was done, becaaise [prep.) all the citizens envy 
the judge. He s?tys that he will brave this danger. It 
is not right, that a citizen should plot against the con- 
stitution, if all the citizens defend the laws, it will be 
well. 



* IJ^riSetSf as a purpose is expressed. 



100 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



224. Vocabulary 37. 



Preposition in. 

Before a vowel fx becomes - it governs the ^en. and 
means in general, out of, forth from. Hence, of 
caiise-=in consequence of ; from, for : also, of suc- 
cession of t ime. 



Out of the city, 

For this cause or reason. 

This being the case, for 

this reason, therefore. 
After our former tears, 
Unexpectedly, 



h trig TToXecog. 

fx Tuvitig rrjg alziag. 



EA 70VT0V, 



f§ anQOGboKiirov {aTZQOodoHi]* 
Tog, ujiexpected). 



Exercise 42. 

225. We are now laughing after our former tears. 
The men from {out of) the city are plotting against the 
king. He says that he is watching over the safety of all. 
The Grecian cavalry, unexpectedly charging the ranks 
of the Persians, conquer (them). It is sweet to laugh 
after troubles. The physician says that diseases are 
from Jupiter. This being the case, it seemed good to the 
generals to depart. The slave says that the pitcher is 
broken. He says that he is glad^ the citizens are rich. 
He says that he takes pleasure in sleeping. He said 
that the judge had an upper chamber, whenever he stay- 
ed in town. This being so, let every man provide for 
his own safety. I asked him how much he thought the 
geom.eter's possessions would fetch, if sold. I wonder 
at what has been done^ by the general. It is not every 
man,^^ that can bear unexpected (evils). This man has 
inflicted more damage upon the city than any otiier 
single person.^* Would that the physician had remain- 
ed with (us) ! Would that the physician were here 
Would that the physician had been here ! 

V 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



101 



^ 3S. The Infinitive cot^imied, 

226. Attraction may take place (that is, the predi- 
cate substantive or adjective be in the fiominative), 
when the infinitive is introduced by the article or doazs, 

227. a) TZQog to avfxcftoov ^oogi, dia to q^iXavrot etpai, 

they make self-interest the object of their 
lives, because they are lovers of themselves, 

b) i'AnmnovTcu in\ rco" o ixo lo i rotg laiTiofispoig elvai, 

they are sent out, on the understanding 
that they are to be equal {on an equal foot- 
ing with those that are left behind. 

c) ovdtig rT]).ixovTog sgtco nao viaiv oS(TT£, rovg TOf^^ 

ovg 77 ciQ ag, jAq dovvuL dty.fjv, let no one be 
so ])oioerfnl amongst you, as not to be 
punished if he transgresses the laws, 

22S. YoCABULAPcY 38. 



It is expedient or profitable, 
Expediency, utility, 

To make self-interest the 

objector one's hfe, 
Self loving, a lover :f self, 

selfish. 
Self-love, selfishness. 
Transgress, 

So great, so powerful. 
To be punished, suffer pun- 
ishment, 
Infinitely many, very ma- 
ny, a vast number of, 



Gviicp^QEi {dat!) 

what is expedient.) 
TTQog TO (yi\uq)8Qov l^xiv. 

q)D,av7og, og, ov 
qitlavzlay ag, 

7zaQa^a[vco° (of a law, &c., 

to break), 
Tr^lixovTog,-avT7],-ov70, 
dLy.?]v didovai {gen, of thing, 

dat, of person byiohom). 

[jivQiO!, ai, a. 



^ cTTi with dat. often marks a condition. 288. 

o Paii/O), Pfjcxonai, Pi8r]Ka^ t8r]v. /Sfiao) and eSrjaa, trctns. {I0r]\., Pr'iQi) 
QaUv^ /?a5 drjvaif Pds,) — -apaPaho) has also pcrf. pOSS. rapa^ipaixatg aor^ 



102 ON THE INFINITIVE. 

Ten thousandj ^vqToi, 

Soldier, oTQancortjg, ov, 6. 

Couiltiyj 0 TzaiQig,^ idog, rj. 

Treaty, cTiovdar, {properly "li 

balions"). 
Excessively, ayav. 
Excessive, 6 ayav. 



PrepositioNj avzL 

Governs genitive : signilicaiion, instead of ; in prefer 
ence to ; (213. e) ; equivalent to. 

Exercise 43. 

229. Let us fly from excessive self-love. Let us pur- 
sue the honorable rather than the expedient. They 
choose war in preference to peace, because they have 
not tasted the evils of war. They undergo every toil, 
because they are ambitious. He says that a king is 
equivalent to very many soldiers. All men, so to say,"^^ 
are lovers of self. If he were not ambitious, he would 
not endure this. I am come on an understanding, that 
i am to be on-an-equal-footing with the other citizens. 
Do not transgress the laws of your country. They bear 
every thing for the sake of being praised, because [prep.) 
they are excessively ambitious. Let us choose what is 
honorable in preference to what is expedient. It is not 
rights to make self-interest the object of one's life. It 
does not belong to a pious man, to fear death excessive- 
ly. It is not every man that can^^ niaster self-love. 1 
have not fallen in v\^ith Abrocomas for a long time. 1 
love both the children of Abrocomas and those of Phi- 
lip. Every body aims at becoming happy. It is profita- 
ble to men to be pious. If you do this, you shall be pun- 



P Properly a poetical fern. adj. agreeing with yn. 
^ Nouns in a? have the Doric gen. in a (for ov), when they are the 
names of foreigners, or of Doric Greeks of no celebrity ; as 'APpoKdixa^ 



THE PARTICIPLE. 



103 



ished for your villainy. All the laws of the state, so to 
say.^^ were transgressed by this villain. He thinks that 
the treaty has been broken. 



39. The Participle, 

230. A participle assumes an assertion ; or rather 
states it attributively, not predicatively. Whenever it 
is convenient to express this assertion by a complete 
sentence, we may do so ; connecting it with the princi- 
pal sentence by a relative pronoun, or a conjunction (or 
conjunctional adverb) of timej cause^ condition^ or lim- 
itatioji. Hence, vice versa — 

231. a. b. c. d) Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
troduced by lohen^ after^ if^ siuce, because, although, 
&c. may be translated into Greek b}^ omitting the rela- 
tive or conjunction, and turning the verb into aparti- 
cijyle. 

In translating from Greek into English, the proper particle to be 
used must be found by considering the relation in which the parti- 
ciple stands to the principal verb. 

Thus, "I visited my friend voarovra^^^ may mean, 'who was ill,^ or 
'because he was ill,' or 'when he v/as ill.' 

232. e) The'English verbal or participial substa72tive 
under the government of a preposition, may often be 
translated by a participle agreeing v/ith the nominative 
case of the sentence. 

283. g) A past participle may often be translated in- 
to English by a verb, connected with the principal verb 
by ' and! 

Of course, vice versa^ the first of two verbs connected by 'arid' 
may be translated into Greek by a past participle. 

234. a) yvvri iigyjiqoL oqviv sJ^s y*a& 8y.da77]v rj^tQav coor 
avTTi TiHTovcsav, a certain widoio woman 
had a hen which laid her an egg every day. 



104 THE PARTICIPLE. 

b) ra iQrujLara av aXco a ag aTzriy^aro, when tf 

after, he had spent all his money ^ he hang- 
ed himself. , 

c) laXmov 8671 Ityrip noog irjv yaaz^Qa, coza ovh 

8j[ov(yaVj it is difficult to speak to the stom- 
ach, because it has no ears, 

d) yiyv(KiO>iO'pz8g ozi y.axd ioTiv, ofiojg i/nOvfioif 

(jLv avTojv, though they know that they are 
hurtful, they nevertheless desire them, 

e) Xrii'Q6\i8voi 'QSiGiv, they live by pkmdering. 
y) %qciXi!iV ds TjdovMv 'AOL iTii&vfAtcov, diaq;eQcrtcx)g 

av cojqjQovoT, but if he gained the victory 
over pleasure and his desires, he would be 
temperate in an uncommon degree, 
g) la^oov, 8q)r], tovrov, fxaaziycoaov, take this fel- 
low said he^ and flog him, Qixpag 6 ttoi- 
[A,)]v 7187 Qav, TO y>8Qag avz'tjg xaT8a^sr, but the 
shepherd threw a stone and broke her horn. 

235. Vocabulary 39. 

A widow, y^Q^^^ 

To know, ytyvo^a>i(oJ 

To consume, spend, avdllaKco {fut. avolXG)6(o,aor* 

Stomach, belly, yaaTiiQ, 8 nog, ri. 

The future, to (xillov. 

To plunder, ~ hft^ofAai. 

Remarkably, in an uncom- 5. / 

mon degree, dcacp8QovTcog. 

To scourge, flog, ixaaTTyoco, 

To throw, QLTZTCxi, 

Stone, n8TQog, ov, 6 {nsTQa, ag, 

in good authors, is a 

r^*ck.) 

Bare, uncovered, 'ipV.og, iq, 6v, 

Participles with peculiar meanings. 

At first, at the beginning, agioiiEvog, rj, ov. 



THE PARTICIPLE 



105 



At last, 

After some time, 

VYith^ {often translatedhy) 



TeXsvTooVj ojaa, coy. 
diaunoov ygorov.^ 



Exercise 44. 

|r3= Obs. Sentences in Italics are to be translated by 
participles. 

236. I shall be happy, if Iknoic myself The judge 
himself shall be punished, if lie transgress the laws of 
the state. The master himself took the slave and flog- 
ged him. He fled for refuge into the temole. that' ° he 
might not be punished. Since yon see this, are 3^ou not 
without fear of death? If yon doivhat yon ought, ^/ou 
will be happy. That shameless (fellow) lives by flat- 
tering the rich. \Yhat impiety He set oS ivith ten 
thousand Hoplites. Cyrus was riding icith his head 
micovered." Take tlie boy and punish him. He has 
spent both his own money and his^ father's. It is not 
every man \Yho can^^ be without fear of the future. 
He threw a stone and broke the eagle's head. He cross- 
ed the river, though it icas flowing icith a full stream. 
The woM was jjersuaded. and went away. The physi- 
cian, ivith much skill [art.), freed the boy from his dis- 
ease. At last he went away. At first you spoke ill of 
every bod3^ After some time I will be vvith you. 

V 



^ 40. The Participle continued. 

237. a) The participle of the future is used to ex- 
press a purpose.'' 

^ So c;aA. TTOAVV GT 'o\iy)v yy. 

^ Of course in choosing which may be used, Vv'e must consider 
whether the persons merely had, or led, or Irought, or used the thing 
or person with which he performed the action. 

^ The mtention is spoken of in a less certain way by the addition t 
ef a>s. had Cyrus arrested, d^oKrsvwv. 

5* 



iOG 



THE PARTICIPLE 



238. b) Many verbs that signify e77?-o^io?z.9,;?erc^p^{on 
hy the senses, knowledge, recollection, cessation or con^ 
iinnance, &c., take the participle, where we should use 
the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or, 
' that,^ &c. 

238.* a) iydo tQioiica vfxTv i tt i x o v q i] a co v, I am com- 
ing to aid you, 

Tov abiyiovvra naQa Tovg diKaarag ayeiv dei 
dixr]v dcKKJovta, he loho wrongs another 
should be taken before the judges to be 
punished (literallyj one should take, &c.) 

T ov g Tovzo Tioi^aovTag iy.niixnBi, he sends 
out men to do this, 
b) iidsiv Tovg naldag d^vrjTovg y ev v rj a ag, I knew 
that I had begotten mortal children (or, 1 
knew that the children I had begotten 
were mortal), 

7]a06fA,7]v aviMv olo n ev co v ehai GocpcoraTcov, 
I perceived that they thought themselves 
extremely wise. 

avvoida iixavzcp aocpog cSv (or aocp^ ovri), 
I am conscious of being wise (or, that I 
am wise). 

ovdeTTOTS^ fxer6fZ8lr](y8 iioi Giyriaavri, I have 
never repented of having held my tongue. 



239. Vocabulary 40, 

To bring assistance, to aid, 
succour, 

Judge, 



ETtmovQico {dat.) It may 
have besides an accus, 
of the thing : tni'AovQHf 
roocp to bear help against 
a disorder ; to combat it.) 

dixaan^g,"^ ov, 6, 



See 214, h. : " but ovocTTore, like nunquam, is occasionally found 
with past tensp.s even in the best writers." (P.) 
^ £1 T(x> ^^eiixCjva eTTEKOvprjcra. (Xen.) 

The oiKaarfig decides in a court of justice according to right and 
law : the Kpirrjg in the other relations of life according to equity ard his 
itnowledge of human nature. (Pass.) 



THE PARTICIPLE. 



Beget, 

Dare, attempt. 

Verbs that take 

See, 

Learn, am aware, 
I repent. 

Make to cease, stop, 
Cease, 

Am ashamed, 
Remember, 
Appear, 
Am evident, 
Know, 

Am conscious, 

Rejoice, 

Perceive, 



the participle. 
Tiavco, 

h'jyco, TTavofiau 

drjlog 81^1'^= 2im e ridentlyt 
oida (2 perf. of el'dm.) 
avvoida £fxavT(!, 



Exercise 45. 

239.* I am ashamed of having flattered Xenochdes, 
Remember that you are a man. He was conscious of 
acting unjustly. He rejoices in being praised, because 
he is ambitious. I have ceased to be a flatterer. I am 
conscious of fearing death. I am not ashamed of hav- 
ing conferred many benefits upon him. I know that I 
am mortal. I do not repent of having ravaged the 
whole country. I am conscious of wishing to destroy 
whatever I may take {shall have taken «). He is evi- 
dently doing disgraceful things. He evidently cannot 
either speak well of his friends or treat them well. 
Cyrus knew that the son he had begotten, was mortal 

y Of things requiring courage. It has also the meaning of susii^ 
nere, to hear to do so and so. 

' [xavOdvco^ [xadfjaoy.at, pz'^aQr]Ka. e^aBov. 

^ aia^^yvojxai ttoulv^I am ashamed to do it: aLa^vuojjaL Tiro 1(2 V 01 
T 0 i ^7 0- a ?, I am ashamed of doing, or having done it, 

« lav (baiv(jjn(*< dSiKoov, if it should appear that I have acted unjustly 
^ 6fj\6g icTih 4vidjfj.£voSf he is evidently vexed, 
« 91, e. 



103 



THE PARTICIPLE. 



(238* b). I will put a stop to his inflicting damage on 
the city. 1 knew that the children he begot were mortal. 
Do not cease to love your mother. Know that yon shall 
be punished for yom^ injustice. The physician is here 
to (p)^ combat the boy's disease. Take the villain be- 
fore the judges to be punished. They will evidently 
attempt this. I knew that he had done more service to 
the state than any other single person.^^ I will send out 
men to (p) inflict damage on the city.. 

A 



41. The Participle continued ; zvyx^vay, Xavd^avoj, 

240. (p&dvci) ^ {come or get before) and XavOdvco ^ 
[am coficealed) are generally rendered by adverbs y 
the participle that accompanies them must then be 
turned into a verb. 

241. The participle lavd^dvcov or lai^ojv may be ren- 
dered secretly^ without being observed^ seen^ (fee. Hence 
aXaO^ev elaeldcov is nearly equivalent to elaTildtv ladwv, 
but gives more prominence to the notion of secrecy. 

242. a) 6 KvQog, dr it aTg oSi^, ribaro loig toiovroig, 

Cyrus ^ as being a boy, was pleased wiih 
such things. 

b) hviov naQovreg, they happened to be "present. 

zvyidvei co/\he happens to be (or simply, Is^ 

c) lavd^dva) r i tzoimv, 1) am concealed from 

?7??/5e//' doing it = do it without knowing 
it ; unconsciously, unknown to myself. 



A {p) after the first word of a clause shows that it is to be turned 
into a participial clause, as explained in the two preceding sections. 

(pOdvo)^ (pQrjaoixai^ £(p9dKa. lipQaaa, tcpOrjv. Fut. cpQaato in later Wri- 
ters. {ecpQnv — (pOalTiv, (pOo), (pOfivni, (pOdg). ecpOnu is the older aorist : but 
B(p9aaa is used once even by ThuCj and from Xenophon downwards ig 
the more common form. (B.) 

"XavOavoj, \fiao)j AsXTjSa. eXaOoy. (See 156.) 

i Often 'are In. (See 371.) 



THE PARTICIPLE. 109 

^ 2) am concealed from others doing li^^ 

do it without being observed; secretly , 
without being seen or discovered, 

d) 8q)x}f]r alzovg aq:ix6fievogf I arrived before 

them. EqiO^r^v acfjixdiAsvog,^ I arrived first. 

e) ova av cp dv 0 tg tz a i 6j v xomOy you cannot 

do this too soon, 
y ) 0 ^ X cpd" df 0 t g Tioioov 7ovro ; wonH you 

do this directly ? = do it directly. 
g) hys cpd-daag, speak quickly; at once* 

dvvGag^ TQe^s, run immediately. 

243. Vocabulary 41 , 

Preposition aTzo. 

Signification, from ; governs the genit. 

To fight on horseback^ dcp ittttcov. 

To have done supper, dno deinrov yivEad-ai, 

To do a thinff of them- , , < 

1 ° acp savTcov, 

seiveSj 

At the suggestion of others, dcp dvdQ^v hsooov. 
Openly, aTio 70S nQOcparovg (frciT 

adj, TTQOcpavrig^, 

Preposition ttqo* 

Signification, before (of time, place and preference), in 
behalf of for : governs genit. 

For ( = in behalf of) the ^ / 

1 . ^ ^ TTQo rov paaileojg. 
King, 

To vahie very highly, to ttqo nollov nomad-ai {to 

attach great importance value before^ i. e. more 

to, than, much. See 282). 

To choose war before^ in tiqo tiQ^vrig (for which dvTi 

preference to, peace, is used in 213, e). 



* iKU£0[JLai (commonly d<piKvionai), "^ojiaiy Jyixai. ik6i.i.t)v. 

i From dvvciv or dvvreiv, to accomplish. 



110 



THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. 



Exercise 46. 

244. The physician happened to be present, Yoii 
cannot punish the boy too soon (242. e). The enemy 
arrived at"^ the city before us. Go away immediately 
(242.^). Won't you go away directly (242./) ? If you 
do this before our enemies (do it), we have conquered. 
If you do this before me, I am undone. If we arrive at 
the city before them, all will be well. The slave broke 
the pitcher without being discovered. The Scythians 
fought on horseback. The father went in to the gener- 
al without being observed. These Hoplites were drawn 
up before the king himself. He is too sensible"^" to choose 
war before peace. He has done supper. Speak at once 
(242. g)^ if it is agreeable^^ to those who are present. To 
incur danger in behalf of the state is honorable. It is 
the part of a good man to incur dangers himself for his 
friends. He did this at the suggestion of other persons. 
I should never have done this of myself. If Xenoclides 
had not been their general, they would never have dared 
to commence a war openly. Men enact laws, thaf^ they 
may not be injured. Having dojie supper, they prac- 
tised equestrian exercises. 

A 



<§» 42, The Genitive Absolute^ &c. 

245. a) The case absolute is in Greek the genitive : 
it marks the time^ or generally any such relation to the 
principal sentence, as should express by when, after, 
since^ as, because^ though, if, &c. 

246. b, c) The participles of impersonal verbs are put 
absolutely in the nominative ; of course without a noun, 
and in the neuter gender. 



£iV, if they went into A, 



t 



THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. Ill 

247. d) When the time relates to apersoii, ini is gen< 
.orally expressed. 

248. e) When a motive is attributed to another per- 
son^ the particle (hg is generally used with the gen, or 
acc. absolute. 

249 a) i[>iovy>ad^8vdov7ogj\vhi\st I was asleep, tovtcop 
ovTcog fj^ovTcov, this being the case : or, as 
this is the case. 

b) dia it [it'vEig, i^ov amivai ; why do you re- 

main, when you are at liberty i^o go away ? 

c) So 8 8 0V uTzm'ai, when, whereas, &c. you 

ought to go away, do^av rj^lv amtv-ai, 
when we have determined to go away. 
Also 8 6'E,av Tavra,° this being determined. 

d) ItzI Kvqov ^aailevovxog, in the reign of Cyrus.- 

e) ioicona chg ndvrag s id drag (or ndvroif 

81, dor 03 v)^ he held his tongue^ as suppos- 
ing that all knew. 

250. Vocabulary 42. 

Words used in Nomin. Absolute. 

When or whereas it was 

said or told, einw^vov.^ 
[t bein^ disgraceful, possi- , y . ^ 
ble, impossible, plain or ^^^■/.Q^^-Svv<^^ov~advmrop 
evident, _ -drilov ov. 

There being an opportuni- 
ty, when I may or might. 
It being fit or incumbent, 7TQO(j7]y.ov. TTQoa/jxei (dat.) it 

belongs to. ol nQvafiKov- 
reg, those that belong to 
us = relations. 
When, whereas one ought, deov. 

^ So SoKovv^ Se^oynevov. 

° Also 66^av-os TOVTOV, So^dvTO)'V tovtcou^ and co^avTa TUVTa, 
P eaTiv, ivEfjTi^ TzdoccrTLv, e^ea-Ti, &C. TpaTrsiv, all Signify, one can 01 
may : but cveaTi relates to physical possibility (it is possible) : e^eaTi to 
moral possibility (it is allowed) : eo-rt and naoeaTc stand between these 
two meanings, without being confined to either of them ; the latter im- 
plying also the notion of facility. (B.) 



TZCiQOV.'^ 



112 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. 

As far at least as this is con- 
cerned, as far as depends tgvtov ys mxcc. 
on this, 

For the sake of, xolqiv (with gen, == prop* 

ter ; but x^Qtv iiiijv, for 
my sake). 

After the manner of a do^, a 
like a dogj ^ 

Without, . avBv {gen,) 



For any thing the other 
heavenly bodies could do Sreyia r^v IzeQCDv ucjtqcov, 
to prevent it, 



Exercise 47. 

251. Without you I should have perished for any 
thing my other friends could have done to prevent it, 
Why do you remain, when we have determined to suc- 
cour our friends? Why do you hold your tongue, 
whereas yon ought to speak? Why do you remain, 
now that you have an opportunity to depart ? He ask- 
ed the boy, why he remained, when it was his duty to 
depart. Though they were toldt to be present, they are 
not come. If it is agreeable to you,^^ we will go away. 
I hope that we shall thus arrive before'''' the Persians. 
He had the same upper-chamber, whenever he Avished. 
The slave told me, that the physicians were come {p) to 
combat the boy's disorder. If you act unjustly towards 
your slaves, know''* that you will be punished by the 
gods. I knew that all the rest of the country had been rav- 
aged by the Persians. Why did you choose war. when 
?/02/m?^A^ have chosen peace? He told me that all were 
permitted to go in to the general, whenever he was at 
leisure. 



t It being told. 



THB RELATIVE. 



iia 



Exercise 4S. 

252. Cyrus evidentli/'^^ desiied to be praised, I per' 
ceived that he wished to disobey the laws of his couQtiy. 
O boy, cease to do this, since (p) it is disgraceful to de- 
spise your father. The boy went secretly (241) into his 
fathers house. But this being determined, we cannot 
set out too soon.^'' The master, as btlng a fool, was de- 
ceived by his slave. Do not practise many arts, si?ice it 
is iinpossihle to do every thing well. Lotus not despise 
our relations. As far as money is concerned, you will 
rule over all the Greeks. Know that you v/ill get off 
well, as far at least as this is concerned. He told me 
that, if any man Vv^as well suited to govern men, it was 
Cyrus.°^ The physician told me, that he had come for 
my sake. This animal runs like a dog. This being 
the case, I will go away at once. All men, so to say^ 
desire what is absent. It is the part of a senseless man, 
to hold cheap what is present, from the desire of what is 
absent. He said nothing him.self, as supposing'^ that 
all felt grateful to Xenoclides. 



§43. The Relative. 

253. a. b. c) The relative is often used to introduce a 
cause, ground, motive^ or design of what is stated. 

Obs. 1. Vv'hen it expresses a cause or ground it takes the indie. ; 
when it expresses a 'purpose (as in 253. c), the fut. indie, [or the sub' 
junctive I]. 

Obs. 2. The relative is not used merely to connect a. sentence vrith 
the one before it so frequently as in Latin. When so used, it ia 
probably always expressive of some em.otion. (B.) 



^ 'Covjunciivus cum pronominibus adverbiisve relativis consociatus 
nonnisi in veterum epicorum sermone fini indicando inservit.' (Herm. 
ad CEd. Col. 190. So Krager, Lachmann,&c.) Some MSS. read orcoit 
In the passage of Thucydides, 258. c. 



114 



THE RELATIVE. 



Obs. 3. oSs is not used as a mere antecedent to the relative, but 

ovTds, which is not so strongly demonstrative. 

254. d) The raitecedent is often expressed in the 
relative clause, and omitted in the principal clause. 

When this is the case, the relative clause often stands first ; the 
subst., which mostly loses its article, is then not to be placed im- 
mediately after the relative. 

255. e) The relative is often made to agree in case 
with the antecedent in the principal clause. 

This is called Attraction of the Relative: it seldom takes place ex- 
cept where the relative should regularly stand in the accusative, the 
antecedent being in the gen. or dat. and witlwut a demonstrative 
pronoun (as ovros, Udvoi), 

256. ^) When the relative is attracted^ the antece- 
dent is often placed in the relative clause, but in the 
case in which it would stand in the principal clause. 

257. g) The antecedent is sometimes wholly omitted. 

As, for instance, when it is some general or indefinite notion 
(man, thins;, &c. as in 258. g, ex. 2), or has been before mentioned, 
as in 258. h. 

In (258. h) the rel. seems under the government of a preposition 
belonging to the other clause. As in English sometimes, — " she 
would have the head of tc/icsoerer advised it." 

258. a) 'davixaarov TtoisTg o g rjixTv ovdsv d idoog, you act 

straMgely in giving us nothing, 
h) Bfxay.aQi'Qov rr^v fAijrsQa, oicov rexroov ixvQtjas, 
they pronounced the mother happy in 
having such children, (Here oimv = on 
roiovToov.) 

c) rj vavg TZQScj^sTg ciyei, oineQ ik acphsQa q)Qd6C06iv,^ 
the ship is bringing ambassadors to 
make (or, that they may make) their own 
statement, 

OTika mm'Tai, olg a^vvovvrai rovg adiHovvrag^ 
they are procuring arms to defend them- 
selves xvith against those who injure 
them (or, with which to repel or punish 
those who injure them). 



More probably, (ppdaovaLv, (KrOger.) 



THE RELATIVE. 



115 



d) ovTog iariv, ov eideg ardoa, ) Tins is the man 
ov tldsg avdQcc, ovzog iariVf ) you saw. 

Attraction of Relative. 

e) ixezudidcog avrco tov oltov, ovtteq aviog f/S!g, 

you give him a portion of the food lohich 
you have yoursef. 

f) rjysfxon niaTtmovLbv op up KiQOg dm, we will 
confide in any general whom Cyrus may 
give us ' (for ov av^), 

g) anol.avoi'^ cov tyco ayad^p, I enjoy the good 

things I possess. jbisuv7]utrog cov tnqa^e^ 
remembering ichat he had done. 

h) fieT£7T8finsT0 alio 6TodT8Vfxa, TTQog CO nQoad^ev 

er/e, he sent for another army^ in ad- 
dition to the one he had^ before, 

259. Vocabulary 43. 

Surprising, strange, Oav^aGiog, t], ov. 

To act strangely, davfAUGzov noieiv. 
Corn, (food for man in gen- 
eral,) 

Ambassadorj Trgsa^vg, eojg, 6. 

To send for, iieranbiinoixai. 

To enjoy, anolavca." 

Prepositions Iv, avd, eig. 

iv = in, answer to where ? — govems dat. 

a^'cc =(properly) up : in, on, through (of a large space 

of time) — governs accus. 
tlg= into, towards, against, in reference to — governs 

accus. 

» Dederit. * See 94. 

^ This verb (which is probably from the same root as \a(3£Xv. P.) ig 
properly to receive from; to receive whether advantage or disadvan- 
tage from any thing. So that (like our, to reap the fruits of) it is used 
in both a good and a bad sense. 

^ Plur. often al-a in Att. Greek, which is also found in Herodotus. 

^ dnoXavcjo, d77o\avaofiai. Imp. dntXavov, aor. dTTsXavaa, though HO sim- 
ple verb is found. d-fjXavoVf dnn\avaa are later forms. 



chog.^ 



116 



THE RELATIVE. 



The first of all, 

It depends upon yon, 

Through the whole countiy, 

Through the whole day, 

Ever^?" day, 

Every year. 

By fives, or Jive and jive^ 
To attend a master. 

To send (a boy) to a mas- 
ter. 



Iv roTg TZQoitog,*^ 

iv Gol £(TTl. 

dva naaav rr.v 

ark TiaGav 7)]v r^ii^qav. 

dra naaav tjutQuv. 

dva ndv ezog, 

dva ntvTB. 

eig didaaxdlov cpouav'^ [pV 
yuav imderstood), 

eig didaaxdXov TTtfmeiv, 



Exercise 49. 

260. I pity the mother for having been deprived of 
such a daugher (25S. b). 1 vAW give him some of the 
wine which I have. He sent for more wine in addition 
to what he had drunk already (25S. h). This is the 
hare you saw (258. d). You act strangely in speaking 
ill even of your friends. He knew that I should enjoy 
the good things I possess (258. g). Receive the good 
things you desire (258. g). I have a stick to beat you 
with (258. c). The Hoplites arrived first of all. All 
these things depend on you. They harassed us all the 
day, so that (211) the Hoplites could not march. They 
went into the ciij by fives. Those who had plotted 
against the king entered {iveiit into) the city by threes 
without being observedJ^ Say qnickly^ w^hat your 
opinion is [what seems good to you), I, for my part^ 
would choose peace in preference to all that I possess, • 
I knew that (p) the citizens ivoidd choose^^ peace in 
preference to war. Why do you wait, when it is your 
duty to succour your friend? The Athenians used to 
do this every year. The\' are not aware that {j^) ^^ey 



^ This phrase is elliptical: h roTg Trp^Zroi ~ap)j(Tav=€V -oTg Trapovcriv 
rrp-Zroi Traprjaav. Thuc. uses iv roTg even with a fe?n. superlative. (See 
Ul 81.) 

y Properly, to go frequently into his house. 



THE RELATIVii. 



117 



are despised''* by every body. They do this, not only 
every year, but also every day. I admire your hUes, but 
not ■ your brother's. The boy attends no master. "We 
send our boys to masters. 

Exercise 50. 

261. I repented of having flogged''^ the slave. I in- 
deed eat that I may Uve, but others hve that vhey may 
eat. Socrates said, that he indeed ate that he might 
live, but that others lived that they might eat. The 
beauty of the city ^vas admired by all who \vere-there.^ 
He said that if the citizens obeyed the laws of the state, 
they would prosper (102). I wonder at the Vv^ater being 
turned into wine. The widow would have died^'^ hut 
for^^hQX hen, which (p) laid her an egg every day. 
The beauty of the boy was admired by Socrates him- 
self. The Persian cavalry unexpectedly charged the 
ranks of the Greeks. He says that he (219) has a pain 
in his head. I perceived that he rejoiced^^ in the wealth 
of the ciiizens.^ I am ashamed of being glad''^ that my 
daughter is beautiful.^ He is evidently'^ vexed at the 
misdeeds of his brothers. Henceforth let us despise no- 
body. Thr, judge told me that we must persuade (120. c) 
the citizens. Wouldthat you had done what you ought ! 
Would that you would do what you ought ! I am at a 
loss Vv'hat to do (98). 



§ 44. The Relative continued. 

262. a) W^hen the relative, with such a verb as he^ 
call, believe^ (fee. stands in apposition to a noun, it gen- 
erally agrees in gender with iV, rather than its proper 
antecedent. 



* 01) should stand last : it then takes an accent (oQ. 



118 



THE RELATIVE. 



263. b) tanv"Oi^=hio(, some, and may be declined 
throughout : — 

N. 'iariv Oi, ea-iv ai, eariv a. 

D. iariv ois, eariv aig, eariv ois^ ^-C. 

264. c) In the S3.me ^YSiY sarir oTs=so7?ieti?nes ; eozif 
0710V, someichere^ &c. 

265. d) So also boziv with oaxig is used as an inter 
rogative. 

266. e) icp ol or wrs is, ^ 07i condition that,^ with the 
fiitiire indie, or the injin. 

The relative in this construction answers to the demc nstrativfc 
i-\ Tovrco: which, or l~l roTaSe, is not unfrequently expressed. 

267. g) av& KiV, because^ for ( =avT\ rovTOv oti). 

It may, however, be used in its proper meaning: Hn return for 
those things which,' &c, 

268. h) 81 7 ig^ does not express any donbt as to 
whether there ivas anij, but is used as equivalent to 
oang, whosoever, whatsoever [= all that), 

269. a) cfo^og, rjv aid (5 y.ulovfxEVj the fear which ive 

call bashfulness. 

b) ano lihv iv ^r/.^Xlct TTolsGyv aariv (a fro7?l 

some of the cities in Sicily. 

c) ov(jTi8Q eldop eariv otto v. whom I saw some- 

where. 

d) HGTiv ovorivag avd^Qconovg tex^aiiucAag Ini 

6ocp!a ; are there any persons whom you 
have admired for their wisdom? 

e) liico 60^, icp co ciyijaEi, I loill tell yon^ on con- 

dition that yon ivill hold your tongne. 

f) llQ^'^^i^f^'^ i^ QJ'^f avyyndxpai vouovg. they vjere 

chosen on the condition that they should 
draw up laws (i. e. to draw 2ip laws). 



■ For ^ sunt qui dicanV the Greeks said, tanv o" XCyovcriv, or sla-lv o>. 
Kiyovrtg^ OY da\v oF \iyov<jLv. Examples of the last construction are 720^ 
uncommon. (Kr.) 

rtj indef. has gen. ro-o, dat. roj (both enclitic), for nvSg, r.vt. So 
5<rrt? has 



THE RELATIVE. 



]19 



g") xf^Qi'^ <^oi oida av& mv rilx^sg, I feel thankful 

to you for coming, 
h) eq){)£iQov ei 1 1 iq/igi^xov ijV, they destroyed 

every thing of value. 



270. Vocabulary 44. 

To be bajiished, 
To return from banish- 
ment, 
To womidj 
Some, 

Somewhere, 
Sometimes, 
Hold my tongue, 



cpsvysiv.'^ 

8(5 Z IV OL 

iaziv OTZov. 
ear IV ore. 



Preposition 8id. 
Governs accus. and genitive. 

Signification : (with gen.^ Hhrough^^ of space o pimej 
and of means. 
" (with accus.) 'on account of; also, 

through^ of a cause. 



On your account. 
After a long time, 

Every five years. 
To pity, 

To be angry with. 
To be at enmity with, 
At a little, at a great dis- 
tance, 
To have in one's hand, 



dik 68. 

did Tiollov yQovov : aLo, du 
XQovov, after some time, 
did TitvTS ir&v.^ 

dl OlATOV 6'/8lV. 

dt OQylijg e)[siv. 

dt sy&Qug ylypead^ai rivij 

dt oXlyov, did nollov. 

did xsiQog f/£Lv. 



P « (pevysiv is used for (pvyeXvy to he in hanishment. (Heindorf.) 

^ TirpcbaKCJ^ rpcucrco, &C. 

« Fut. generally, (nynaoixai. It cannot, like c-LcoTrdco, take accus. of 
thing. 

^ Also Ota TrenTTTov srovs and Sia TreixTrrcov iriov. 
So 6ia (piYias ievai rivi. (Xen. Anab. iii. 8.) 



1^0 



6 olog Gv avijQ, 



Exercise 51. 

271. I deem you happy in having received®® such 
guou things. Most men cvideiitli/ desire^ ^ the good 
things which their neighbours possess. I will go away 
on condition that the physician shall stay. Some oi 
them were wounded by the enemy. I will tell you, on 
condition that the others shall hold their tongue. Is 
there any person whom (269. d) you have praised for^^ 
his forwardness? I will endeavour to do this so that 
(211) even you shall praise^ me. I would choose 
liberty before all the good things I possess (258. g). 
He chose war, when he might have peace. Xeno- 
clides was chosen general, with three others?^ I re- 
joice to have been elected'''^ general by the Athenians. 
Why am I wretched, when I may become happy ? I 
am at enmity with Abrocomas. He was banished 
through the Athenians. I rejoice in seeing you^^ after 
some time. Know that it is through the gods'^ that you 
are doing well. Know that it is through me that you 
have returned from banishment. The physician is 
come on your account. They do this every five years. 
The boy pursues the dog with [having) a stick in his 
hand. 



§ 45. 6 olog ov av7]Q, 

272. The relative adjectives, olog, oaog, i]hxogy &c. 
suffer attraction not only in the accusative, but also in 
the nominative, when the verb eliu with an express 



^ Geii. — aiV^o) takes acc. of person, gen. of thing. 
Infin. pres» 

^ i. e. knoWy doing well (nom. partic.) through the gods. The other 
sentences of this kind (having ' u is' followed by 'that') aie to be 
turned in the same way. 



6 oiog av avr^Q. 



121 



subject stands in the relative sentence; as, egafiai oiov 
GOV ardQog, for egaixai drdQog toioviov oiog av d. 

Obs. 1. This attraction consists in the omission of 
the demonstrative adjective in the gen., dat., or accus., 
and then putting the relative adject., by attraction, in 
the case of the preceding substant. The verb of the rel- 
ative sentence (t/'at) is also omitted, and the subject of the 
relat. sentence agrees with the attracted relative. 

Obs. 2. In this construction, oaog follows such words 
as {^avfiadTog, nluaTog, aq)d^ovog : and wg the adverbs 
V-avfiaoioog, d^avfxaozKig, (fcc. 

273. a) G. tqaixai olov aov avdQog, I love such a 

man as you, 
D. yaQl^ofiai otop goi avdQi, I gratify such 

a man as you. 
A, tnaivS) olov gs av^qa, I praise such a 

man as you. 
6) N. 6 olo^ cri; 1 {avi]Q), such a man as you. 
G. rov oiov a ov (u'pdQog), of such a man as 

you, &c. &c. 

c) av jn arjT 6v ogov TrQovycoQtjGs, he made 

astonishing progress. 

d) '&avfxaai(og cog ad hog ysyovs, he has be- 

co7ne surprisingly miserable. 

274. Vocabulary 45. 
To love. 

To gratify, yaQi^ofxai 

Advance, make progress, nQoycoQea 

To leap, aUo^af.^ 

To throw, QLTTTOi. 

The truth, to dl7]&£g {dX7]&7]g, true ; dl- 

r^&aia, truth). 

^ ncp is often added : ol oJot rrep VfisTg ai/Speg* 

^ epdto, poet. £pa{jiai, epac9fiG0[xai, rjpdadrjv (gen.) love. (See Index.) 

Pres. pass. cpw/Liat, (ipdcQai^ ipdonevog), to he loved. 
« aWo^aij a\ovixaL. AoV. 1. rjXdfjiriv with a in the moods, aor. 2. r]\6pjv 

with a. Aor. 1. should probably be preferred for indie, and part.; aor. 
2. for optat. and infn. (B.) Hermann rejects tlie indie, and iraver. of 

MOT, 2. 

6 



122 



6 oiog oh arriQ, 



True happinessj aXr^d^^g evdai^ona. 

To dwell, o/x/co. 
Miserable, wretched. aO^Xiog, a, ov. 

Preposition, iiaid. 

Properly yMzd signifies a motion from a higher place 
doiomoards : and governs the genit. and accus. 

With genit. it means, doion from, down, under; but 
more commonly against^ with verbs of speakings 
thinkings &c. 

With accus. it means, at^ hy^ near^ diiring, in an in- 
definite way ; also, accord 'mg to^ and with the distri- 
butive sense of our (by twos^ &c.) 

According to reason, ^Aaza loyov (also with gen, 

^- in proportion to"). 
Durins:, in, or at the time x x , 
of the disease, ^ararrivrooov. 

In villages,' y.md y^cofxag [vicatim). 

Two by two, yaxa dvo. 

In all respects, yaia ndvra. 

Sensual pleasures, al yark to o^iacc r^^ovai. 

According to Plato, y.ata nXdiMva. 



Exercise 52. 

275. They cling to sensual pleasuits, because''^ they 
have never tasted true happiness. They are too wise** 
to cling to sensual pleasures. (Men) gladly gratify 5mcA 
a man as you are. I would gladly gratify such men 
as you. They leapt down from the wall. Do you 
wish (98) that I should speak the truth against my 
friend? The boy is like his father in every respect. 
This is (65) hard, and for men like us impossible. The 
king loved such men as you are. The boy has made 
astonishing progress. He said that he would^'' very 
gladly gratify a man like you. Men like you always 
speak well of the good. A man like you is praised by 
every body. I would rather see men like you, than the 
king of the Persians himself He has become very 



ovd6}g oang ov. 



123 



wretched, ^inkiioivn to himself?^ I cannot gratify a 
man like you too soonJ'^ Will you not gratify a man 
like me directly 7^^ Sophroniscus, as being selfish, 
obliged nobedy, willingly at least}^ Ail men, so to 
say,^^ like to oblige such men as you. All men. so to 
say, rejoice iii praising'^'' such a man as you are. These 
things happened in the time of the disease. I know that 
they dwelF"^ in villages. The eagle has wings iii pro- 
fo: ion to its body. To live according to reason is a 
duxOient thing (from livings) according to passion. I 
will tell you on condition that you (will) send your boy 
to some master (259). 

V 



<S 46. 0 V d £ ig oazig ov, 

276. In ovdag oarig ov [neino non) the declinable 
words are put under the immediate government of the 
verb. 

Kiihner calls this inverted attraction^ because the noun (or word 
representing it) conforms to the relative, not the relative to the 
noun. 

Sometimes adverbs are affected by this kind of attraction : (^nvai 

KsldiVy oOcU ~£p r]K£c (for KELcre^. 

277. N. OV d 6ig o(jT ig ovy, av ravia noiriau^v. 
G. ovdevog ot ov ov xarEytXaasr. 

D. ovdsvl oro) ovx ane-AoivaTo, 
A. 0 vd 8 V a 0 VT IV a ov y,arr/,lavGS. 

There is no one w^ho looiild not do this. 
Theie v/as no one whom he did not laugh at. 
There was no one whom he did not answer. 
There was no one whom he did not weep for. 

278. Vocabulary 46. 

To laugh at, yiarayddco.v 



• The art. must be expressed, though the injin. is to be omitted. 
f ysXaw, 'acrojiai, but iysXaaa. Short a. 



124 



ovdeig ooiig ov. 



To answer, 
To weep for, 
Especially, 



anoy.Qivofiai.^ 
yaraxXaico. 

allojg 78 yial (ootll Other* 



There is nothing like hear- 



wise and also). 
ovdev oiov (ixovaai. 



As fast as they could, 
The agricultural popula- 



cog Tcf/jTOig el/opj 



01 duq)] y7jv a)(^opTsg, 



tion 



Exercise 53. 



279. There is no one who would not weep for such 
men as you?^ Ttere is nobody whom he does not de- 
spise. There is no one whom he does not hold cheap. 
There is no one whom they do not gladly oblige. 
There was none of those present' whom he had not 
plotted against. I act strangely in not gratifying''^ a 
man like you.^^ I know that I shall love' a man like 
YOU. lam ashamed of having plotted'^ against a man 
like you. He evidently ivished"^^ to oblige such men as 
you. That is a hard thing, and for a man like me at 
ieast,t impossible. To live according to reason is un- 
pleasant {7iot pleasant) to most persons, especially 
(when they are) young. There is nothing like hear- 
ing the ambassadors themselves. The agricultural 
population are doing Avell. They pursued the dog as 
fast as they could. 



^ Aor. 1. dTTOKpLOnvai is passive, from d-oKpivoi (secerno), except la 
late writers, who use it for dixoKohaGB'-u. (B.) 

^ Gen. of ra;^nf. 




Qiog. deco, ^sPJ.qj. 



125 



<§> 47. otog. dtco. fit)l(X), 

250. a. b) nJog with the infinitive implies great Jit- 
7iess or ability in a thing : is usually joined with olog 
in this signification; as olog rs eiLu noitiy, I am the man, 
the fittest one to do it. I am able to do it, can do i:. 
Without the infinitive, with neuter, olov denotes possi- 
bility, 

251. c. d) dtoD with 6/jyov, tio/Iov, cfcc. is used both 
personally and inipersonaily, in the meaning of I id ant 
but little ofj am from- doing, fcc. : impers. nou.ov dn, 
there wants much, far from it : olr/ov dcT, there icants 
little, all but. etc. Sometimes dtlv is omitted Avith oli- 
V')V, (fcc. 

252. e.f) fieV/.co is followed by an infin. of the fu- 
ture, present, or aorist. 

Obs. The future infin. is the ??iost, the aorist the 
least common.^ (P.) 

283. a) 010 g rs eiu(, I am able (i. e. am such as to 
do a thing), olov r i Ian, it is possible. 
h) at TiQoa&ev odovzeg olot reuvsiv eiair, our 
front teeth are adapted for cutting. 
ov yao i-p oiog c\no navzog y.EodairEir, he was 
not of a character^ to do anything what- 
ever for the sake of gain. 



° There is a large class of verbs the object of which, expressed by 
an infinitive, relates to future time, and may, therefore, be in the fu- 
ture^ though it often is in the pres. or aor. " The present is preferred 
when either the certain definite occurrence of the action is to be 
marked, or its immediate commencement from the time the words are 
uttered." (K.) Buttmann properly observes, that a distinction should 
be made between verbj whose object is necessarily future (e. g. hope 
promise, expect) and those where the object is not necessarily future 
(e. g. say, think, &cj : with the latter the pres. or aor. might be mis- 
understood ; with the former, not. But the MSS. often agree in giving 
the ])res. or aor. (with reference to future time) after such verbs. (B 
ad Plat. Crit. 14. 3.) 

^ Or, was not a man to, &.c. 



126 oiog, dsco, ixslloo, 

c) oliyov deco ^ay.Qv6ai, I could almost cry ; 01 

am near crying, 

6 I [y ov d eTv iddxQvGa^ I was near crying. 

bliyov ndvieg, nearly all {duy omitted). 
zovTO yaQ nollov dsiv einoi rig d v, for a 
man would not assert that^ far from it. 

d) dvoTv dtovta siKoai, eighteen, 

e) ^tlloo yQaipEir, yQacpeiv^ yqaipai, I am going to 

icrite, 

f) el fielXet (piloaocpog ysviad^ai^ if he is to he- 
come a philosopher. 

283^ Vocabulary 47. 
Cry, shed tears, dayiQvcx), 
I am far from, nollov dico. 

Nearly, almost, oXiyov dtiv (used as an ad- 

verbial phrase ; or oil- 
yov ouly). 

Far from it, nollov dtir. 

Am going to, [xtlloo (also, a7?i likely to, 

and am to, &c.) 
To gain, yieQdcmco, 
Gain, yJgdog, eog, to. 

Stove, y^djupogy ov, ij. 

Mostly, id nolld. 

Front (adject.), 6 nQooOev. 

Prepositions, diiq)l, tzeqL 
Govern genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification : dixcfi or 7T8qI tot, ^ ahout,^ in answer to 
both v)here ? and whither 7 d^cpl or tteqiti or nvk sxbiv 
or flvai is, to belong to,^ to be, or be em/ployed about, 

^ The construction SvoTv 6l6vtoiv has disappeared, under the influ- 
ence of modern criticism, from the works of the great writers, with the 
single exception of JCew. Hell. i. 1, 5 : iTTZiaTzXsL Svoiv oeovaaiv ehoai vavoivf 
where ^eovaaLq is undoubtedly the proper reading. (Krager ) 

* ol dn(f)l (or TTEpl) "AvvTov, Anyius and his followers or party . a 
phrase employed by Attic writers, when they chiefly allude to only one 
•ndividunl ; leaving it at the same time, for some reason*, undecided 
and in the dark, whether they mean that individual alone, or others 
besides. (B.) 



Ot^og. dtco. lit), 

7(p denotes care about: it follows verbs of /earing- 

{dadupca)^ being at ease about (&aQoeip)j &c. 
aucfi and (more commonly) Tzeol tov are o/j about (de) 

as in 'to talk about.^ Also, cfo^stadai, qilovEiKeh {to 

contend) neoi jivog, 
neoi nollov noiHad-ai or rjeTG&aiJ to value highly^ to 

make a great point of^ or attach great importance to. 

Exercise 54. 

284. He asked whether this ^vas possible. We cut 
with our front teeth. He told me that his father had the 
tooth-ache in one of his front teeth. He has large^^front 
teeth. He was not of a character to fear death. He 
says that he does not choose to go in to the general, 
since (y?) he is not at leisure. The Athenians sailed 
with {part.) nineteen ships. It is not possible that one 
man should ever rfo^^ all this. You will not escape from 
(86*. b) death. He is » mostly about the stove. Do not 
think that I do this from insolence. Young men are of 
a character to desire many things. Nearly d.\\ (of them) 
wish to entrust the arbitration to Socrates. They will 
be entrusted with this^^ by nearly all (of them). I am 
far from desiring all that you have. He fears the same 
things that we do (182). He says that he (219) is with- 
out fear of death. He says that the mother is afraid 
about her daughter. The agricultural population are 
doing well. I asked the general, whether he was going 
to march against the king. He says that he has been 
entrusted with this.* ^ 



y So TTfpi 7:\doYOSt t:\ziuTov, (fee. TTfjOt lUKpov. (See 243.) 



128 



OTZOjg, oh /i^. 



<§i 48. oTTCog, ov [xrj, 

285. a, b) oTzcog,^ when it refers to the future, \vdH 
either the suhj. or ihe future indic.^t and retains them 
even in connection with past time, when the optative 
might have b?en expected (69). 

286. c. d) The verb on which the sentence with ottco^ 
depends is often omitted. 

Rem. This construction is equivalent to an energetic imperative - 
— of>a or bpdrs niay be supplied. 

287. ov fuj,^ with the fut, indie, or aor, siibj., is used 
as an emphatic prohibition or denial. 

Rem. 1. This construction is probably e//i/)^icaZ: ov {6zo^ hri) 
. . . &c. 

With the second pers. sing, of Xhe future indie, it is a prohibitions 
"with the suhj.^ and other persons of the future, a denial. 

Rem. 2. Elmsley says: " ixf] cum futuro vetantis est, cum 
subjunctivo \exo negantis but Hermann shows, that the prohib- 
itive meaning depends on the person, not on the tense. Elmsley 
explained this phrase in what seems the simpler way, by join 
ing the un to the verb. Thus ov [xfj XaXfi^eig ; = will you not not-talk 
= will you not hold your tongue? = hold your tongue. But Her- 
mann (who at first agreed with Elmsley), Rost, Kiihner, &c. adopt 
the other explanation, supposing ctos tarTi, or some such phrasS) 
understood. 

287*. a) q^QOVTi^s o tz cog fztjdsv aia^QOv tt o a s ig, take 
care to do nothing disgraceful, 
b) ^vfE^ovXevsy ovt<o ttoieTv, oTzcog 6 cirog aviiayri, 
he advised them to do this, that the pro- 
visions might hold out. 



» orrw? is properly * Aolo/ and it cannot be used for ' that * except 
where for ' that' we might substitute ' that by this means,' or ' that so.' 
With the future indie, it is always strictly ' how' oro) rpdrrcj. 

t The fut. with oVw? expresses a definite intention, for the accom- ^ 
plishment of which vigorous measures are to be pursued. (R.) 

^ Dawes laid it down as a rule, that the subjunctive of the aor J.. 
act and mid. was never used with o-rrojg, ov jxn, but that the fit. i,. Lie. 

used instead. This rule is now given up by the best scholars: but 
Buttmann thinks that the subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind 
9/ predilection, and that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut 
indie, was used in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1. 



oncog- ov (x^, 129 

c) oTKog av)]o aaei, that you behave (or quit y our- 

self) like a man. 

d) OTTcog ix)j 7T0i/^at]T6, 0 TToV.d'/.ig vfiug ep.aipev^ be 

sure not to do ichat has often been detri- 
mental to you. 

e) ov fx}] hi)jja8ig ; do not chatter ]ir ay. ov fit] 

yivfiiai Tovzo, this will assuredly not hap 
pen. 

288. Vocabulary 48. 
To bethink myself, consid- ,y 

er. take care, 
Talk, chatter, Xaltco. 
Whilst he was Avalking, neialv neoiTzaTOJv. 
Nevertheless, ^ oixoog. 
To be at dinner, dtiTzieco {duTrvov, coeiia, the 

principal meal of the day 
taken towards evening)* 

Preposition InL 

Governs genit.^ dative, and accus. 

Signification: in answer to question u7z6re ? generall}^ 

with genit.^ sometimes with dat. in the sense of •o?'t': 

as l(p IriTTOv O'/Hadai '. Bcp Innop jooevead'ai. 
In answer to questions lohither ? with accus. ; as inl Xo- 

cf ov Tivd, to a certain hill ; and more general!}^, 07i, in, 

toivards tOj &c. 

They marched to Sardis, em I^dodecov. 
They sailed to Chios. inl rTig Xlov. 

Towards home^ in or/.ov. 

ini with dative denotes iii addition to. besides ; close 
by (as em ro) Tzoiauco) ; an ai?7i or condition (266), and 
the being in one's power (65). 

with genit, often marks the time by means of some- 
thing contemporary^ generally a contemporary per- 
son (65). 

To come for ) (to effect it), DMeTv Im lovrop, 
this, \ (to fetch it), " " tovto. 



130 



f4,1]' 111} OV. 



To be drawn up four deep, 
To be named after a per- 
son. 

To endure a thing for the 
sake of praise, 



orofia t/£Lv 8 71 L t ivog. 



Exercise 55. 

289. Be sure to be here yourself (287*. d). Take care 
that your children may be as good" as possible^^ (287^ a). 
Be sure to behave hkQ men worthy of the Uberty you 
possess. Take care not to say what has often hurt you. 
Take care to injure nobody. The Grecian HopUtes were 
drawn up three deep. Cyrus marched for Sardis with 
(part,) his Grecian HopUtes. He said that these things 
laere not in his power, They made (mid.) a treaty on 
these conditions. He is named after the great king. 
He said that his boy was named after Thales, the phi- 
losopher. They killed him whilst he was at dinner. 
The Athenians, though (p) they were able to take the city, 
nevertheless sailed back home. In addition to all this, the 
A.thenian generals have already sailed home. He told me 
^hat the general was not of a character^^ to act unjustly 
by the citizens. They are not sent out {on an inLder- 
standing that they are) to be slaves (227. 6). He says 
that he dwells close by the river. He is very ambitious, 
so as (211) to do every thing for praise. He said that 
the corpse was of a superhuman size,^^ He said that he 
had suffered things too great for tears.^^ Do not do 
t^is, pray. They will assuredly not obey the laws of 
the city. Leave off chattering. 

V 



<^ 49. iitj ov, 

290. a. b) After expressions of fear, solicitude, un* 
certainty, &c. iiri is used with the subjunctive or indie. 



« BiXricrroi, 



uri. ^rj ov, 131 

Obs. The ijzdic. is used when the speaker wishes to intimate hia 
conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really come to pass 
Of course the subj. becomes the opt. in connection with timepast^ 
and in a dependent proposition. (70, 71.) 

291. c) The notion of fea?^ is often omitted before 
ovy the verb being then generally in the subj, 

292. /. g) ov is also used with the injin. after 
many negative expressions : — 

1) After to hinder, deny, feel misgiving, &c. when they have a 
negative with them; if not (as in 293. e), they are used with /t^, 
where we use no negative. t 

2) After such expressions as ^zivdv clvaL, alcy^^oov or aio^vi'nv elvai, 

3) After such negative expressions as, to be unable, impassible, 
no^ right, &c. 

0 nil ov is also sometimes used with the participle d and wath 
d' re and infin., after negative expressions. 

a) dedor/.u hj] -^dico, I fear that /shall die. 
dtdor/,u fi}] ov dccrco, I fear that / shall not 

die. 

b) q:o^ovftai luj ev Qija o a e v, I fear we shall find. 
cfoSovfiai 7] c(ucfOT8Q03v 7] u a Q T Ti 'A u fx E I fear 

that we have missed (lost) both. 

c) alia 1X7] ov'A 7] dida-ATov, but perhaps it is a 

thing that cannot be taught, 

d) el '^err/aof-ied-a Ini ^aailalj riiixTZodoor fX7] 

0 vy l navra ia deirorara na&ovTag anoxta- 
THv ; but if ice shall fall into the poicer 
of the king, ichat ivill prevent us from 
being putt to death, after suffering all 
that is most terrible 7 

e) ancv^colvaai 7ovg "^Ellrivag firj ll&uv, to pre- 

vent the Greeks from coming, tjqvovv- 
TO fit] neriTo^yJvai, they (denied that they 
had fallen) said that they did not fall, 
aniGTovvTeg aviov fxj] 7]^8lv, not believing 
that he would come. 



+ But the ij.r\ is not always expressed after verbs of hindering, pre* 

Vtntingy &C. cyfiTfjd as -r]capy &C. 

* Thus ovac■^yr]TOS yap av j eirjv roiavSs ur] ov KaroLKTclpcov Upav (Sopll 

d.nt. 96.) 



132 



IXiq. fA7] OV. 



f) ah yuQ vn^c^ov tTjrjjaeir,^ cog ovy oaiop aoi o, 

fXT] OV ^oridbiv drAcnodvrri, for you prom- 
ised to investigate it (with us), as hold- 
ing it im/pious in you not to come to 
the assistance of justice. 

g ) ovT^ [ii] fAEfATrjoO^cu dvvafAai aviov, ovrs ftsfivrifAS- 

vog iirj OV'/. tnaivtlv, I can neither not re* 
Qnemher him^ nor remembering not 
praise him. 



293\ Vocabulary 49. 
Capable of being taught, 

that can be taught, 
Science, 

Know, know how. 

To fall into a person's 

power or hands. 
To prevent a person, 



Right, lawful (as deter- 
mined hy divine or nat- 
ural laws. 

Fall, 

Hinder, prevent; 
To deny, 
Fear, 
Suspect, 



or 
in 



after 
ques- 



dida'Azog, rj, 6v^ 

iniGTiifAT], Tjg, 
ETZiOzafjiai. 

ylyvbod ai ini Tin, 

£{X7T6d(x)v eirat ixiq, 
negatives or 
tions implying a nega- 
tive, iirj OV. ixTTodcov is, 
out of the way of 

oGiog : ^ dUaiogy a, or, (of 
what is permitted by 
human law. 

xooAi;oa, an 07.03X1(0. 

aQvtofiai. 

dtidco,'^ 

vTioTTzavco {accus, of person). 



Preposition lisrd. 
Governs genit., dative, and accus. 



« 282, note c. 

' IrriarriijLai, iniaTriaoixai-, r]~LaTr]9r]v. Imp. r]rrLcrdi.ir)v. 2 sing. pres. ini* 
ere 'U. 

if But as opposed to tcpo?, Saiog relates to man, i. e. to natural laws: 
hence Upa Kal 6aiay * divine and human things 
^ iriTTTCo, TTCaovfiat, iriizTOdKa. ETTsaov. 

• JftJw, Seiaronaij 6iooiKa and 6i6Xa (both with meaning of pres.) Aor 



WITH RELATIVES. 6oC, 



13d 



Signification : with acciis.^ after. 

" with genit.^ with. 
" " witli 5a^.(only in the ^OQX%).among ^ inter. 

Exercise 56. 

294. I fear his coming to some harm {lest he should 
suffer somethiyig). I feared the boy would come^lo 
some harm. I fear vre shall find, that [p) these things 
are not so. I fear about my boy lest he should come to 
some harm. The father, though he feared about his 
boy, nevertheless went away. I cannot either go or 
stay (110). I knew that they would prevent^* the king 
from coming (293. e) into the country. I fear that we 
have treated them ill. I fear that the rascal will not 
die. It is disgraceful not to defend the laws of our 
country. Nothing prevents this from being (293. e) 
true. What prevents us from dying at once ? It is a 
disgrace not to be without fear of death. It is a terrible 
thing, not to bear what comes from the gods. It is not 
right, not to choose to fight for one's country. It is not 
right not to die for one's country, if it be necessary. I am 
ashamed not to appear to have conferred great benefits 
upon my country. I fear this will happen. After this, 
what prevents us from dying? They sent out 7nen to 
prevent themt from coming into the country. 



- — - — V 

. ^ 50. fii] with Relatives J the Infinitive, &c. 

295. a. c) ixrj is used in relative sentences and v^\i\\ 
participles, adjectives. &c., whenever the negative does 
not directly and simply deny an assertion with respect 
to some particular mentioned person or thing. 

Hence relative sentences, participles, and adjectives take, ^r, 
* See 238*, the third example. 



134 



WfTH RELATIVES, (ScC. 



whenever they might be resolved into a sentence with 'i/",' or de« 
scribe oniy a supposed case: not particular individuals, but individ- 
uals of a class. 'ii 

296. d) The infinitive generally takes ^m//, except 
where the opinions or assertions of a^ioMer person are 
stated (in sermoiie obliquo). See 110. 

297. 6) With waxe^ the infinitive takes the in- 
dilative ov. 

" 298. a) Tig ds dovvcu dvvdTai'heQop, a [xi] avrog '^X^i; 

hilt loho can give to another what he has 
not got himself 7 

b) aaqjcHltidv ooi TTagt^ovTai, ojg ts as fj,7]dt^a 

XvTTsTv, they will afford yon security^ so 
that 710 man shall annoy yo^i, 
TTQayixara 7zaQerj(ov, cogte ovksti tdvvaTO 
TO oTQaTEVfia 7TOQ£V8Gdaf, they harassed 
them, so that the army could not ad- 
vance further [any longer). 

c) ovdelg . . . oong ^t] TzaQtazaij ?io one who shall 

not be present (or, who is not present),''^ 
6 fii] TiLOTEvcov^ he who does not believe, 
TOL y.ald, dishonorable thiiigs, 

d) TO iiri TijjLCiv ytQoviag dvooiov iaTi, it is wrong 

(an unholy thing) not to horiour old men, 

e) fXT] ytvoiTo^^ may it not be so ! [at] idoig tovto, 

may you never see this ! 

^ The thing to be considered, with respect to a relative or parti- 
cipial clause, is, whether it introduces some new particular concerning 
the object spoken of, or forms one complex notion with it. In this v/ay 
it merely restricts the general notion to a particular sense ; the thing 
spoken of being, not the substantive itself^ but the substantive so limited. 

^ Or w?, which is used (though less frequently) in the same way. 
In connection with future time, the Greeks and Romans marked 
the futurity of the condition or connected notion. We generally do 
not. Thus in the example we should say, * a man who is not present,' 
taking that as a general notion, without referring it to the time of the 
other verb. The future must be used when it is necessary to mark this 
out ; but to use it always, as some writers do, who plume themselves 
upon their accuracy, is against the idiom of our language ; of which 
any one may convince himself by examining a few consecutive paged 
»t the English Bible. i 

° Translated by ' God forbid I ' ill the English Bible. 



/i?/ V\^ITH RELATIVES, 



135 



299. Vocabulary 50. 

One who has slain a nrian 
with his own hand, the 
actual murderer, 

Wrong, wicked, impious, 

Security, safety from dan- 
ger, 

Safe, 

To be in safety, to be safe, 

Voluntarily, 

Lazy, idle, 



avTO'/BiQ. Qog, 6 et tj (one ter« 
min.) 

dfOGiog, og, or, (See 293*.) 
uacfdleia, ag, fj. 

aocf.ah'ig, r^g, eg. ^ 

iv rqj d6q:a),el elrai. 

idtlovry]g,° ou, o. 

doyog^ 6g, 6v (from cJ, bqyov) 



Preposition nana. 

Governs genit.^ dative^ and accus. 

Signification: with geriit. from^ after such verbs as to 
receive, learn^hring^ come ; and Vv4th the a^e7zz^ after 
the passive verb. 

With the accus., to. and (in ansvrer to lohere 7) at. Ttagd 
Avith the acc. has also the meaning of the Latin prcB- 
ter ; besides, beyond, against. 

With the dative^ beside^ along side of^ by, among &c. 
as 'iaTYj nuQCi rqj ^aailsi, "he stood in the king's pres- 
ence;'' TTuo ifioi, "in niy opinion" [meojudicio.) 



Besides his br?ad, 
Beyond^ more than the 
others. 

Against the laws of the 
gods. 

Contrary to or beyond 
what was expected, 



naqa lov ccqtov. 
naqa rovg dV.ovg. 

TTaok Tovg tc^v d^eoSp d^eafiovg, 

Tcaqa doSav. 



Phras 



ES. 



I had a narrow escape from nuQa fxiy,oov p,{>ov dno- 

death, {)avuv. 
[ had a narrow escape, naq hi ly o v ditffvyov. 



Properly, as a volunteer. 



136 



SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, (ScC. 



Exercise 57. 

300. He who (p) does not love his father, is imyjicus. 
I fear it may be impious not to honour old men. No one 
who is not present (298. c), shall receive money. I en- 
treat you not to stay. The sons of the Persians of the 
present day^^ pursue what is dishonorable. He who 
(p)does not trust God, Aa^ hecoine miserable, ?^7^- 
known to himself Not to love one's own children is 
wicked. It is not possible for me to give you what I do 
not possess myself. He is-too wise^° not to know that. 
Not to do good to your friends, when {p)YO\\ can, is 
wicked. Pursue those things which are not [p) against 
the laws of the gods. He said that, if there was any oc- 
casion, he would labour^'' more than the rest. Know 
that I will incur''^ this danger with you {pi.) Besides 
his bread he has wine. I am conscious''^ of having had 
a narrow escape from death. He was very lazy, so as 
to midergo no labour voluntarily. He was very lazy, 
so that he underwent no labour, at least willingly}^ 
I had a narrow escape from those who were pursuing 
me. These things happened contrary to what was ex- 
pected. If we conquer the barbarians one more 
battle, we shall be in safety. I have received this wine 
from the faithful slave. They denied that they were 
(293. e) the actual murderers. I suspect p that this \i 
impious. He went away, because \p) he suspected 
that it was impious to remain. Shall we say this (99) 
or not ? 

V 



§ 51. Some Adverbs of Time, (^*c. 

301. a) Some adverbs govern a noun in the same 
case as the adjectives from which they are derived. 

P vTzoTTTsvo) IS followcd by acc. and infn.f or (when it implies, feat\ 
nfj. viroirrevaas iifj ri irpds rfjs rroXccog vnatriov eir], &c. (Xen. An 

ji. 1,53) 



bOME ADVERBS OF TIME, cSjC. 



302. 1) Hence comparatives and superlatives take 
the genitive. 2) Some particles are sometimes simply 
adverbs, and someiimes p?^ epos it io7is governing a case : 
e. g» aua ofAOv, together : — (/'^«, (or b^iov) TOi<g ulloi^. 

3i»3. 6) cob', as a preposition (= ttqo^)^ is only joined to 
versons. 

3C4. Some adverbs, especially relative ones, refer to 
verbs and ichole clauses^ and thus connect propositions 
This is the origin of conjunctions. 

305. d) ayqi or {i^i^i^ eojg and eoze, both in the sense 
of ^until^^ and in that of ' as long as,^ govern the subj. 
or opt. when there is diiij luicertainty ; Xhe indie, when 
not. 

306. 1) Of course the opt, will appear without at 
in oratione obliqiia, even where there is no uncertainty. 
2) Hence, when a thing is spoken of as an object or 
purpose contemplated^ the snbj, with dp'' will be used 
in connection with pres. or future time ; the optativej^ in 
connection with past time and the oratio obliqua. 

307. e) TZQiv, as being a comparative, takes // (wliich 
however is often omitted), and generally the infinitive ^ 
but the subj. with liv, if the event is future. 

Hence the subj. with av will be used after the imperative and fu- 
ture with negatives : i. e. when before = till. 

308. a) a^Lcog 7J(a,cov TzoleiztjaofAev, we loill conduct 

the war in a 7nanner worthy of ourselves, 
b^ uarf/.^ev co g i ^ue, he came in to me. 



^ fie'ypig ov is often found : So 'icog ov, &c. 

With noiv and //i/tVa, and (in poetry) w^ith i^^xP'-* ^XP^* 
subj. is sometimes found without av. (K.) 

" And according to Hermann (against Elmsley) vjith av. " Ubi in 
recta oratione -olv av et similes particulae conjunctivum requirunt, in 
oiatione obliqua manet av, sed conjunctivo substitaitur optativus ut pro- 
prius orationis obliquss modus." (Praef ad Track, p 8.) — Hartung says: 
" When the optative thus takes (in oblique narration) the place of the 
subjunctive (in direct), the particle ay may, whenever one pleases, be 
left at his old post." (Partikellehre, ii. 304.) — Poppo, however, rejects 
cv from Xen. An. vii. 7, 35. eS^ovro ^r] dTreXOeXv -npiv av d~aydyoL rd a-rpd- 
nvixa (which in direct narration would be, (jlt] diriXOris rrplu av drraydyrjt 
* . . ), a passage quoted by Hartung. 



, 38 SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &;C. 

c) naQiaoixai bnore xElevaeig, I will be tvith yon 

lolienever you bid me. 

d) 7T8()f[Aeroj 8 cog (Iv (or u8yQig av) iXd-ri, I will 

ivail till he co?nes (venerit). 
TToujaov TovTO 8 03 g 811 8^8 0 r ij do this whilst 

you still may. 
ear 8 {(^h) ccl OTZovdal r^aav, ovttozs Inavo^riv 

imag oikt8{qo3v, as long as the treaty lasted, 

I never ceased to think uiJon ourselves 

with fity. 

0V710T8 Xijyovciv 86 z uv (1 Q CO G I V uvT^v, they 
?iever leave o^till they rule over them. 

e) ttqIv 7] i)M8iv fas (or ttqIv ild^8iv iixi^ before I 

came, nqh av 'ildoo, till I come (=till I 
shall have come ; venero). 
309. Vocabulary 51. 
Near, 

Near the city. 
Apart, 

Apart from, or without the 
rest, 

Immediately, directly, 
Directly or straight to the 
city. 

Immediately on his arrival, 
From our very birth, as 

soon as we are born, 
Most of all. 
Except a very few. 
Except if, 

Out of, without the city. 

Exercise 58. 

210. Do not go away till I come. I will not cease 

* Also irfiv rj^Oov eyco. The preceding clause has often -poabcv in it. 
which makes the -oiv appear superfluous. 

" Bvdvs and evdb are no more different words than /^£Xf9f? and /u^xpt; 
but the Attics generally used evQvg of tiiney evOv of place. It is only acci 
ientaily, that evdis is identical in form with the masc. adjective. 



iyj'vg. 

iyyvg Tfjg n6l8oog. 
XooQig. 

XooQig rojv alXoov (so di^a 

7iv6g). 
evd^vg. 

8vUv TTjg noXeoog. 

8vdvg Ti^OOV. 

8V\jtvg y8v6[isroi. 

uuhara ndfraiy. 
7t}.\v ndvv oUycov, 

7TXt]V 81. 

8^00 trig TToXsoog. 



ON INTERROG-Ax-iVE SENTENCES. 



139 



fighting till I have conquered you. It is not possible foi 
you to conquer your enemies out of the cit}^, till you 
have chastised those in the city itself. He went a\va,y 
before I came. I was banished m^^self before you re- 
turned-from-banishment. "Whilst you are still at leisure 
speak. We were afraid, till {ut'xQig) the Greeks sailed 
away. They did not cease till {before) they sent for the 
boy's father. We used to wait about ^ till the gates 
were opened. I wih not go away till {before) I have 
conquered 3'Ou. He said, that he would come to us. 
whilst he still might. Do not cease, till you have mas- 
tered your temper. Whilst you remain, combat the boy's 
disorder. He said that he feared the gods most, when- 
ever he was most prosperous {ivas doing best). The 
general \vent in to the king. And they {of persons be- 
fore mentioned^ 3S) obeyed, except if any man stole 
any tlMng. He said that he was nearly related^^ to him. 
Theymarch straight to the city. Immediatel}^ on his 
arriva»ie told me that we ought to set about^^ the task. 
From c%r very birth wo v.^ant many things. He died as 
soon as he was born. 

V 



§ 52. On Interrogative Sentences, 

311. Besides the interrogative adverbs and pronouns, 
';he following particles are used in questions. 

312. aoa is mostly used in questions that imply somo 
thing of uncertainty . doubt^ or surprise. 

313. The answer ' Yes'' is expected by. — 

ao oh ; i] ydo ; oh ; ovy.ovr ; alio n ?// 

314. The answer ' No' is expected by, — 

aoa ////■; ^ nov {nuni fortel) ixiq or ia(^v • ^ 

w n :)v=ij.r] ovv : but the etymology being forgotten, ovu is sometimes 
us*»<l with it. Also fiojv ; and //wy ov ; the latter requiring an assent- 
•n>. answer {■=nonne?). 



140 



ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



Obs. ov expects yes; ixn, no. — ov is often followed by \it.vToii alM 
by cf], 6fi TTov^ with which it has an ironical force ^ I imagine, forsooth^ 

AA.SO OVTl TTOV. 

315. h. i) eItu, sTTEiTa {then — a7id yet — and neverthe- 
less) express astonishment and displeasvre^ implying 
that what they suppose has been done, is inconsistent 
with something before mentioned. 

316. k) From the frequent use of alio n it came to 
be used as a simple interogative particle, and the ^ 
was often dropt.^ It is then better to write it as one 
word, alloTi (K.) 

317. TLTzaOcov ; (having suffered ivhat ? = ) what pos- 

sesses you to . . . &c. ? 
t/ fxax^cov ; (having learnt what? =iDhat in- 
duces yon to . . . &c. 'f 

These phrases are used in indignant, reproachful questions : the 
former obviously relates to the feelings ; the latter to the under 
standing, and consequently to more deliberate offences. 

318. a) ciQ EVTviH^ ; are you prosperous 7 
aQ ov-A tartv aa&sv)]g ; is not he ill 7 ) PYes 1 

he is ill, isnH he 
aqa [.trj iany aad^Evr^g ; is he ill 7 

he is not ill, is he 7 

c) rj TTOV tezoliirjxag ravza ; yon have not surely 

dared to do this 7 [No.] 

d) 7] yccQ, idv ri Iqcotcc oe Zod'AQarrig, artoAQiveX j if 

Socrates puts any question to you. you 
will answer him, loill you not 7 [Yes.] 

e) ovri TTOV iyoo dyQoixi^ofJiai ; surely I am not 

behaving rudely am 17 [No.] 

f) f^(^v 71 as ddtxei ; ^ he has not injured you in 

any respect has he ? [No.] 

g) f^^ Ti rscoTEQov^ dyytlleig ; yon bring no bad 

news I hope, do you 7 [No.] 

* Stallbaum thinks it was dropt in animated, impassioned ques- 
lions, and retained in those of a more sedate and sober character. 

y The present of this word is used for the perfect, for a man con^ 
tinues to wrong us till he has made us reparation. (Heindorf, Protag, 
463.) 

* vecoTEpov for I'tov {a new thing ; news), and that per euphemismum 
fcr KaK6v. (Heind. Prat. 461.) 



[No. 



ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



141 



h) €t z ecjiyag Ulovrog Sv ; and did you then 
hold your tongue, you Plutiis ? 

l) tTTSiz oh 7, oisi ■d'eovg ur&ooj77coy ri qgovrl^eiv ; 
do you then really not think that the 
gods regard mankind ? 

k) alio 11 1] neoi nuiGTOV TTOtr^.onwg (hg ^bLTiaiGi 
01 recoTEooi taoi Tai. ; do not you look upon 
it as a thing of extreme importance^ 
that the rising generation should turn 
out as IV ell as possible ? 
alloTi ovp or/6 q:i).oy.Eod€ig cfiXovat to y.EQdog . 
tvhat ! do not the covetous love srain ? 

319. Vocabulary 52. 

To strike, tvtttco. 

Free, ilev&eQog, a, ov. 

Weak, ill, dadev/jg, 7/?, 4^ («, a&trog, 

strength). 

Weakness, infirmity, a , ^ , 

complaint, ' ' ^ 

Pond of gain, cfiloy.Eodrgy r^g, Eg. 

Preposition TiQog, 

Governs genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification: to, close by ; in Siuswer to whither ? ngog 

generally takes the accus. : in answer to ivhere 1 the 

dative. 

With acc, noog also means towards, against^ in refer- 
ence to, loith a view to, in comparison of, 

With^e72?7. TToog means from, by (after to hear^ to be 
praised or blamed by, and frequently after the pas- 
sive verb). 

It is also, used vAih genit. of situation and in adjura* 
tions. 

I am Avholly wrapt up in ^ , , , 

^l^j^ ^ ^ TTQagrovTop olog EifAi, 

To pay close attention to y ^ , 'a 
onVs affairs, ^ ""^'f '''^ ^Qayixaai riyna&a^ 

In addition to this, nqog Tovroig, 



142 



ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



To fight against a person, 
To calculate with one- 
self, 

To be dishonoured by, 

On the father's side, 

1) To be consistent with, 
like, characteristic of ; 2) 
to be on his side : 3) to 
make for hiin, to be for 
his interest ; to be a good 
thing for him. 



TTQog Tiva, 

Xoyll^eaOai TTQog savtov (so 
with oy.ETTTaadai, 6y.07Z£iv, 
to consider). 

acifA,d^eo{)at nqog rivog 

fTQog naiQog, 



dvai TTQog rivog. 



Exercise 59. 

320. Are not these things for our interest rather than 
for thatof our enemies (318.6)? Is not he wholly wrapt 
up in these things ? You do not surely wish to have 
wine in addition to your bread (318. c)? lAowoi surely 
act insolently do I (318. e)? Youarenot come to bring us 
(p) any bad news, I hope (areyou)! [No.] AndareyoU; 
then, not without fear of death, though (p) a pious man 
(318. A)? And do you, ^A^-^z, not think that you shall 
be punished for what you have done (p. pass.) against 
the laws of the gods ? What possesses you to strike* 
a free man? What induces you not to choose to stay 
with us any longer? What possesses you, tlmt you 
will not cease to behave-insolently''^ towards your 
friends ? These things are not more for the interest of 
our enemies than of us, are they? [No.] Have you 
been in any respect dishonoured by Xenoclides? Do 
you not think it a most important thing, that your child- 
ren should be brought up as well as possible (318. k)'} 
It is not like a pious man to fear death excessively. 
The other party are more on Cyrus's side. Know that 
these things are''* for the interest of Cyrus. I know that 
he is on the side of the Athenians. De we not both see 
iftnd hear/rom o?^r very birth ^ 

» Translate as if it were, * having suffered what do you strike ?* &c. 



^DIRECT SINGLE QUESTIONS. 



143 



^ 53. Indirect single Questions. " 

321. a) The proper forms for indirect questions are 
those pifinouns and adverbs which are formed from the 
direct interrogatives by the prefixed rclcitive syUable 
6~, which gives them a connecting power. 

Thus from ttoVoj ; -oXos ; -oi ; -oOev ; -cDs ; &c. are formed huocog, 

bnoToSj b~ov, o-oOev, o~6jf, &c. 

So oarig, formed by prefixing the relative to rtc, is the proper de 
pendent interrogative. See 72, note y. 

322. But as the Greeks often pass from oblique to 
direct narration, so they often use the simple interroga- 
tives in dependent questions; and even, as in ib), inter- 
mix the two. 

323. c) Occasionalh^ though very seldom, the rela- 
tive forms themselves are used in dependent questions. 

c) When, as in this example, a pronoun or noun is the accus. 
after the first verb, and the 7ioni. before the second, it is generally 
expressed in the accus. and not in the nominative. 

324. d) When the person of whom the question is 
a^A'erZ repeats it, he uses the forms beginning with 6 — . 

325. a) ovy, oida (or ovy. f/co) ottoi Todizcouai. (See 72.6). 

ov'A olda 0 67 i g e(jTi\ I don't know ivlio he 
is. ov'A oida o tt C3 g to TTQuyfxa eirQu^ep, I 
don t knoiD how he did the thing, ano- 
y.QLvai drdoEiojg 6 tt 6 r e q a goi cf an ezai, an- 
swer boldly ichich of the tivo is your 
oj)inion. 

b) lafxEv'' 7x6 (J a rt Icyri yea 6 tt o i a. we know both 

how many they are^ and of what kind. 

c) GQug ovv Tji^idg, ecfj], oaoi eofitr : do you see, 

said he. hoio many ice are? (or hoio 
many there are of us ?) 

* Tlie accusative is generally retained in the English Bible ; " 1 
know thee, who thou art," 6^q. 

• See 71. c. 



144 



mDIRECT SINGLE QUESTIONS. 



d) ovTog,"^ 71 TTomg ; — o , r i tioim ; you there^ what 
are you doing ? — ^vhat am I doing ^ 

326. Vocabulary 53. 

Preposition vno, - ^ 
Governs genit.. dative, and accus. 

Signification: with genit., by s after verbs and 

active verbs with a passive notion. Also, to express 

a cause ; from, out of through. 
"With dat.j under, after verbs of re^^ only: sometimes. 

instead of the gen.j after passive verbs {paixrivai vno 

rivi). 

With accus., under, after verbs of rest as w^ell as verbs 

of motion. Also, about, of time. 

To die by the hands of anodavuv vno {gen). 

To learn by compulsion, vn avdyxrig. 

He did it through or from , k f\ 
^Q^^ '^^0 osovg [csogy ovg, to). 

To be mad from intoxica- 
tion. 



vno fx8&r]g f.iaiv£(jd^ai. 



At or about nightfall, vno vvxra {sub noctem). 



Exercise 60. 

327. The slave died by the hands of his master. 
Most boys learn by compulsion. I perceived {p) that 
the boy learnt by compulsion. I do not repent of hav- 
ing learnt''* these things by compulsion. He said that 
the shamxcless flatterer was mad from intoxication. 
The few are wounded by the many. I will go away on 
condition that {269. e) you will yourselves set out at 
nightfall. Do you see, said he, how many men are 
wounded by a few? I don't know how the eagle had 
his eye knocked out.*^ I shall praise (all) whom I see 
(94. 1) marching in good order. How much would your 
possessions fetch, if they were sold? He says that he 



o^roj, avrri'x are used (instead of mc.) in exclamations ; you there I 



DOUBLE CiUESTIOXS. 



145 



will hold his tongue though he should have much to 
say. If the slave should die by your hands, 3'ou will be 
punished. Do 3'ou see how many there are of the ene- 
my '? He says that he has been entrusted with these 
tbiag3.*^ These things happened about the same time. 

- y 



54. Double Questions. 

32S. Direct double questions are asked by nozEoof 
(or Tzoreoa) — less commonly by aoa — r-. 

Rem. pJji/ — 1] is still less common : — r] belongs to poetry, espe- 
cially epk poetry. 

329. Indirect double questions are asked by eite— 
eize: el — ?j: TtoreQov — 

Rem. h — n belongs to ejpic poetry, though occasionally found in 
Atiio poets, urz — n-, and cl — z\re^ are also used by poets. 

330. a) noTEQOv txpovrai Kvqoi^ i) 01!; ^vill they follow 

Cyrus or not 7 
TTQiv dr^Xov ehca . . . ttozeoov t-ipovzai, Kvoco, 7] 
ov, before it was known, whether, &c. 

b) Tovzoi Tov rovv nQoaeyE, eI dly.aici ).r/co, 7; ur;, 

attend to this, whether what I speak is 
just or 7iot. 

c) ay^OTToofZEv elzb Eiy.og ovzcog E/siv, bits ui], let us 

consider whether it is likely to be so. or 
not. 

331. YoCABULAPcY 54. 

The road home, -^J oUa^E ' hhoq, 

To suffer a thing to be 

done, to allov/ it to be tteqioquco.^ 

done with impunity. 



* 0LKac£ is from the acc. of a shortei form (such as oi|, oUog) of o7x-o?. 
7 nough this form does not occur, several similar ones do ; e. g. dX<i, 

KpOKn, for Ol'Xk^, KOOXtJU, fB.) 

' It takes the infinitive if the thing is to he prevented ; the partici- 
ple if it is to be avenged. Of course (by 73, note r) rrzouhTu will be used 
for aor.f -repioipscrOaL for fut. — The phrase brings to one's mind our ' to 

i 



146 



OBSERVATIONS ON £1, Idv, 



Boldly, 

Restore an exile, 
To pay attention to, to at- 
tend to, 
liikely, natural. 



'O-aQQc^v (participle). 

TOP Tovv TTQoas'^eiv, or Tsqoei^ 
XSiv only, with dat. 



Exercise 61. 

332. I don't know whether he is alive or dead. If 
you attend to your affairs yourselves, all will be well. 
If you attended to your affairs yourselves, all would be' 
well. If you had attended to your affairs yourselves, 
all would be well. I will not allow our land to have 
been ravaged with impunity. Are the same dogs pur- 
suing the sheep, or not? Go away boldly on condition 
of holding your tongue. 

I fear' that we shall forget our road home. I knew 
that they would not suffer^^ their country to be ravaged. 
O citizens, let us not suffer our country to be ravaged. 
They will not stand hy and see us injured. They 
made peace on condition that both (parties) should re- 
tain {have) their own. He said that Xenoclides was 
too wise*® to be deceived by his slaves. He says that 
more arms were taken than could have been expected 
from the number of the dead.^^ He says that he''^ is 
not afraid of death. The king sent persons to restore 
{the exile) Xenoclides (238*, third example). 



V 

§ 55. Observations on si, idv. 

333. a) £1 is used for on {that, after -O^av^d^ca, and 
some other verbs expressive of feelings, 

stand by and see* (a man injured) ; but it gets its meaning in a different 
way ; i, e. not from the notion of seeing and yet not acting, but from 
that of not seeing, of looking round about an object instead of at it. 
Hence it agrees more nearly with our to overlook (an offence). 

s Neut. of eUcos, part, of eoma {am like)y which has three forms o 

pGVt, totKOOg, £iJ{a)5, 0LK(x}5. (B.) 



OBSERVATIONS OX 81, idv. 147 

This arises from the Attic habit of avoiding posiiivcness in speak 
ing; which, in this case, speaks of what may be quits certain as 
or3y probable. 

334. b) 81 is (as "we have seen, 80) used for ^ whether 

it lias this meaning after verbs of seeing^ knoiving, con- 
sider ing^ askings sayings trying^ &c. 

335. lav is also used in this way Aviththe subjunctive 
when the question relates to an expected case that re- 
mains to be proved. (K.) 

336. a) ay av ay,7 (5 h ovtcojI^' a roco jxr] oiog r ^lui 

elnatv, I a7?i indignant at being so unable 
to express my meaning, 
ov?, ay an a ei ixi] dr/.r^v tdooy.Ev, he is not con- 
tented ivith not having been punished, 
a V fiasco el iLn;d8ig vuc^v Goyi^Eiai, I am as- 
tonished^ that not one amongst you is 
angry, 

b) (jy,8xpai'' ei o'Euj\r(x)v vGuog y.d).hov ty^si, con- 
sider ivhether the Grecian law is better/ 
(jy,8xpai idv rods ooi [.iallov aolayri, see 
ivhether this joleases you better, 
[.ir^ds TOVTO aoorixov 8(Jtco uof, lav as ncog ntiaco, 
nor let me leave this imsaid, \i Imay by 
any means persuade you (i. e. tliat I 
may see whether) I can, fcc. 

337. Vocabulary 55. 

Am indignant, dyavayrtco {dative; but it 

takes the accus. of a neif.t, 
pron.) 

O. Athenians, co didoeg 'A&r^vuToi. 

Please, «o/o-xco^ {dat,) 



Demonstrative pronouns and adverbs are strengthened by wliat is 
called the t demonstrritivmn, which is a long accented i answering to 
'Ce in Lat. Short vowels are thrown away before it. ovroci {this maA 
here), ov-m, tovtl. &,c. So ovtcog-i. 

* The Attics use c-ko~'2, cjKOuovuai^ for present (not rKfrrro/mj), but (tks 
f/ai^ taKeibdnT]v, and eaKenfjLai, from cKirrroy.ai, depon. middle. 
^ dgecxKOJ, dpiacDy &C. perf pass. Vtozajjn \ ^OK(yQnv. 



148 



CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 



Exercise 62. 

338. It is this very thing, O Athenians, that T anj in- 
dignant at,i that you allow half your country (58) to 
have been ravaged with impunity. This it is that I am 
indignant at. Cyrus being indignant, sets out with 
(part.) five horsemen for Sardis. He pleases more men 
than any other single person.** He says that he is of a 
mild disposition (137. a). I asked him whether the 
king was of a mild disposition or not. Do you see how 
many are suffering the same as you (182. a)? Do you 
know of what kind the laws of the Persians are (323) ? 
You there^ what do you say? — What do I say ! Al- 
though, if any man is of a mild disposition, it is he.^^ 
I wonder that you are not able to go in without being 
observedJ^ He says that he is not of a character to do 
any thing whatever for the sake of gain4f283). 



<§) 56. Condensed Questions, 

339. a, h. c) By attaching the interrogative to a par- 
ticiple^ or using it in an oblique case, the Greeks employ 
a single sentence in questions where we must use two. 

Rem. Thus in translating from English into Greek, a relative 
clause attached to an interrogative one will be got rid of. 

340. a) ti av noiov vr eg avald^oisv ttjv ocQxalav aQsri^v: 

lohat must they do to recover their an- 
cient virtue^ (or, by what conduct can 
they, &c.?) 

b) narapiFfxd&rj'Aag ovv rovg ri noiovvtag ro 
ovofjia TovTo anoxalovaiv ; (have you learnt 
= ) do you know^ then, what those persons 
do, to whom men apply this name ? 



> I am indignant at this thing itself. 



CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 



149 



c) tivaq r ovaS oqm ^8vovg ; who are '<thes0 

strangers whom / behold 7 

341. YOCABULARY 56. 

With what object in view, ri §ovl6pi8vog; 



342. One swallow does not make a spring. He tolo 
me that one swallow did not make a spring. I askecf 
6y what conduct I should please the gods. The eagk 
is having its eyes burnt out.^^ He says that the eagle 
has had its eyes burnt out. V/ith what vieio did the 
other party march into the country of the Scythians ihe 
same spring ? The peacock lays only once a year. He 
(p) who commits no injury/ requires no law. By 
Apo'lo,! will be with you, if I am wanted. By Minerva, 
I will free the boy from his disorder. Who is this phy 
sician that you are bringing (340. c) ? Will you not go 
away at once ? — No, by Jupiter, not I {eycoys). Even if 

^ The art. is generally used except in ^7/ or [xa At'a. 

* 'ATTdAAwv and HoasiSow have acc. 'A-oXXw, Iloo-ciow, voc, "AttoXaw, 



^ In prose iap is nom. in use ; but the gen, and dat. are of the con- 
tracted form, ripog, 5pt. 

' Who injures not at all. 



By Jupiter, 
No, by Jupiter, 
Apollo, 
Neptune, 
Minerva, 
Swallow, 
Nightingale, 
Spring, 
Once, 

Bring, lead, 
To burn out, 
Peacock, 



Tr] or vrj 70V ^ A [a. 

^^TToV.ooVf'^ covog, 0, 
IIoasid(^v, ^vog, 6. 
''Ad:7]fa, ug, tj. 

a?/5coV,p orog {ovg)y rj, 
eao,"^ eaQog, to, 

ay CO, 
iy.'/aico. 
racogj oa, 6. 



Exercise 63. 




150 



VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 



you should be unseen by others, you will at least be con 
scious"^ yourself of having acted unjustly. What do those 
sons do with whom all men, 50 lo speak, '^'^ are angry 
(340. b)7 He envies every body.^^ By Neptune, there 
Is nobody he does not plot against (277). Envy nobody. 
The nightingale sings most beautifully. 

V 



57. Various Constructions, 

343. a) 1] j.o'iv is a solemn form of asseveration. 

344. b) The prepos, avv is omitted before avroj, avz^y 
&c. which then = together with, ivith. 

345. c) afAcprzsQov is used adverbially/ {or elliptically) 
by the poets both; as well — (75, &c. So a^jK^oxEQa \s 
used in reference to two words, without being made to 
conform to them ill case. - - 

346. d) When x«/ refers to allog, it has the force of 
especially, in particular, 

347. e) sQxecy^ca, Itvai, with part, fut., is to be going 
to, or on the point of, 

34S./. g) Sometimes ?;^co makes an emphatic circum- 
locution with the past particip. : and with some verbs 
(e. g. the 2nd pers. oiXijouv, naiL^eiv, qjlvuQsTv) it is used to 
make a good-humioured observation. 

349. h) rp/()oo2^ appears redundant in some expressions, 
but denotes a vehemence of purpose not altogether free 
from blame. 

Hence it answers to our to go and do a (foolish, impetuous) thing ; 
to take a thing and Jling it aicay^ &c. 

350. a) 7] jiijv sTzaO^ov tovto, I protest that I suffered 

this, ofivvfu ^ Tj fir]v dcoaeiv, I swear that I 
will assuredly give (or, solemnly swear 
that I will give). 



* ouvvjn^ h[jiOvixai, djxwixoKa. ojixocra. Pcrf. pass. Ofxc^ixocfxai, but the OtheX 

eeraons and aor. 1 . pass, more commonly without the o-. 



VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 



151 



6) kn^loyzo at vrieg avroTg avdodaiv, the ships 
were lost together with their crews, 

c) di{xq)8QGV7sg rj cocpia v xdU.si i] a^icp orsga, dis^ 

anguished either for wisdom or beauty, 
or both. 

d) T d 1 8 (ill a evdaiiAOvel Hal Tzaidag eysi hut?]^ 

Hoovg avzcp, he is happy both in other re- 
spects and especially in having obedient 
children, 

e) oTtsQ 7JCC t sQoov, what I was going to say, 

f) ndlai av iid.aag b](^co, I have long been 

wondering, 

g) TtaR^eig'^ fi^coi^, yon are joking. 

h) v7Tt^a),8v iavzcv cpsQ oov Orj^aioig, he went and 

flung himself i?tto the hands of the The- 
bans. 

351. YOCABULARY 57. 

To swear, oiAvvpa {acc. of the god or 

thing sworn by). 
Just as he was riTzeQ or ^(J778q 8ix8v, 

Exercise 64. 

352. The damsel is beautiful in person (137) in other 
respects, and especially has very beautiful eyes.^^ He 
swore that he would assuredly give them three talents 
if he had them. I swear that I will assuredly do this. 
1 svv^ear by all the gods that I will assuredly confer a 
great benefit upon the state. Those with the king, with 
(p) their heads uncovered, charged the ranks of the 
Greeks. He told me that the ships were lost, together 
with their crews. He told me that, butfor^^ the gener- 
al the ships would have been lost, together with their 
crevvTs. Are you not trying (me),^ whether I am mad 



* Imperf. of ibo. 

" rrat^co, nai^ouai^ 'OVjJiaL, TriTvaicriiai. eTTaicra. Later writers have ETrai^Of 
Kiiraiyixai. (B.) 

^ -nsifaadai takes gen., seldom acc. (Thue. i. 71.) 



152 



VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS, 



325. c)? You are not trying (me) whether I am mad, *ire 
you? Is he distinguished from other people by (his) 
wisdom, or (his) temperance, or both (350. c)? Are 5^ou 
joking, or are you mad ? Cyrus set out just as he was^ 
with five horsemen. He ivent and gave (350. h) all his 
possessions to his neighbour. I have long been wonder 
ing at the shamelessness of this flatterer (350./). 

V 



§ 58. Various Constructions continued. 

353. a) With SUaiog, a^iog, &c., the personal 0<)P 
struction is preferred to the impersonal. 

354. b) 060V is used elliptically with the infinitive. 

355. c) Some words that imply a comparison (e. g. 

(pddvsiVj diaq)8Qeiv, ivaviiogj diTzldaiog, idiog, 
vneox^EVy TtQiv) often take the construction 
with ^. 

356. e) The verb noieZv is often admitted after ovbh 
alio * ri — , alio 7i ^ — ; ri alio i] — ; &C. 

357. /) A person's quoted words, when quoted ex- 
actly as he uttered them, are introduced by on. 

Rem. Here the Greek idiom differs from our own : vse omit ' tlial^ 
when a person's words are quoted exactly, and insert it when not. 

357*. g) After r/ ov^ — ; (in questions) the aor. ap- 
pears to be used for the present. 

358. a) hiy.ai6g elfxi tovto nQaxreiv {=8rAai6v ioitv 



Does be differ from . . . ?) 
* When the aWo is spelt with an apostrophus in this phrase, it mostly 
drops its accent, and thus looks like the abbreviated aAAd, but. The ac- 
cent was dropt, because in some very similar phrases the dAA* is dAAa : 
and in some others it is difficult to say whether it stands for aAAo or dAAd. 
Wherever it certainly stands for aAAo, it should retain its accent. (See 
364, note a.) 

y TL ovu, £(pr)y ov Siriyriacxi [xoi } quin tu mihi narres ? " Haec inter- 
rogatio alacritatem quandam animi et aviditaiem sciendi exprimit.'* 
'Weiske.) 



VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 



153 



ifis TovTo TToaTzsir), it is just (or right) 
that I shnuld do this. 

b) e(jp0^a(j8 70(7ouTOv ooov IJuyriTa ai'^yvcoy.bvui to 

xp/jcfiGua, it arrived first [indeed)^ but 
only sujficiently so^ for Paches to have 
had time to read out the decree. 

c) (jjd^drEig ely.cov i] zk nTr^rk Cfsvysiv, you draw 

(your nets) before the birds fly away. 

d) ov'/, av cf d-dvoL ano\)vi]()y,(x^v,* he will cer- 

tainly die (or, be killed). 

e) 71 d)Xo ovzoL 7j iTze^ovlevGav ; what did thes^ 

people do but plot 7 

f) dneyQivaio on ^aaileiav ovy. av de^aifir^v^ hy 

answered^ '-I would not receive a king 
dorn." 

g) 71 ovx eTTOD^aafiev ; (why have not we dont 

it?=) IV hy donH we do it? Let iis du 
it directly ? 

359. Vocabulary 58. 

Give orders, order, InirdrTco. 

Would 7jro6a6/y have been ^ s>' >^ ^ * 

destroyed. tydvdvvevGEv av diacpdaqriva-^. 

To be the slave of, dovXevo^. 



Exercise 65. 

360. But for Xenoclides, the whole country would 
probably have been ravaged. But it is just that every 
man should defend the laws of his country. You do 
nothing but give orders. He answered, I should be a 
fool if {p) I Vv^ere to do this. He answered, I will give 
you a portion of the food which I have myself He 
went away before his friend arrived. It is right that 
every body should oblige such a man as you are. He 
answered, I have done more service to the state than 



■ That is, he cannot die t( o soon (for die he must). Buttmaiin gives 
ft difTercnt explanation. 

7" 



154 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



any other single "person. He answered,- 1 will come to 
you if I am wanted. You do nothing but laugh at all 
the citizens. What do you do but hold all men cheap ? 
He answe^red, I will collect as many men as I possibly 
can. He answered, I will come to you as quickly as 
possible^ to (p) combat the faithful slave's disorder. He 
answered, if any body has done much service to the 
state it is you. They arrived first, indeed, by just time 
enough to have destroyed those with the king (358. 6). 
Why don't you make me also happy ? Why don't you 
answer? He answered, if Xenoclides had not been 
present, the ships would have perished, together with 
their crews. If you do this, you will certainly be 
the slave of your tem^Qx. If he were not ambitious, 
he would not undergo every labour. 



§ 59. List of Partirles and short connecting arid 
either Phrases. 

Obs, Those mk asterisk cannot stand first in a sentence. 

361. ays di^y ^ bui tome / ' co?ne now.^ 

362. aei {Ion. and poet, aki, aisv), always, 

6 ael a^yycov^ the archon for the time being : the 
person who at any time is archon. 

363. alrj^fg (accented in this way), ironicall}^, indeed? 
)Jane ? 

?64. alXd, but. It is often used to introduce quick, ab^ 
nipt retorts, objections, exhortations, &c. alX a^v- 
f€crov, ^nay but, ifs impossible^ (or, why, it^s inir 
possible), alia ^ovlofiai, 'v/ell, I will! ^ 

alia is also our ^ but^ except^ after general 



PARTICLES -AND PHRASES. 



155 



negatives : some case of lulog generally stands in 
the preceding clause. 

a/X unless, except ; nisi. 

a/lo Ti 1] (or a/loTi) : used as an interrogative par 
tide (316). 

allcog 78 y.ai\ especially^ in p)CLrticulai\ 
Sf65. aiia.at the same time {d^sirrep. 'together ^vith. 
dat.) aua followed by yxd in the following clause ; 
as soon as (omitting the y.al^) The two assertions 
are marked out as occurring at the same time ; and 
the particles may be variously translated, according 
to the view with which the coincidence is pointed 
out: 710 sooner — than; already — when: when— 
at 07ice, (fcc. 

366. afxtlei (properly the imperat. of dudi^co, don't mind 
or be anxious about), as gc/l*. doubtless, certainly. 

367. ^ar, see 75 : for lav, see 77. 

368. ava,^ up ! (for avdaird^i, rise up !) 

369. av&' ojf, because^ for (267). 

370. ^dgci'^ («(), Qcc,' in Bpic poets;, therefore, conse- 
quently, then. 

1) It is also used where it seems to be without 
power, but indicates conformity with the na- 
ture of things or icith custom; as might 
have been expected ; ex or dine, rite. Hence 
it serves to mark a transition to an expected 
proposition. 



* d>.A' n has this meming after negatives and questions that imply a 
negative. The dy W might sometimes he supposed a>>o, used ellipticaliy ; 
but frequently this is impossible ; and it is better, therefore, to under- 
stand it always to be d>?a. (Kriiger.) — A case of a>Xoi often stands 
already in the sentence. The construction probably arose from two 
nearly equivalent forms : oicfv aWo — : r:: :: . - — " . (K.) 

^ e. g. aua dKr,K6aulv tl Kal rOLino':'.; :; . ".^^ 15 also USed 

with the part, like nerah ' u a roXr £ i - oj V di i~r-:\. 

Vv'hen prepositions are used alone as ad-ctius^ and thus become 
equivalent to verbs, they throv/ back the accent. 

The old derivation from ''AW. (to fit, trans, and intrans.) seema 
far preferable to Hartung's derivation from a common root with aprra^cj, 
repio, repente. So Ktihner. 

• Enclitic. 



156 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 

2) After lav, <fec. it has the force of indeed 
ox perchance, — d iiri aQa (nisi forte) has often 
an ironical meaning ; unless, forsoothJ 

371. are (with part.), as being (242. a). 

372. *au [backwards), again; 2) on the other hand ^ 
3) further ; and then also. 

373. *avT8, aviccQ (both Epic), and azaQ, have the same 
meaning as av. So also the poetical *av&ig, Ion, 
avTig. [avrdo and arcco begin a sentence or clause.) 

374. avtcog, thus (emphatical) : 2) ut erat ; of things in 
their original, unchanged state, or that are of com- 
mon every-day occurrence ; 3) it is attached to 
words expressing reproach, contempt, or neglect, 
e. g. childish, useless, vain, &c. Hence 4) it is used 
alone as equivalent to fidrrjVjidly, vainly, uselessly. 
It is a sister form of ovimq*^ (B). 

r. 

375. *ydQ {ys aQa), for. 

It often refers to a short sentence to be mentally 
supplied (such as, I believe it ; no wonder. 
&c.) In questions ^ it answers pretty nearly 
to our Hhen^ and implies ^z/r/^ri^e {=iohy7 
what ?) 

71 ydq ; quid enim ? or quidni enim ? = certainly , 
tj be sure, 

TToog ydq; [Alt.) is an emphatic denial =by 7io 
means, 

376. (a strengthening particle), at least,^ at all events, 
certainly. 

^ *Af)a, the interrog. particle, stands first in its sentence. " Attic 
poets, however, allow themselves to interchange the quantity, and use 
apn for consequently^ apa as the interrog. particle; but without altering 
the proper of each." (B.) 

? Hermann, on the other hand, says, that it should always be written 
avTri)^ in liompr ; and Hartung thinks Buttmann's a strange mistake, the 
derivation being from avTog, he and no other, self {so ihs-t avTO)g=thus 
and in no other way). He considers that the rough breathing is only a 
dialectic peculiarity, uvrcos JEol.,, avrwg Att. (Eustath.) 

^ Especially after tis ; irore ; ttco? ; &c. 

* For which yow is more commonly used. 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



157 



It adds strength and ennphasis to the word to 
which it is added, answering the same purpose 
that an elevation of the voice does in speak- 
ing, or italics in a printed passage. It is used 
in rejoinders and answers^ either to confirm 
or to restrict; also in exhortations to make 
them more impressive. 

sycays, I for my "part — UKorcog ye, quite naturally 
— ndvv ysj quite sOj certainly, 

ys d)]^^ certaijily, 

ys Toi^ yet at least ; at least however ; however, 
yl fitjv (certe vero ; vero), certainly however ; but 
yet ; hence it is also a strengthened dL 

A, 

377. hmi (= ^ik rovro oti), because : but later writers • 

often use it for on, that, 
i78, *ds (see fitv) has three meanings of and, but, for 

[the last in the old writers only]. 

379. a strengthening particle, properly nozv (for 
which ijdf] is used) ; it is employed in various ways 
to enliven a speech : — 

aye di], cpsQe drj^ come now ! 

71 drj; what then? 
It aiSo means truly, forsooth. After relatives it 
has the force of our ' ever.^ oarig bri, whoever it may 
be, &c. It often follows superlatives. 

380. *dri7iov (confirms a conjecture proposed. M.) : it is a 
more emphatical nov (see nov), I imagine or sup- 
pose ; doubtless. 

*3r^7zov&ev is used to hint, with a little irony, that 
the contrary is impossible. 



^ Interest hoc inter y'i Sij et ys roi, quod Jj? sententiam per yt restric- 
tam simpliciter confirmat, rot autem earn sententiam indicat oppositam 
esse prsecedentibus quodammodo. Hinc yl 6r] est sane quidem, enim- 
vero; ys tol autem certe quidem. (Herm.) 

* It is only in Homer and Pindar that 6 n stands at the beginning 
of a proposition or clause. (M.) 



158 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



^drjd^ev has also the ironical force of 5;/, forsooth. (M), 
""dljtccy like di], is used in assuring and confirming 
{surely, certainly). 



E. 

381. d, if; 2) lohether ; and 3) after some verbs of 
feeling, that. (See 333.) 

^ ely^ai, if even ^ although. 
\ 'Mti el, even if, even though. 

El ydo, O that ! — a wish ; like ud^e. 

el fu], unless. 

el ixri didj but for. 

eirig, eUi, properly, if any one ; if any thing : but ' 
it is used as equivalent to oarig, with more emphasis ; 
whoever, whatever. 

382. eha, ) afterwards, thereupon; 2) then. 

They are used in scolding, reproachful ques- 
tions (see 315), and often Vvdth verbs, to refer 
emphatically to a preceding participle."^ 

383. tvda, demonstr., here, there ; but also, and in prose 
generally, relat. where."" ivd^dds, demonstr., here; 

- hither. 

Ivravd^a {Ion. iv&avra), here, 
tv^evy hence^ thence, whence : iv^srde, hence, 
tvd^ev iiev — h&ev de {Jiinc — illinc), on the one side 
— on the other. 

Evd^ev Kai ev&ev (Jiinc illinc ; ab utraque parte)^ on 
this side and that ; on both sides. 
ivzevOev, hence, thence. 

(All these words relate also to time.) 

384. inei, after ; 2) ^mce, quoniam. 

Before interrogatives and the imjjerat., it has 
the meaning of for ; for else. 

® ov 6vvdii£voL evpcLV rag oSovg^ el r a 7:\avcojx£voL diTijjKovro. 

« But hda or evOa 6n may stand at the beginning of periods for ihU 
ihere or then. 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



159 



i7r£id}j has the same meanings, but aW is far 
oftener used in the sense of since, 
385. ejis (= fv orfit), until, as long as, 

356. en, yet, still, further, 

ov'AtTi, mi'/Azi, no more, no longer. 

357. ago' o/i condition that: i(p cozs, the same but 
generally with the infinitive. 



H, 

388. ^, or ;P in comparisons, 

389. ?/, trnly, certainly : but generally a mere interrog- 
tive particle [ — ne, but only in direct questions]. 

1] i.v;v assuredly, in asseverations, promises, (fcc. 

390. 7^df]y now, already. Also, ^icithout going any 
further!"^ 

391. i]v ==Edp (see 77). This is the form used by the 
Attic poets for idv : never ar. 

' 0. 

392. ^x^j^-p (enclit.), I should i?nagine ; surely ; iniron« 
ical, sarcastic speeches, oh {^i[v, <^i\v. It is pecu- 
liar to Ionic and Doric poets. 

1, 

393. (V«, where : 2) in order that.' 



t This derivation seems disproved by such passages as Xen. An. iv. 
5, 6: £crr£ i-l TO ca-z£ov^ usque ad. I believe it to be Is with the o\a 
connective rf. See rf. 

° Here i-J ^ (properly =£Tt rorrcj 6 — ) is equivalent to z-\ r^'r^o i^; — .. 

P It retains this meaning in questions: -6izi^ nKZL ; r, crXov ori u dy-' 
cag ; where is he come from 7 or is it plain that he is come from the 
market-place (and so the question unnecessary) ? 

^ TTJi'r ; ao iioL cjkzI i, c r] -j}Xov av a^c9j d.aL i-i- o ^ Ijv rotoilrjs. 

Xen. 

r \va {—.in which case) goes with indie, of a past tense to express 
what would have happened, if, &c. 'iv rv(p\6g. 'v' t1 x° 



160 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



K. 

394. xat, 1) and ; 2) also, even. 

— Kcu, both — and^ or and also : as well — as. 
[But these particles are often used where we 
should only use ' anc?.'] 
yioi el, Kciv d : see under el. 

xal fidXcc, ) before these words xal has a peculiar 
yM Tzdvv, ) energy. 

xal iiriv, ( immo,) ^vell! certainly ! 2) (atqui), a?id 
yet. ^ 

'AaiTTSQ, although. 

xal ravra (idque), and that too. 

xaiTOL, and certainly ; 2) a7id yet certainly; and 
yet ; 3) although. 

v.ai {also) often seems to be superfluous in faniihar 
conversation : ha xal eldco, that I may knoia, &c. 

xat is used in questions, to imply that nothing 
can be expected, &c. It may be often translated 
by at all, possibly, tl XQ^ ^Qoodoxav ; asks for in- 
formation, but TixQf] y^cil ^Qoadoxav ; ^ what can one 
possibly expect implies that nothing can possibly 
be expected. 

xai — When xai and come together in a pro- 
position, xal is also : but the two are often used 
where we should use ' and also.^ 

395. *xs, xtVy an enclitic particle, used by the Epic po- 
ets for av. 

M. 

396. jucc, not by — ; a particle of sioearing. It has a 
negative force when alone, but may have either vai 
or ov {yes or no) with it. ^ 

397. iidXiara iiiv — a bs ixri, &c. =if possible — but if 
not, &c. — mentioning what is best to be done, and 
also what is the secondbest, if that is not feasible.' 



• With numerals i words of time, &c. iiCxkiara (about) signifies tha 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



161 



398. iiallov 88, or rather. 

399. *f^tr,^ indeed— Ruswered by dt (but), or sometimes 
by alia, fASvzoi, &C. 

The answeriDg dais sometimes omicted : — 

1) When tlie opposition is clearly marked 
without it: e. g. -by natm^ally opposite 
words, such as adverbs of place and time'^ 
with an opposite meaning: hej^e — there; 
in the first place — secondly, 

2) When the opposition is suppressed: 
chiefly when personal and demonstrative 
pronouns are used with fxiv at the begin- 
ning of a proposition. Thus, lyo) fisr, 
equidem. 

400. ^fihroi, to be sure; 1) I allow ; 2) but indeed, 
however. 

401. uri, not ; 2) lest, or that not ; 3) that (after verbs 
oi fearing, &c.) In questions it expects the answer 
^7zo/ being somewhat stronger than n5)v ; {niim?) 
After some verbs (e. g. restrain, prevent, forbid, 
deny, &c.) it is used where it seems to be superflu- 
ous, from oiir using no negative particle. 

ixij oh: see § 49. 

402. pAWgeeoi^^. 

403. *iir^v, 1) truly, indeed ; 2) but indeed^ yet. 

11 IJiriv ; why not 7 

404. ^fiTB ye, (nedum) much less. 

N. 

405. vi], ' by,^ in oaths (with acc.) 

the statement made is nearly exact (according to the belief of the 
Epeaker), without pretending to h» quite so. 

* jjisu and St are much more frequently used than indeed — hut, which 
always express a strong opposition, whereas the Greek particles connect 
any different propositions or notions. Thus a section, chapter, or even 
part of a whole work, often ends with (for instance) /cat mvTa ^.tlv ovroig 
iyivzTo : when the next chapter will necessarily begin with something 
like -pi o' vcrrepala {on the following day). It is only when the context 
slearly requires it, that niv is to be rendered, it is true, indeed. 



162 



PARTICLES AND PHEASES. 



406. *vv, vvv (enclit. v), properly the same as vvv, foj 
which it sometimes stands ; 2) for ow, then^ 7iow 

407. i^vv d/j, now ; 2) with 3, past tense, just noio, 

O. 

408. 6 ^itv — 6 ds,"" the one — the other. 
01 ixiv — 01 8s\ some — others. 

6 liiev, 6 ov often stands alone in reference to a 
preceding proposition, ndwag cpilrjitov, dlX^ top 
fisv 10V ov, we must love all, and not {love) one 
man indeed, but not another. naQiqaav ov^ 6 ixlv 6 
0 ov, alia Travzeg, 

409. 0 ds (qnod vero est), after which the rovro iozi is 
omitted."^ 

410. oOovrsxa (= otov tvexa), hecause, that^ in the Tragic 
poets. 

411. olog {ttoisTv). of a kind or character (to do, &c.) 
oiog Tc, able, possible, 

oiov aixog, as is natural ; as one may (or might) 
suppose. 

412. bnore, lohen, whenever ; 2) since : as quando, 
quandoquidern are used for quoniam. 

413. onov, where (there were) ; 2) since (siquidem). 

414. cnoog^ as adv., hoiD ; 2) conjunct., in order that^ 
that. oTzojg sgegO^s, see that yoii be=a strong im 
perative. 

415. oaai rjfxb'Qai or oaTjfA^Qui, daily ; properly, a5 many 
days as there are. 

oaog follows 'Oavixaazogdind superlatives of quality, 
TileTciTa 00 a or oaa TzXeiaza, quam plurima : 'Oav^iaa- 
zov 060V, mirum quantum. 

oaov 01 (or oaovov), all hit. 

416. ore, when, gts [xtv — ozs de,"^ so?netimes — some* 
times. 



" For 6 n'ev — 6 we sometimes find ds ixiv — og Si. 
^ o 6i -navTodv Ssivorarov (hut iv-hat IS the Tiiost terrible thing oj all, is 
this). 

^ Whenever the forms rdrs, ore are used twice (sometimea onlj 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 163 

417. OTA, that (instead of Lat. acc, with mjin.)) 2) be- 
cause , for dia tovTO oti, i. e. biozi, 

oil also strengthens siiperlativeSj and is used toin« 
troduce a quotation in the very words of the speaic- 
er, where loe use no conjunction (see 358./.) 

oTi iiri, after negatives, except. 

418. oi, ?io^.-*in questions it requires the ansvv^er ^ yes? 
(i]) ov did),vafg =the non-destruction, 

ov yocQ alia is commonly used in the sense of '/or/ 
with increase of emphasis, q. d, ^for it is no other- 
ivise, but: (M.) 

ov iirj : see 287. 

ov i^rjvy yet 7iot^ bnt not ; 2) as a negative protesta- 
tion. See ^ [xriv. 

ov firiv alld (or ov ftnzoL alia), properly, ^ yet not !"' 
— but f it has generally the force olyet, however 
sometimes of rather, much more, 

ov Tzdvv, by no means, 

ov q^7]fAi, I say (that) ?iot ; deny, refuse. 

419. oi'x ort^ — dlld xai, not only — but also, 
oil oti — alt ovds, not only — but 7iot even. 
oi'X OTToog — alia >iat, not only not — hut also, 

ovx 060V and ov)^ oiov are also found for ov^ on and 
ovx ojrcog respectively. 

420. \ ovTs, firiTE, ^ Both forms are connecting- nega- 
( ovdsj lATi^B, \ tives, answering to neque ; 1) nor, 

and not ; 2) ovre, or fxr]ze repeated are neither — nor. 

The forms ovhz, ixrjds, have the further meaning of 
1) also not ; 2) not even, which is always their 
meaning in the middle of a proposition. . 

oi;^' coc, not even so. See (Sg. 

421. "^ovv, therefore, then.^ It gives to relatives {oana- 
ovv, &c.) the force of the Lat. ciinque^ [ever, soever). 

once) for ttotI — ttots, sometimes — sometim.es, they are accented rort — 
(B.) 

* V^hen [irj on. jxi-] o^cog begin the sentence, 'o-qBoay} rig may be sup- 
plied ; or they may be understood like the Latin ne dicam, and are thus 
stronger than the preceding expressions, but both in a negative sense. 

y ovp is often used to resume a speech that has been interrupted by 
a parenthesis (= J say.) 



164 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



1) ovyiovv, properly an interrogative of inference 
as ovxovv Evijdeg tovxo ; ' is not this, then^ 
foolish?^ But generally the interrogative 
force, and with it the negation vanishes, and 
ovy.ovv is to be translated simply by ^ therefore, 
and begins a clause.* 

2) ovKovp is a strengthened negafft^e ; 7iot in the 
least. — In the meaning ' therefore not^^ with 
out a question, it is better written ov>i ovv. 

422. ovnco, never yet. 

ovdmoTs, never, is used of both past and future 
time; oi'5£;too;to7£, only of pa^^ time^ (See ttco.) 

n. 

423. *ncQ (enclit.), quite : used nearly like ye, to strength- 
en a preceding word. It is frequently appended to 
relatives^ and adverbs of time, cause, and condition. 
Thus ^(jTTeQ properly means ^e:rac^^Zy as.^ 

It is derived, probably, from ntQi^ in the sense of 
' very^ 

424. n)] lihv—TU] hi (not ni] [liv — tu] ds, Hermann), part- 
ly — partly. 

425. nlriv, except : as conjunction^ or preposition with 
gen. : nli'iv el, except if. 

426. nolldmg, often, after ft, lav, fn^, has sometimes the 
meaning of {forte) perhaps, perchance, 

427. ""TTozg (enclit.), at any time. With interrogatives 
it expresses surprise : rig ttots ; who in the loorld ? 

428. ^TTov (enclit.)^ someiohere ; 2) perchafice, perhaps ; 
3) / imagine, used in conversation when any thing 
is assumed in a half-questioning way, that the speak- 
er may build something on the assent of the person 
appealed to. 

429. TTQog as '&scov, I adjure you by the gods [Iastsvco is 
generally omittted in this form of adjuration). 



« ovKovv, extra interrogaiionem, acerbam interdum habet ironiani 
'^Bremiy Dem. p. 238.) 



PARTICLES A.ND PHRASES. 



165 



430. 7TQ0 rov"^ (better ttqoxov)^ before this or that time 

7TQ0 Tomov or exeivov lov yoovov)^ 

431. *;7oo (eaclit.), ^ till 7iow, hitherto: but they are 
*7i(^inore, \ never joined to affirmative proposi- 
tions in this sense. 

ovnco, ixr^no^," never yet. not yet, tk^tzots is sel- 
dom annexep to the simple ov, uri, but to ovdt, 
ur^8s\ The form without tiod (oidtTzors, never) 
is commonly employed only generally or 
with respect to Xhe future. Both n(6 and tko- 
TTOTs may be separated from the negative par- 
ticle by other words between. 

These particles are also used with relatives, 
interrogativeSj and pai^ticiples used as equiv- 
alent to relative sentences. With these words 
there is no ?iegative expressed, but thenotion 
of a negative lies at the bottom of them all. 
rig 7TC0 ; — oaa ttc^ttots ^iTTiaa^er, (fee. 

432. Tzcoixula, ^ properly, how so ? how then 7 hence, by 
no means. 



T. 

433. ra fi8v — ra de, partly — partly (adverbially). 

434. ^7 aoa or t uq (poetical), aqa strengthened by roi, 

435. *Ts {que). See xa/. 

In the old language (as we find it in the Epic 
poets) 78 seems to impart to many pronouns 



* ev yap rat tt p d tov ovSejiLa PofjOeLo. ttoj to7s ISlsyapevaiv ovSanodsv 
iirriXesv. (Thuc. iv. 120.) 

^ It answers exactly to omr ' before this/ ' before that* 
" Quando in serie or ationis prcBter Hum tempus mem oratur, tunc de ■ 
eo quod ante illud etiam fuerit formula -rrpoTov non videtur adhiberi 
posse, nisi siraul insit relatio ad prcesens tempus ; hoc est, nisi diserte 
simul significare quis velit, 7iunc non amplius ita esse." (Buttm. ad 
ALcib. I. 14.) 

• Not to be confounded with Homer's oi'rco, ^??:7aj=oi)Trajj, [xfiTTcog, in 
no way, by no means. 

^ For Tw? iJLoXa ; (B.) Others say for ttcS ai\a — 7rc3 being a rather 
ancommon Doric form for -nodev ) 



166 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



ana particles the connecting power, which 
they afterwards retained in themselves with- 
out the particle. 
Thus we find ^dv re, dsre, ydoTs, (fee, and even 
y.ai T8. 

Especially the particle is found after all rela- 
tives, because these in the old language v/ere 
merely forms of the pro7ioiin demonstrative^ 
w^hich through this ze obtained the connect- 
ing power {and this), and thus becam.e the 
relative {vjhich). As soon, however, as these 
forms were exclusively allotted to the rela- 
tive signification, the particle ze was dropt as 
superfluous. Hence we often find in Homer 
og T£, 060V Ts, &c. for og, oaov, and the like. 
The particles coare, uts, and the expressions 
olog 78, icp CO 78 are remains of the ancient 
usage. 

436. 71] fA87^ — 77/ de, in one j)lace and another; here — 
there ; in one respect — but in another. 

437. 7/, in some respect, in any respect, at all,^ 7t 
fiijv ; lohy not 7 

438. 70 often introduces a statement opposed to what 
has been said before, and may be translated by 
{qiiiuntainen^) lohereas^ but however^ or sometimes, 
hut rather, (See Heindorf, Theset. 37.) 

70 ds, with the superlat. often stand alone, with the 
omission of 7oi;7o 6(T7/^^. rods jxiyiarov TTccvra rav- 
7a iJLovog -iiareiQydaaro, but the greatest thing is 
{this), that, &c. (See 0 di—.) 

439. *7o/ (enclit.)^ properly an old dat. for 707, meaning 
therefore, certainly. But these meanings have dis- 
appeared, and 70/ has only a strengthening force := it 

* It is often added to -drT, cj(icovy oiciv. 

^ TO d' Qv c£i, cog, &c — quum tamen non oporteat. 

* According to Hartung, roi has not a s*revgthemng but a rescnc' 
twe meaning, which, however, often comes to the same thing: e. g. IV* 
:c.va TOL C-* av, I would have killed you, and ni thing else=/ would assur- 
edly have killed you. Nagelsbach thinks it the eld dat. of the pronoun 

(tv). 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



167 



is frequently used vrith personal pronoimSj and in 
?naxi??is, -proverbs^ &c. 

*Toiyvr, therefore, then. noii\ so now. It is akc 
used when a person proceeds with an argument; 
nov:^ further, hut now. Besides this it is frequently 
used in objections., either in a continued narrative, 
or more commonly in replies : ichy or ivhy then, 
[Very seldom as the first word of a clause. P.] 

lolyuQ {ergo), therefore. 

lor/doToi and Toiyaooir, therefore, even therefore, 
and from no other cause, precisely for that reason, 

440. TOTS fiey — 7078 ds,"^ at one time — at another. 

441. rovrsy.a (Epic), on that accoiuit ; therefore. 

442. 7nv7o usy — 7ov7o ds, on the one hand — on th-''. other. 

443. 7w, therefore, 

Q. 

444. dog (relat. adv.), as {as if] so as) ; 2) of ti?72e, as^ 
ichen ; 3) with namerals. about ; 4) it strengthens 
superlatives, especially of adverbs, and some posi- 
tives. 

chg (prepos. = elg), to, vrith acc. : but only ol living 
things. 

cog (coiijunc). that; 2) in order that, with suhj,^ 
opt., or fut. indie. : 3) so that, with infin., more com- 
monly cocrrs: 4) since; 5) quippe, /or. 

(og h i ' {= chg h'8G7i, as it is possible) is used with 
superlatives : cag tyi udh(J7a, as far as it is any way 
possible. 

cog snog ein^Ty, so to say. 

cog (jvye/.6r7i (sc. /.o'/cp) 8irrth',to be short ; in a word 
^For which avyslovTi. eheiy, and 6iyu.oy7L alone 
are found.] 



^ See note on ore. 

* ^Vhen prepositions are employed instead of the compounds of ehai 
or rather when, this verb being omitted, they staiid alone as adverbs 
the accent is thrown back on the first syllable. See a*<z. 



1G8 



PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 



(with accent) = ovrcog, thus. It is common in 
the poets, especially the lonians; but in prose is 
found only in oid' cog, nal Sg, 



Table of the less obvious meanings of Prepositions t7i 
Composition. 

afiq)i, on both sides. 

avri, against, marking opposition. 

avd,^ up ; back again. 

did {dis) marks separatioji; taking apart or 
aside, 
iv, often into. 

xaidj^ doivn ; it often implies completion^ and 
hence, 2) ruin^ destruction (answering in both to 
per). 

\ierd {trans) marks transpositiofi, chaJige. 
naqd sometimes signifies (like prceter) missing 
doing amiss. naQa^alvnv, to transgress, &c. 



^ With paivsiv, &c. dvd, up, and Kara, down, mean respectively into 
the interior, and down to the coast. 

^ Hence /card is sometimes equivalent to vp in English : KaTa(pay£,i:v, 
i9 eat up. 



TABLE 

OF 

DIFFEEENCES OF IDIOM, ETC. 



English. 

1. (§ 1.) He who does. 

2. (§ 2.) Socrates. 

A woman. 



(§ 3.) Mij slave. 
Your slave, &c. 

I have ) a pain 

I am suffer- > in my 
ing from ) head. 

He rejoiced (or, was 
vexed) whc7i the citi- 
zens were rich (or, 
that the citizens 
were rich). 

My friend and my bro- 
ther's. 

(§ 4.) The wisdom of 
the geometer. 



8 



Greek. 

The (person) doing (6 
TTQartcov). 

The Socrates {often), 

A certain woman [yvv^ Tig). 

[When a particular per- 
son is meant ^ though not 
named.'] 

The my slave. 

The your slave. 

I am pained [as to) the 
head: acc. [aly&i). 



He rejoiced (or, was vexed 
at [Im) rich the citizens 

The my friend and the of 

the brother. 
( Very often) The of the 

geometer wisdom — or, 

the wisdom, the of the 

geometer. 



170 



TABLE OF 



English. 

8. The beautiful head. 

9. The son of Philip. 
Into Philip's country. 

10. The affairs of the state. 
The people in the city. 
Those with the king. 
My property, 

11. (§5.) The men o/oZrf. 
The men of old times, 

1l he m^n of those days. 
The intermediate time. 
The present life. 
The upper jaw. 

12. (§ 6.) The rhinoceros 

has a very hard hide. 
They have strong claws. 

13. The beautiful ; beauty 

(in the abstract,) 
Beautiful things. 
Whatever things are 

beautiful. 
What is beautiful. 

14. Speaking. 
Of speaking. 

By speaking, (fcc. 

15. Virtue. Gold. Eagles. 



16. To do kind offices. 
— confer benefits on. 
— ^treat well. 



Greek. 

. As in English ; or, ' the 
head the beautiful.' 

The of Philip {son^ vlog^ 
understood). 

Into the of Philip {coun- 
try^ X^Qav, understood). 

The [neut, pi,) of the state. 

The {ol) in the city. 

The (ol) with the kin^. 

} The long' ago (men) — oi 
^ ndlai. 

The then (men). 

TJie hetween time. 

The now life. 

The jaw (ji avco yvddog). 

The rhinoceros has the 
(= its) hide very hard. 

They have the (= their) 
claws strong. 

TO y,aX6v, 

The to-speak. 
Of the to-speak 
By the to-speak^ &c. 

TO laleiv : tov laleh, &c. 
The vntue. The gold. 

The eagles (when the 

class is meant ; or eagles 

generally). 

> d noiuv with acc. of personc 



differences of idiom, &c. 171 

English. Greek. 

17 To prosecute on a ^ r 

charge of murder. ^o pursue of murder. 

To be tried for murder. To fly of murder. 

• o N ,7 S The indeed — but the, 

18. 7.) Sovie-otaers. j ^< 

Bat (or and) he (or it). 6 . . . at the head of a 

clause. 

And he . . . y,ai og . . . 

19. (§ 8.) The other party, ot tzsQoi. 
There^^ of the country. The o^Ae?^ country. 

20. The 2^;Ao/e citv ; aZZthe ^ , 

^^j|-y " TTuaa 7j Tjohg, 

Every city. Tzaaa nohg, 

21. (§ 9.) With two others. Himself the third (pron. 

last). 

22. To perform this service. vTrrjoereTv rovzo (pers. for 

whom in dat.) 

To perform many ser- , , x . 
Vices. 

23. His own ) ^ The Xhmgs of himself (j a 
One's own \ ^''S^- saviov.) 

25. (§10.) TF/m^ come, y/.e (neut. pi.) of the gods, 

from the gods. ^ ^ ^ ^ 

rr<u ^ ^ r ^ T ' ^ a^^reement 

26. (§ 11.) In my time. In , , , . , ^ , 

my father's time. 'Z'^^- 

//?. my jjower. f^o/. 

27. (§ 12.) To be so. To have (themselves) so 

(ov703g ^xeiv). 

To be found, ) ^ ? ? . 

hrr^^^-rhf f^f 1 o 6^ taken ov caught 

mougnt m, > or.. (fee. -.u \ 

guilty <^ {alcovaiwiihgen,) 

28. (§ 13.) Not only— but ol-ji ozi—cflVa y.ai See note 

also. on 82. 

To confer a great bene- To benefit greatly {fxiya 

fit on. GiqiEluv). 



172 TAB 

English. 
To do a great injury to. 



29. (§ 14.) I should like to 
behold. 

I should like extremely 

to behold. 
I would rather behold 

A than B. 

30. It is not possible. 

31. On the plea ihdit I could 

then conquer 

Though I should have, 
&c. 

32. (§ 15.) When you 

done, vou will, (fcc. 

33. (§ 16.) What I please. 

34. (§ 17.) And you as 

much as any body. 
And you among the 
first. 

35. Am slow to doit (112). 

36. Conditional Pro- 

positions (79). 
(1) Iflliave any thing, 
I will give it. 



: OF 

Greek. 

To hurt greatly {ixiya ^AaV 

Obs. rk fisyiGTa to be 
used, if it is ^ great- 
est.^ not 'greai.^ 
I would gladly behold 
{fjdscog av {}sa(7aifiJ]v 

tldiaz av OeacjaliATiv, 

ijbTov av d^saaaif^riv A ^ B. 

It is not (dvx baiiv). 

As so being-likely-to-con- 

quer (cog ovzcog TTSQiyevo* ^ 

l^evog av), 

fjfcoj^ av. 

When you shall have done 
[av with subj. 90*). 

a 8oxH (uoi). (If necessary, 
a do^titv, or, a av dotrj), 

[ Having begun from you 
(100). 

Do it by leisure [axolfi). 

(1) If the consequent verb 
is in the future, the con- 
ditional verb is (gene- 
rally) in the subj, with 



^ dedaOai is ' to heJioIcL' something that may be considered a specta- 
gls. I6civ {opavf oxbecxBixi) is simply vidcre, to see. Hence I6)ini sliou d 
be used in the phrase * / shoucd like to see,* when the notion of a spe^' 
iacle is quite out of place. 

» Both verbs may be in the future indicative (the conditional verb 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, dzC, 



172 



English. 

If it has thundered, it 
has also lightened. 



2) If you should do so. 

I should\^i\^^h, 
If you were to do so, 

I should laugh. 
If you would do so^ 

you would oblige 

me. 

3) If I had any thing, I 

would give it. 
If I had had any 
thing I would hav^ 
given it. 



they would 
&c.) would 
have 



37. {That) 

fetch. 
{That he, 

be able. 
They loould 

died. ' 
I should, have died. 

38. (§20.) We should (or 

ought to) set about 
the v/ork. 



Greek. 

If the consequent verb 
in any tense of the hid 
but the future, or in thr 
imperative, put the con 
ditional verb in the indie 
with d. 

2) When both verbs have 
'should,^ ' would^' or the 
first ^loere to^ the second 

}■ ^should or ^woidd^l both 

are to be in the oj)tative ; 

the consequent veih with 
if 

3) When the consequent 
verb has • icould? but the 
conditional verb not, 
both verbs are in a past 
tense of the indicative ; 
the conditional verb with 
a, the consequent verb 
vvaih aV. 

ovvriurivai av, ) ^ 

Aor. with 6?!^ 0 {imperf. O) 
pluperf, if necessary). 

The work is to-be-set-ahout 
(verbal in jtog). 



with ci). The condition is then expressed in a more positive way, as a 
contemplated event : a construction which is often adopted when the 
condition expresses an event hoped for or feared (R.) ; as, ct n Trel- 
<T 0 V r a I M?/oot £is Yitpaas to Ssivdv n^ei. 

• As in the consequence of the fourth form of conditional proposi* 
tions. 81. J. 



174 



TABLE OF 



English. 
The work should he ] 

set-about. \ 
We 7mist set-about \ 

the work. 
The worlj; must be 

sot about. 

39. 21.) I should have ' 
died but for the dog. 

40. The all but present 

war. 

41. (^§,22.) Having had his 

government taken 

away. 
Having been entrusted 

with the arbitration. 
Having had his eyes 

knocked out. 

42. To conquer \\\min the 

battle of Marathon. 

43. To flow with a full (or 

strong stream). 
To flow xoith milk. 

44. 24.) Till late in the 
day. 

45. Wilhngly at Jeast. \ 
Willingly. ' 

46. So to say. 
To speak generally. 

47. Sensible persons. 



48. To drink some wine. 
(Not) to drink any wine. 



Greek. 



It is to-he-set-about {neut. 
of verbal in rio^) the 
work.p 



I should have died, if not 

thidugh the dog [d [zij 

did, with acc.) 
The as-much-as not {ocop 

ov) present war. 
Having been taken away 

his goveni?nent. 

Having been entrusted the 

arbitration. 
Having been knocked out 

his eyes. 
To conquer him the battle 

at (fV) Marathon. 
To flow much {nolvgadj.) 

To flow milk. 
Till far-on {tio^qm) of the 
day. 

To be willing {ho^v ehai). 

As to say a word (wg 'inog 
eiTTHv). 

The sensible of persons {oi 
qjQonuoi TMV drOQOJTTCoVj 
sometimes ; but very 
often ot cpQtvifioi onl}^). 

To drink of wine. 

(Not) to drink of wine. 



P The ' work ' is to be in the case governed by the verb froift whicb 
he verbal is derived 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 



175 



I 



English. 

49. My property, wretched 

7nan that I am! 

50. What misery ! 

51. (§ 25.) Who in the 

world . . ? 

52. To be nearly related to. 

53. 26.) You shall not 
do it iDith impunity. 

54. I would not have done 

it at all (132). 

55. (^28.) Itis the part of 

a wise man. 

56. It is not a thing that 

everybody can do. 
It is not every one that 
can do this. 

57. To be one's own mas- 

ter. 

58. 29.) More powerful 
than ever, 

59. Afflictions too great for 

tears. 

Of superhuman size. 

More than could have 
been expected from 
the small number of 
the killed. 

60. Too young to know, 



Greek. 

My (property) of (me) the 
wretched ! 

Ira iiACi Tov Kaxodaif.iovog,] 
The misery (in the gen.) 
Who ever? {z[g note;) 

To be near to a person {in 
respect) of family. 

You shall not do it rejoic- 
ing {y/iiQ03v). 

I would not have done it 
the beginning {ocQyjjv or 
t:7]v aoyjiv). 

It is of a wise man. 

It is not every man's {Tzav 

It is not every man''s to do 

this. 
savTov dvai. 

More powerful hiinself"^ 
than himself [avibg 
avTov). 

Afflictions greater than in- 
proportion-to (// y.ara) 
tears. 

Greater than accordino;-to 
man [rj xar avd-Qoanov), 

More than in-proportion- 
to the dead (// yAiia rovg 
Vc'Aoovg). 

Younger than so as to 
know (/} (aats). 



Q course ' ^^emselvta etian themselves* when more than one are 
%)oken <-f. 



176 TABL 

English. 
61. (§30.) With more haste ' 
than prudence. 
Hastilyratherthan pru- 
dently. 
More hastily than pru- 
dently. 
62 The greatest )possi' 
As great as ^ble. 

as he could, 
As many as he possi- 
bly could, 
63, If any other man can 
do it, you can. 
If ayiy man is temper- 
ate, it is you, 
64. 1 have injured you 

than any other indi- 
vidual has, 

65. (§31.) To charge a man 

with a crime 

66. (§ 35.) If it is agreea- 

ble to you. 
If you are willing. 

67. And that too . . . 

68. For the present at 

least. 

As far as they are con- 
cerned. 

69. (§ 36.) I offer myself to 

be interrogated, 

70. (§37.) It was done if Aa^ 

robbers might not 
commit depreda- 
tions, &c. 
Nothing was done be- 
cause he was not 
here. 



OF 

Greek. 



More-hastily than more 
prudently. 



(hg or on with superlat. 

As many as he could most 

{oaovg rjdvvaio TiXeiGTOvg), 
You, if any other man (et 

7tg Hal aU.og), can do it. 
You, if any other man, 

are temperate. 
I one man have injured 

you the 7?iost {Tzleiara £ig 

aviiQ OB s'^laxpa). 
To charge [ly^ahlv) a 

crime to a man. 

If it is to you wishing it 
[h (joi ^ovloixtrqi earl), 

y.al ravia. 

70 ys vvv eh at, 

TO im Tovzoig ehai, 

I offer myself to interro- 
gate. 

It was done rov ^i)] XTjaraQ 
7iay,ovQyeiv, (fee. 

Nothing was done dia rh 
ixeivov jit// Ttagsivai. 



DIFFEKE^'CEs OF iDi03ij d:c. 177 

English. Greek. 

72. He said that he vras in He said to be in a hurry 

a hurry. (pron. omitted). 

73. (§ 40.) He is evidentli/ He is evident {dl},og) being 

hurt. hurt. 

1 am conscious of ^ y • , / ' v \ ^ 

. 1 . I am conscious (airoida) to 

I am conscious that If ' i , n ° ^ 

. . 1 or dat.) 

think so. J 

74. I know ^hat I ^ 1 

— remember i ^ ' — remember ; bavin 2: done 

. . >have . . ^ . , 

—rejoice [ ^^^^^ —rejoice ■ it (par/.) 

— am aware J — am aware j 

^ ^£ [ lam ashamed having done 

lam ashamed f 1 .^^^ ; it. 

T , > havms: < . ^ i • 

I repent y doneir I repenteth to-me having 

' ^ * [ done it. 

Know that you will be Know about-to give pun- 
punished, ishment. 

I perceived that he I perceived him thinking. 
thovght, (fcc. &c. 

He wili not cease to do He will not cease doing it 
it. (part.) 

75. He knew tliat the son jj i • 

1 n -I . He knew having begotten 

he had begotten was . o ^ 

, 1 ^ a mortal son. 

mortal. 

76. 41.) I did it iincoti' \ j . -, r 

. ^ 7 i vras concealed-irom (f/.a- 

SClOUSilJ. n \ i-f- 1 • 

X -,.-1 •/ 7 , ^ T9or) mvseli. doine it 

1 did It unknown to 



myself. 



(nom.) 

I did it loithout being' I was concealed {eXci-dor) 
seen, or discovered ; doing it. 
secretly. (or) I did it heing unob- 

served [ladcor). 
77, laniYeAjirst{or before I having arrived antici- 
them). pated them {tqdrj, 01 

You cannot do it too Doing it you will not anti 
soon. cipate (ovy, up (ivaro/c). 

8* 



178 TAI 

English. 
Will you not do it di- 
rectly 7 
78. He held his tongue, as 
supposing that all 
knew. 

7'9. (§ 43.) You act strange- 
ly in giving ws^ &c. 

SO. They pronounced her 
happy, (fcc. in hav- 
ing such children. 
They have arms^ de- 
fend themselves 
with. 

81. First of all (259). 

82. (§ 44.) From some of 

the cities. 



Somewhere. 
Sometimes, 
83. I feel thankful to you 

for coming, 
85. They destroyed every 
thing of value. 

B5. (§ 45.) Such a man as 
you. 

(Of) such a man as 
you are. 

For men like us . . . 

To make astonishing 
progress. 

Surprisingly misera- 
ble. 



GreeKc 
ovTi av q^d^dvoig ttokSp ; 

He held his tongue, as(co^' 
all men knowing it {acc, 
or ge7i.) 

You do a strange thing, 
7vho give us, (fee. 

They pronounced her hap- 
py, (fee. ichat children 
she had, (258. b). 

They have arms ivith 
which they ivill defend 
themselves. 

First among the [h toT^ 

(fee.) 

From the cities there is 
which, 
which' in same case as 
'cities.'] 
There is where. 
There is when. 
I know you gratitude, /or 
ichat {avxf (xiv) yow came. 
They destroyed if there 
was anything of value 
Tl, (fee.) 

6 olog ov avrjQ. 

oiov 60V ardgogj (fee. 

Toig oioig {or oioig tieq) rnuv. 
To advance '^avfAaoroi 

OGOV. 

'&av[Aa6iOi)g cog cidXiog, 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 



179 



English. 
i6. (§ 46.) There was ' 
nobody whom he 
did not answer. 
He answered every 
body. 
87. Especially. 

x4lS fast as they could. 
8S. (§ 47.) I am able. 
It is possible. 
Are adapted for cut- 
ting. 

Am of a character 
to . . . 

89. Eighteen. 

90. Far from it. 
Am 



Is 



to be. 

91. {^AS.)BesureXohQ,,. 
Take care to do it. 

92. (§49.) I fear that I shall. 

I fear that I shall not. 

93. What prevents us 

from . . . ? 
To prevent ihemfrojii 
coming, 

94. {§ 50.) I had a narrow 

escape from death. 
I had a narrov/ esca^ ^. 

95 (§ 51.) Immediately on 
his arrival. 



Greek. 
Nobody ivhom he did not 
answer. 
\^ nobody'' under the 
government of ' an- 
swered :' oarig, icho.] 
3oth otherwise and also 

{aV.cog 78 y.cu). 
As they had speed. 
olog ti dui. 
oiov T8 i(jn. 

Are such as to cut. 

Am such as to . . . 
Twenty wanting two (283. 

. ) y^vtG{)ai{\Y\iQYi'am 
D/sLi be'='am tii- 
' ) tended to be.' 
That (o/Tcoc) you shall bo 

['^ee' understood.] 
Take care how (oVco^-) you 

shall do it. 
I fear ui] . . . (subj. or fut. 
indie.) 
ftr] ov . . . 
71 iuTTodojv fxf] ov'/^i . .; with 
iiifin. 

To prevent them iatj il-OeTv. 

I came Tiaoa iir/Mov to die. 

I escaped by a little {naQ 
oXiyov), 

Immediately having ar- 
rived {^ev&vg r^HXv). 



180 TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 



English. 

As soon as we are 

horn. 
From our very birth. 

96. (§ 52 ) What posses- 

ses yon to do this? 
What induces you to 
do this? 

97. (319.) To be wholly 

wrapt up in this? 

98. ' To be consistent 
with. 

like. 
" " character- 
istic of. 
To be on a man's 
side. 

To make for a 
man. 
be for a man's 
interest. 
" good for a 
man. 

99. By wt at conduct. 
With what view. 

im (§ 57.) He went and 
gave (when used 
contemptuously or 
indignantly).. 



0) 



{2) 



Greek. 

Immediately being born 
{evOvg yevoi^ievot). 

Having suffered what, do 
you do this? {ri 7ia&(6v ;) 

Having learnt what, do 
you do this? {ti uadoiv ;) 

TTQog TOVTCp oXog elvai. 



> Eiyai TTQog nvog* 



Doing what. 
Wishing what 

He (fiqm gave* 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



Obs. Words in small capitals are to be translated into Greek. 

<^ 1. — 1. What is the difference between the imperf. and the 
ivo?\? [The Aorist is used momentary and single B^ctions: the 
imperfect of continued and repeated ones.] 2. What Enghsh tense 
does the aor. most nearly answer to? [Our perfect indefinite 
(the perf formed by inflexion)^ 3. Is the aor. ever used for the 
P^^f' ^ [Yesj* when the connection of the past with the present 
>s obvious from the context.] 4. Where is a governed gen. often 
placed ? [Between an article and its noun.] 5. How do you 
render ol TTQcczropreg 7 [Those who do.'] 6. To what is the 
artic. with a participle equivalent? [To a personal or demon- 
strative pronoun with a relative sentence.] 

<§> 2. — 7. Do proper names ever take the artic ? [Yes.] 

8. When ? [When they are the names of persons well known.] 

9. When is a proper name generally without the art.? [When 
it is followed by a description which has the article.] 10. Is 
there an indef. art. in Greek? [No.] 11. By what pron. may 

a ' sometimes be translated ? [By Tig.] 12. When ? [When 
we might substitute ^ a cer/am' for ^ a.'] 13. Which generally 
has the art., the subject or the predicate (i. e. the iiom. before or 
the nom. after the verb) ? [The subject.] 

<§> 3. — 14. Your slave. [6 aog dovlog.] 15. Is the ar^. evei 
equivalent to a possessive pron. ? [Yes, when it is quite obviou& 
whose the thing in question is.] 16. When must the pronouna 
be used ] [Whenever there is any opposition (as, when mine la 
opposed to yours or any other person's)]. 17. When an adj. 
without the article stands before the art. of the substantive, from 
what does it distinguish that substantive? [From itself under 
other circumstances.] 18. My father and my friend's. [6 
if^og 7zarj]Q, >cccl 6 rov qjilov.] 



* And even for the pluperfect. 



182 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



^ 4.— -19. The son of Philip. [6 ^ilinnov: vlog^ soji, un* 
fie-rstood.J 20. Into Philip's country, \_8ig rr^v (PiliTZTZOv: 
IcoQCiv, country, understood,] 21. How does it happen that the 
article often stands alone? [In consequence of the omission of 
a noun or 'participle.'] 

5. — 22. What is often equivalent to an adjective? [An 
adverb with the article.] 23. The men cf old. [ot Tidlar, the 
inrig ago men.] 

<S 6. — 24. How did the Greeks express 'she hasa very beau- 
ciful head?' [She has the head very beautiful] 25. Distin- 
guish between to naXov and ra aaXd. [ro ycaXov, is: ^ihe 
beauliful^^ ^the honorable,'^ in the abstract ; beauty, tk xa/lcc, 
are: beautiful (or honorable^ things ; whatever things are beau- 
tiful; what is beautiful ; or simply, beautiful things.'] 26. How 
is the first pers. pi. of the subj. often used? [In exhortations.] 
27. Whatis'?2o/' in an exhortation of this kind? [|U?J.] 28. How 
may the infin. become (virtually) a declinable substantive? [By 
being used with the article.] 29. Do abstract no2tns and names 
of materials generally take the art. ? [Yes.] 30. When does a 
noun (whether or pliir.) always take the art.'l [When a 
whole class, or any individual of that class, is meant.] 

<§> 7. — 31. 6 — 6 ds: 01 fitf — at 88, [{this — that; the 
one — the other) (these — those; some — others.)] 32. How does 
6 ds stand 07ice in a narrative? [For but or and he or it: the 
article being here a pronoun.] 33. How y,ai ogl [For 'ami 
Ae;' but only when the reference is to a person.] 34. When is 
avzSg self? [aviog is ^self^ when it stands in the 7iom. icithout 
a substantive, or in any case with 07ie.] 35. When is it him, her, 
it, &c. ? [avtog is him, her, it, &C. in an oblique case without a 
substantive.] 36. When is avzog same ? [o avzog is ' the 
same?] 37. Does avzog standing alone in an oblique case^ ever 
mean self? [Yes, when it is the first word of the sentence.] 

<^ 8. — 38. Does a noun with olrog, ods, syMvog, take iheari. 
or not? [Yes.] 39. Where does the pron. stand ? [Either be- 
fore the article, or after the noun.] 40. "What does nag in the 
sing, mean without the art. ? [' each,'^ ^ every.^] — what with the 
art, 7 ['the whole:' 'all.'] 

^ 9. — 41. In the reflexive pronouns (sfiavzoVy &c.) is the av- 
^6g emphatic? [No.] 42. How must thyself (m ace) be trans 



QUEST10^'S ox THE SYNTAX. 



183 



ated when it is emphatic? [avTog must precede the pronoun. 
avTov as, &c.] 43. How do you translate ^ oim^ when it is em- 
phatic ? [By the genitive of the reflexive pronouns ifiavTov, 
aeavzov, savzov.'] — how his^ theirs, &c. ? [By the gen. of 
Tog^l 44. Does iavzcv ever stand in a dependent sentence for 
the nom. of the prinrcipal one? [Yes.] 45, What pronouns are 
often used instead of a case of eavTov. to express, in a dependent 
clause, the suhject of the principal sentence? [The simple av- 
tor, or £, (oi'j o/, — o-gcftV, (Jq^clg, &c.)] 46. Is ov ever simply 
rejiexive in Attic prose? [No.*] 47. To what Attic prose- 
WTiter are the forms, gv, t confined ? [To Plato.] 

10. — 4S. How is the 7ieut. phir. of an adjective, standing 
without a noun, generally translated into English? [By the 
singular.] 49. How is the 7ieut. art. with a g-e??. case, used? [To 
denote any thing that relates to, ov proceeds from, the thing in 
question.] 50. How ^re neut. adjectives often used? lAdverb- 
ially.] 51. Yv^hen is the neiit. singular generally used adverb- 
tally? [When the adj. is of the comparative degree.] 52. When 
the neut. phcr. 7 [When the adjective is of the superlative de- 
gree.] 53. Does a predicative adjective ever not agree in gen- 
der with the substantive it refers to? [Yes; when the assertion 
is made of a class or general notion; not of a particular thing.] 
54. In what gender do noXvq {nXtcxyv, nlHaiog) and r^^iavg 
stand, when followed by a gen. 7 [In the gender of the gen. that 
follows them.] 

^ 11. — 55. In what number does the verb generally stand, 
when the nom. is a neut. plur.7 [In the singrdar.'] 56. What 
exception is there ? [When persons or living creatures are spok- 
en of.] 57. Mention some predicates with which the copula is 
very often omitted? 

{ahog and yalmov^ {^^fxig, ojqu, qoovdogy ardyxri, 
Qudiop, and dvrazog (with its opposite word), and sroifzog,) 
^ 12. — 53. Do the moods of the aor. refer to pas^ ^ime ? [No.] 
59. How^ do the moods of the aor, differ from the moods of the 
presenil [The n.oods of the aorist express momentary actions; 

* That is, ov, L &c. is not used by prose-writers in a principal sen- 
fence, to express the subject of such sentence : its place is ia a de- 
pendent or accessory clause, to express the subject of the principa} 
clause. 



164 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTA5L. 



those of the present, continued ones.] 60. Does the fart, of tht 
c/or. refer to pasHime? [Yes.] 61. Are the moods of the aor, 
rendered by the fres. in English? [Yes.] 62. When jM/J/or- 
hids.^ what moods does it take? [^wiy when it forbids^ takes the 
imperative of the present, the subjunctive of the aorist.] 63. 
What is the difference between firj with imperat. pres. and jU?y 
with the siibj. aor.? [With the subj. aor. a dejinite single act is 
forbidden; with imper, pres. a course of action. The iwperat., 
therefore, often forbids a man to do what he has already begun.'] 
64. Of what tense is the optative the regular attendant? [^The 
optative is the regidar attendant of the historical tenses.*] 65. 
What mood is the subj. after a pres. or fut. turned into, when in- 
stead of the pres. or Jut. an historical tense is used ? [The opta- 
tive.] 66. When do the particles and pronouns, which go with 
the indicative in direct narration, take the optative 7 [The parti- 
cles and pronouns which go with the indicative in direct^ take 
the optative in oblique narrationA^ 

13. — 67. How is an assertion modified by the use of av, or 
in Epic poetry xt, xfV. [av gives an expression of contingency 
and mere possibility to the assertion/] 6S. What is the principal 
useofai^? [The principal use of av is in the conclusion of a 
hypothetical sentence.] 69. When av stands in a sentence 
which is not hypothetical, to what does it often refer? [To an 
implied condition.] 70. What particles are formed by the addi- 
tion oi^ av to ft, 078, Eneidrjl [lav, ijv, av, — ozav, eTZSiddv.] 71. 
How is av — el av distinguished from the simple av ? \av—idv, 
el av, regularly begins the sentence.] 72. What are the tico 
meanings of £i? [f/is^i/;' but like our ^ it is often used for 
* whether.^] 

Hypothetical Propositions. 

73. 1) How is possibility w^ithout any expression of uncertain'- 
tainty, expressed ? [et with indie, in both clauses.}] 



* Or ; ' Historicum sequitur tempus modus optativus.* 
+ This is the general rule : but the indicative is frequently used in 
•blique narration. 

X The consequent clause may have the Imperative. 



QUESTIONS 01*: THE SYNTAX. 



185 



74. 2) How is uncertainty with the prospect of ._.eci.^i( n ex- 
pressed ? [By 8UP with siibjunr.iive in the conditional, and the 
tndic. (generally the future) in the consequent clause.*] 

75. 3) How is w?zcerton/z/ expressed, when there is no such 
accessory notion (as the prospect of decisio7i) ? [By si with the 
optative in the conditional clause, and av with the optative in the 
consequent clause.] 

76. 4) How is impossibility^ or belief that the thing \s not so, 
expressed? with imperfect or aoi^ist indie, in the conditional 
clause; av with imperf. or aorist indic.m the consequent clause.] 
77. When is the imperfect used in this fornrj of proposition 2 [For 
present time, or when the time is quite indefinite.'] 78. Can the 
condition refer to past time, the consequence to present? [Yes.] 
79. Which clause has av. the conditional or the consequent clause ? 
[The consequent clause.] 

] 4. — 80. To what is the optat. with dv equivalent? [The 
optative with av is equivalent to our may^ migftt^ would^ should, 
&c.] 81. By what may the optat. with av often be translated? 
[The optative with av is often translated by the fatitre.] 82. 
What force does ap give to the infin. and participle? [The 
same force that it gives to the optative.] S3. To what then is an 
infinitive with dv nearly equivalent? [To an infuiUive future.] 
84. After what verbs is the future frequently so expressed'? 
[After verbs of hoping, thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, con- 
fessing, &c., when a condition is expressed or implied.] 

^ 15. — 85. What mood do the compounds of ai^,t and rela- 
tives Wiih av regidarly t^kel [The subjunctive.] 86. What 
changes take place, if an?/, when these compounds or relatives 
with av come into connection with past time, or stand in oblique 
narration? [They either remain unchanged, or the simple 
words — H, 078, ineidi] : og, oarig, oaog, &c. — take their place 
with the optative.] 87. To what Latin tense does the aor. sub- 
junct. answer, when it stands with the compounds of dv, or with 
^-elativ es d^ud dv 1 [To the Latin future perfect, fiduruni ex- 
actum.] 

<§) 16. — 88. How is what often happened, in pasi ^une, expres* 



* The consequent clause may have the Imperative. 

t That is, idVf orai/, CTrctJai^, &C. 



185 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



sed [By the opfalive.] 89. What mood and particles would 
be used lo express tliis sort onndffcmle frequency for pres. ov fid 
time? [The relatives with av and compounds of a^^.] 90. What 
force does av thus give to og and other relatives? [The force of 
our — ever^ ■ — soever.'] 

4 17.— 91. What mood is used in doubting questions 1 [The 
subjunctive.] 92. After v^hat verbs is it sometimes thus used 1 
[Miev ^ovlu;, {)t'lefg; ovx 8^(0 or olda, aTzoQOJ, eQCozM, ^ijtm.'] 

^ 18. — 93. When conditional propositions depend on another 
verb, in what mood will the consequent clause stanc ? [In the 
infinitive.] 94. What will stand in a dependent consequent clause 
for TTOiijaoj ? [Tzou^aeiv.] — for tioioTi^ av, Inoiovv av ? [nomv 
av.] — for '7iou](5aAix avy inoiriGa avl [TiotTiaat av.] — for mnoi- 
f]KOiiii av, £77871 onpA8[v dpi [718710 1 )]y.ti ai dv.] 

19. — 95. Does ov or fAi] deny independently and directly? 
[oh.] 96. V/hen should not be translated by jji] ? \_Mi] is used 
in pivhibitions ; whh conditional ])?ivUc]es ; and particles expres- 
sing intention or purpose.] 97. When do orf, on6r8, take jM?y? 
[When ^when} implies a condition.] 98. Is ov or used after 
orf, cac, in8{, tTiBidfjl [ov.] 99. Is ot' or ixrj used {generally) to 
express the opinions of «?7o?Aer person in oblique narration ? [ov.] 

100. How should you determine whether ov^eig, oidt, &c. are to 
be used, or fxrideig, /Lir^dsl [Wherever ^ not^ would be translated 
by i^]], we must use not oidtig, ovdt, &c., but fAr^deigy fi7]d8y &c.] 

101. How must the positive adverbs and pronouns generally be 
translated into Greek in negative propositions? [By the corres- 
ponding negative forms.f] 

y 20. — 102. Are the verbals in 78og act. or pass.? [Passive.] 

103. IVhat case of the agent do they govern ? [The dative.] 

104. What case of the object? [The same case as the verbs t"rom 
which they come.] 105. To what are these verbals in Tsog 
equivalent, when they stand in the neiit, with the agent, in the 

* Hermann properly observes, that the optat. does not itself express 
the repetition of the act, but only carries v/ith it the notion of indefinite' 
nesSy the repetition being marked by the other verb, e. g. either a fre- 
quentative verb, or the imperf. or pluperf. tense (which both express 
duration), or by an aorist with -noWaKig, &c. 

t Thus for either — or ; amjwherej.ai any time, any thing, we must 
use neither — 720?^; nowhere ; never ; nothing, &c. Rule 110, as a gen 
eral assertion, is absurd. 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



187 



dat.^ omitted ? [To the participle iii dus used in ihe same rvay.] 
106. Wiien may they be used ia agreement with the olijecti 
[When formed from transitive verbs.] 107. Express you 
SHOULD CULTIVATE VIRTUE," in two ways, with a(J:<r]itog and ags- 
zrj. Idaarjitov iaiL aoi rz/r dQSTrjy, or day.rjrta iaiiGoi // «()6t//.] 
108. What pecuharities are there in Attic Greek with respect to 
the use of these verbals? [The neut, plur. is used as well as the 
jieut. sing. The age)it is sometimes put in the accus. as w^ell as 
the object.] 109. Render Ti^iarlov IotIv avzcp, and neiaztov 
iaiiv avxov. [nsiaTiov iauv avzov, we must persuade him. 
7tst(Jzeov laiiv uvtm, we must obey him.^ 

§ 21. — 110. What verbs govern two accusatives ? [Verbs of 
taking away from, teacliing. concealing^ asking^ putting on. or off, 
take two accusatives.] 

^ 22. — 111. What case does the acc, after ihe a^iive verb 
become, when the act. verb is turned into the passice? [The7Z0772.] 
112. When the act. verb governs two accusatives, may either of 
them (and if so, wliich?) remain after the pass, verb ? [The acc. of 
the person becomes the nom. ; that of the thing continues to be 
the object of the passive verb, as in Latin.] 113. May the dat. 
t)f the act. become the nom. of the passive? [Yes; sometimes.] 
114. Will the acc. after the act. then remain as the acc. after the 
passive? [Yes.] 115. Render (eybi) n en LGT8i\uai ro via. [lam 
entrusted with this: or, I have had this entrusted to me.] 116, 
Dc intrans. verbs ever take an acc? and, if so, v/hen? [Intransi- 
tive verbs take an acc. of a noun o[ kindred meaning ; and some- 
times of one that restricts the general notion of the verb to a par- 
ticular instance.] 

§ 23. — 117. Does the acc. ever follow an adj.? [Yes.] 118 
What prepos. might be supposed omitted? [xccra, as ^o.] 119 
What acc. is sometimies found with verbs that do not property 
govern the acc? [The accus. of the neut. pronoun.l 120. How 
is the duration of time expressed ? [By the accusative.] 121. 
EIov/ is the distance of one place from another expressed ? [By 
the accusative.] 

•$> 24. — 122. What case do par^?7ii?e5, &c. goverc ? [Partitives, 
numerals, superlatives, &c. govern the genitive.] 123. What 
case do adverbs optima and pZace govern ? [The genitive.] 124. 
What case expresses the material out of which a thing is maie, 



88 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



and such other properties^ circumstances , &c. as we shotiid e:^ 
press by 'o/'? [The genitive.] 125. Can ^ once a daif be trans- 
lated hterally ? [No: it must be/ once //le day.'] 126. How does 
the gen, stand possessive pronouns? [In a i<ind of apposition 
to the personal pronoun implied.] 127. How does the g-eri. stand 
alone^ or after interjections^ [The gen. is used alone, or after in- 
.erjections, as an exclamation.^ 

^ 25. — 128. What case do verbal adjectives, in rAog^ &c., with 
a /m?26'. meaning govern? [The genitive.] 129. What case.do 
verbs relating to plenty^ want, value, &c., govern ? [The genitive.] 
130. What case do verbs relating to the senses govern ? [The 
genitive.] 131. What exception is there? [Verbs that denote 
sight, which take the ace] 132. By what prepos., understood, 
might the ge7i. sometimes be supposed governed? [By evexa, on 
account of.~\ 133. After what verbs does the gen. frequently 
stand in this way? [After words compounded with a privativeJ^ 

§ 26. — 131-. Mention two large classes of verbs that govern 
the gen. [Most verbs that express such notions as freeing from, 
keeping off from, ceasing from, deviating or departing from, &c. 
govern the gen. Most verbs that express remembering or for- 
getting ; caring for or despising ; sparing; aiming at or desir- 
ing ; ruling over or excelling; accusing of or condemning, &.c. 
govern the genitive ; but not without many exceptions.] 

§ 27. — 135. What case does Haraytyvojaxco (condemn) take 
of the charge or punishment? and what case of the person? 
l^xai ay lyvcoaxco has accus. of the charge or punishment ; gen. of 
verson,] 136. May we say, rovro xazr]yoQbizaL avxov, this is 
laid to his charge? [Yes.] 

§ 28. — 137. In what case does the price or value stand ? [The 
price or value is put in the genitive.^ 138. In what case is the 
thing for which w^e exchange another, put? [The thing for 
which we exchange another is put in the genitive.^ 139. W^hat 
case of a noun of time answers to when? and what to since or 
within what tmie ? [The gen.] 140. In what case is the part by 
which a person is led, got hold of, &c., put? [The gen. expresses 
the part by which a person leads, takes, or gets hold of any thing.] 
29. — 141. In what case is the thing with which another is 
compared, put when r, than, is omitted ? [In the genitive.] 142. 
Mow is ^greater than ever^ expressed ? [By using aviog beforo 



QXJESTIOXS ON THE SYNTAX. 



189 



the gen. of the reflexive pronoun.] 143. How _s ' too great^ ex- 
pressed? [Tbo great. &g. is expressed by the comparative with }] 
xard before a substantive ; 7] (Sazs before a verb in the ivjinitive.'] 
144. Still greater: much greater? [hi fiSiXcov: 

§ 30. — 145. How are two comparatives, joined together by 
^, to be translated ? [By more than^ or rather than, with the pos- 
itive.~\ 146. By what words are superlatives strengthened ? [By 
071, OTTCog, {j, &c.] 147. What force have ei rtg y.al a)j,og^ 
si quis alius, dLiid clg avi^c, umis ornnhim maxima? [The force of 
superlatives.] 148. What case do nsQizrog^ and adjectives in 
'Tildaiog, govern? [The genitive.] 

§ 31. — 149. What does the dat. express? [The person to or 
for whom a thing is done.] 150. What words does it follow? 
[Words that express imion or coming together^ and those that 
express likeness or identity.'] 151. In what case is the instni- 
ment^ &c. put? [The instrument, the manner ^ and the cause, are 
put in the dative.] 152. In what case is the definite Xxm^-when 
put? [In che dative.] 153. Does the c/a/. ever express the agent! 
[Yes.] 154. After what w^ords is this most common? [After 
the perfect pass, and verbals in rtog, rog.j 155. "What case do 
verbs of reproaching t3.ke, besides dat. of the pe?'son? [Verbs 
of reproaching, (Sec. take acc. of the thi?ig, as well as dat. of per- 
son, especially when it is a nent. pronoun.] 

§ 32.— 156. What does the middle voice denote? [That the 
agent does the action z//:)0?2 A imse//; or for his own advantage; 
or that he gets it done for his own advantage.] 157. What are 
the tenses that have the middle meaning when the verb has it at 
all? [Pres., imperf, P^^f) and pluperf. of the passive form; 
and the futures and aorists mid.] 153. Has the aor. 1. of the 
pass, form ever a mid. meaning ? [Yes.] 

33. — 159. What verbs of the middle form must be con- 
sidered simply as deponents? [Middle forms, of which there is 
no active.] 160. Mention some aor. 1. pass, with mid. meaning. 
{yiarE'/liO^v {i). anr^/ldyr^v, eTTSoaico&r^v, icf.o^iid-r^r, iy.oturp 
•Or^r, r]Gy,i]0-r^^!.] 161. ^Mention some fut. 1. mid. with pass, mean- 
ing. [coQ-6/./;acftr4/, ouoloyrjuouai, cfvld^Ofxai, d^QtipOf^ai.] 162. 
How is ' by.'' to express the agent after the pass, verb^ translatBdl 
[By vno with gen. ; also by naqd and nqog with gen.] 



190 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



^ 34. — 163. What signification does the perf. 2, (commonlv 
called per/; mid.) prefer? [The intrans. si gmi'.] 164. Has it eve? 
the pure reflexive meaning of the middle? [No.] 

35. — 165, What does the fat. 3. express? [A future action 
continuing in its effects.^ 166. What notions does it express be- 
sides that of di future action continuing in its effects? [The 
speedy completion of an action, or the certainty of its completion.'] 
167. What verbs have the fut. 3. for their regular future? [Those 
nerfects that are equivalent to a present with a new meaning: 
e. g, fji8\uv}]ftatj >:t'y.Ti]ixai.~\ 163. What answers to the fut. 3. in 
the active voice? [saoixai with p erf participle.] 169. What is 
generally preferred to the opt. and suhj. of ihe perf. ; [The perf 
part, with sujv or co.] 170. In what verbs is the imperat. perf 
principally used ? [In those verbs whose perfects have the mean- 
ing of a present: p.8fiyr]60j &c.] 17 L What does the 3 pers. 
imperat. of the peif pa^s. express? [It is a strong expression 
for let it be done^ &c.] 172. How is a wish expressed in Greek ? 
[eiO-s with the optative — the optative alone — or cocptXor* sg, e, 
alone, or with eiO's^ ei ydo or oa^*, and followed by the infinitive.] 
173. What mood and tense are used with bid^Sy if the wish has not 
beeU: and now cannot be, realized 7 [The indic. of a^^rist or im- 
perf, according as the lime to which the wish refers is past or 
present.] 

^ 36. — 174. Mention a use of the infinitive that the Greek and 
English have, but the Latin has not. [It is used to express the 
purpose.] 175. What does the particle oaors express? [A con- 
sequence.] 176. How is so — as expressed ? [So — as to; coare 
with infinitive.] 177. How is so—that expressed? So — that; 
f^ars with infinitive or indicative.] 

<^ 37. — 178. What does the infin. with the article in the gen. 
express ? [Th^ infinitive with the article in the gen. sometimes 
denotes a motive or purpose.] 179. "When the infin. has 3. subject 
of its own, in what case does it regidariy stand ? [In the accusa- 
tive.] 180. What prepos. with the infin. is equivalent to a sen^ 
tence introduced by 6ecazise ? [did.] 181. When is the subject- 
of the infinitive generally not expressed ? [When the subject of 
thfi infinitive belongs to, and is expressed with, the former verb,] 



* Dehuit. 



(Questions on the syntax. 



19] 



182. When the subject of the i7ijin. is omitted, because expressed 
with the fora]er verb, in what case is the noun after the injin. 
generally put? [In the same case that the subject of the infini- 
tive stands in in the other clause.] 183. Y/hat is this construction 
called ? [Attraction.'] 

^ 38. — 184 May attraction take place when the infin. is in- 
troduced by the art. or ^aze 7 [Yes.] 

39. — 135. What kind o^' sentences may be translated into 
Greek by a participle ? [Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
troduced by wheiij after ^ if since, because, although, &c.] 1.86. 
How may the English participial substantive, under the govern- 
ment of a preposition, often be translated? [By a participle in 
agreement] 187. How may the first of two verbs connected by 
and. often be translated into Greek 7 [By a participle.] 

<§) 40. — 188. What participle often expresses a purpose? 
[The participle of the fuiure often expresses a purpose^ 189. 
Mention some verbs that take the participle where we should use 
the infin., a participial substantive, or ' that.^ [Many verbs that 
signify emotions^ perception by the senses, knowledge, recoll^tion, 
cessation or continuance, &c., take the participle, where u'e should 
use -the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or ' that.^l 

41. — 190. By what are cp^dvco, come, or get before, and 
Xavd^drco, am concealed^ generally rendered? [By adverbs.] 
191. Mention the adverbs and phrases by wdiich 7.uvddrco may 
be rendered. [Without knowing it; nnconsciouslij, unknown to 
myself; without being observed; secretly; without being seen or 
discovered.] 192. How may P.ai^^eaV be rendered ? [By secretly, 
without being observed, seen^&c] 193. How cpddoag or dvvaag 1 
[Quickly; at once, immediately.] 194. When q^d^drco and lavd^dvco 
are translated by adverbs, how must the participles v.-ith which 
they are connected, be translated? [By verbs.] 

(^Genitive Jlbsohite, ^'c.) 

^ 42.-195. Which case is put absolutely in Greek ? [The 
genitive.] 196. What does the participle, put absolutely, express? 
[The time, or generally any such relation to the principal sen- 
tence, as we should express by when, after, since, as, because^ 
iJioughi ifj what case do the participles of imper- 



192 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



sonal verbs stand absolutely 1 [In the nominative; of course 
without a noun, and in the neuter gender.] 198. When the time 
relates to a person^ what construction is used instead of the gen, 
absolute? [gW is then generally expressed.] 199. How is a 
motive^ which is attributed to another person, generally expres- 
sed ? [By the particle Gig with the gen, or acc. absolute.] 

( The Relative.) 

<§> 43.— 200. What does the relative often introduce? [A 
caiLse^ ground^ motive^ or design of what is stated.] 201. What 
use of the relative is less common in Greek than Latin? [That 
of merely connecting a sentence with the one before it.] 202. In 
which clause is the antecedent often expressed ? [In the relative 
clause.] 203. Where does the relat. clause often stand, when 
this is the case? [Before the principal clause.] 204. With what 
does the relative often agree in case ? [With the antecedent in 
the principal clause.] 265. What is this called ? [^Attraction of 
the Relative.^ 206. When the relative is attracted^ where is the 
antecedent often placed ? [In the relative clause, but in the case 
in which it w^ould stand in the principal clause.] 

44. — 207. In such a sentence as " the fear, xchich we call 
bashfulness,^^ should which agree with fear or with hashfidness^ 
[With bashfidness.'] 208. Explain eoztv at [It is equivalent to 
enoiy some^ and may be declined throughout.] 209. What is the 
GvQ^k^ox sometimes 1 [eaiiv oze.^ — someioherel ['eaTiv onov.^ 
210. What is the English of iq) cp or icp wtbI [0/z condition 
ihat.'j—of^ avxf cov ? [Because^ /o/-.]— of at Kg ? [ Whosoever ; 
ei n, whatsoever.'] 211. By wdiat parts of the verb is icp w or 
am followed ? [By the future indie, or the infn.'] 



<§> 45. — 212. Give the English of roJ oiov aov dvdQog. [Of 
such a man as you.'] 213. How may this construction be ex- 
plained ? [ard(Jog roioviov, clog ov el] 214. "What words does 
060g follow, when it has the meaning of rer?/? [Such words as 
{^avfiaGTog, nleiarog, a(f,&ovog, &c.] 

446. — 215. What is the construction of ovdeig oang oil 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



193 



rThe declinable words are put under the immediate government 
c ' the verb.] 

§ 47.— 216. What tenses follow fiDlco in the ivfin,? [The 
future, present, or aorist.'] 217. Which infin. is the 7/iost common 
after (xtlXco, and which the least? [The fiiticre injin. is the most^ 
the aorist the least common.] 

§ 48. — 218. What mood or tense follows oTrco^', when it re- 
lates to the future? [The suhj.ov the future indie.'] 219. May it 
retain them in connection with past time? [Yes.] 220. Is the 
verb on which onoiig &c. depends, ever omitted? [Yes : the con- 
struction is equivalent to an energetic imperative : — oQCi or oQuze 
maybe supplied.] 221. With what mood or terise is ov [a.^ used? 
[With the fut. indie, or aor. subj.'] 222. In what sense ? [As an 
emphatic prohibition or denial] 223. According to Dawes, 
what aorists were not used in the subj. with oTZCog and ov iiri ? 
[The subjunctive of the aor. 1. act. and mid.] 224. Is this rule 
correct? [No.] 225. What is Buttmann's opinion? [That the 
subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind of predilection, and 
that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut. indie, was used 
in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1.] 

§ 49. — 226. How is fAi] used after expressions of fear, &c. ? 

With the subjunctive or indie] 227. When is the indie, with 
used in expressions of^ fear? [When the speaker wishes to 
ntimate his conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really 
come to pass.] 228. How does it happen that oh sometimes 
stands with a verb in the subjunctive, but without a precedint^ 
verb? [The notion of/ear is often omitted before ov, the verb 
being then generally in the subj.] 229. After what kind of ex- 
pressions is fxr] 01? used with the infin. ? [After many negative 
expressions.]* Is it ever used w^ith the participle or infin. ? 

end, if so, when? [fxr] ov is sometimes used with the participle 
and with coaz-g and infn., after negative expressions.] 

50. — 231. When is firj used with relative sentences, parti- 
ciples, adjectives, &c. ? [Whenever the negative does not di 
7 ectly and simply deny an assertion with re?pect to some particu 
lar mentioned person or thing.] 232. Does the infin. generally 
take or oy? [/i?f.] 233. When does it take ov7 [Wheii 

ipicions or assertions of another person are stated in sernvyne ob^ 



* See 293. (I) (2) (3). 

9 



194 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



liquo.'} 234. When should /u?/ follow wars 7 and wheri dvI 
[With (OOZE, the wjinilive takes |M?y, the indicative ov.'] 

<§> 51. — 235. What case do some adverbs govern? [The 
same case as the adjectives from which they are derived.] 

236. How is (hg sometimes used? [As a preposition = ^r^oV] 

237. When only can be used as a prepos. ? [It is only joined 
to persons.'] 238. What mood do aQ)[i, ii^XQi, eoog, ears take ? 
[The subj. or opt. when there is any uncertainty ; the indie, vjhen 
not.] 239. Does 7Tq}v av sXd^co relate to the past or the future? 
[To the future.] 240. How is 'before I came ^ expressed ? 17tq]p 
^ iXd^eiv ifA,8 : ttqiv iXd^eiv if^is: or ttqiv Tjld^ov iyco.] 241. Is ^ 
ever omitted before the infin. after ttqiv ? [Yes 3 in Attic Greek 
nearly always.] 

<§) 52. — 242. In what kind of questions is aga generally 
used ? [In questions that imply something of uncertainty^ doubt, 
or surprise.'] 243. What interrog. particles expect the answer 
'Yes?^ [The answer 'Yes' is expected by — ov ; ij yoLQ ; 
01) ; ovHOVv ; alio ri y ;] 244. What expect the answer 'A^o'? 
[The answer 'Ab' is expected by, — aga ^r] ; rj ttov ; mim forte? 
fxf] or fyioov ;] 245. What particles give an ironical force to ov ? 
{d^, di] TTOV.] 246. Does ov expect 'yes^ or '7io' for answer? 
^ov expects yes; fii^, no.] 247. In what kind of questions are 
Eita, STTEiia used ? [Such as express astonishment and dis- 
pleasure.] 248. What words are used as a simple interrog. par- 
ticle? [alio n ^.] 249. Render 7/ na&dv ; — 7/ fxad^oov ; 
[7/ TTa&cov ; what possesses you to , . . &c. ? — ri fxaV^cov ; what 
induces you to . . . &c. ? 

<§> 53. — 250. What are the proper forms of pronouns and 
adverbs for indirect questions? [Those which are formed from 
the direct interrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 6 — .] 
251. Are the simple interrogatives ever used in indirect ques- 
tions? [Yes.] 252. Are the relatives ever so used? [Yes; 
but very seldom.] 253. When the person addressed repeats the 
question, what forms does he use? [The forms beginning with 
6 — .] 254. When the pron. or noun is the acc. after one verb^ 
and the nom. before the next, which case is generally omitted ? 
[The nominative.] 

^ 54. — 255. By what particles are direct double questions 
asked ? [By tzoteqov, or TioreQa^ — ^, less commonly by aqa — 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



195 



256. By what particles are indirect double questions asked? 

[tlTB — illE, ft— //, TlOieQOV — 7].] 

^ 55. — 257. After what verbs is ei used for or/, that 7 [Af- 
ter dav^aLM, ani some other verbs expressive of feelings.] 

258. After what verbs has ti the force of uhether? [Alter verbs 
of seeing, knowing, considering, ashing, saying, trying, &c.] 

259. When is lav used in this way? [When the question re- 
lates to an expected case that remains to be proved.] 

<§) 56. — 260. How can an interrogative sentence be co7i- 
densed in Greek? [By attaching the interrogative to a partici- 
ple^ or using it in an oblique case.] 261. What clause may thus 
be got rid of? [A relative clause attached to an interrogative 
one.] 

<§> 57.- — 262. What is rj ^rjv ? [A solemn form of assevera- 
tion.] 263. When is the propos. ovv omitted ? [Before avim, 
avifi, &c. which then = together with, with.] 264. How is aficpo- 
7EO0V us^d ? [^uiJiqjOTeQOv is used adverbially, or elliptically, by 
the poets, for both; as well — as, &c.] 265. How aiACfOTEQCcI 
[In reference to two words, without being made to conform to 
them in case.] 266. What force has xa/, when it refers to a).- 
).og ? [The force of especially, in particular.'] 267. Explain the 
use o£ ihe part. flit, with tgyeod^at, &c. [ 'tQ)(^6a\)^ai, Itraiy with 
part, fut., is, to be going to, or on the point of] 268. How is 
Ijfoo sometimes used with a past partic. 7 [As an emphatic cir- 
cumlocution.] 269. How is it used with Xr^QdVy &c. ? [s'^co with 
the second pers. o^^Xr^Q£^Vy naiL^Hv, qilvaoHv, &c. is used to make 
a good-humoured observation.] 270. How is cf8Q00v used in 
some expressions'? [g^f^coi^ appears redundant in some expres- 
sions, but denotes a vehemence of purpose, not altogether free 
from blame.] 

<5> 58. — 271. Td what is dixaiog dj-u equivaleiJ? [To i^Y- 
i^aiov iaiiv, &c.] 272. How is ogov used ? [ocjov is used 
elliptically with the infn.] 273. What words are followed by /;? 
[Words that imply a comparison: e. g. qd^dreiv, diucftQErr, hay- 
zwg, diTzldcFtog, i'diog, vtteqOev, ttqiv.] 274. After what phrases 
"s a tense of noitlv omitted? [After oidlv aV,o i\ — , uXXo ti 
ri — ; t/ SlLXq — ; &c.] 275. By what are a person's quoted 
words introduced? [By or«.] 276. How is the aor. used with 
it ov ? [For the present.} 



INDEX I. 



O*0bs. Look under ' am^ for adjectives^ phrases, &c. with to he. 
F. M.=future middle. 

(? )' implies, that the pupil is to ask himself how the word is cos« 
jugated or declined. 



A. 

A, = a certain^ rig, 12. 
About (of time), vno {acc.\ 
326. 

(after to fear, to be 

at ease. &c.)j neoi {dat.)^ 
28B^ 

• (after talk ^ fear ^ coii- 



tend\ TTEQi (dat.), some 
times dfxcfL {dat)^ 283*. 
(after to he employ- 
ed)^ 7T80i, or aiiqiL, with 
ace, 283^ 
Abrocomas. 229, note q. 

'j^^QOKOfxag, G. a. 
Abstain from, ciTzt/ouai 

[gen.), 138. 
: we must — , 



aq}8'ATtov £(77 ^ with gen. 
According to reason, y.aia 

loyov, 274. 
Accuse, y.az?]yoQHv\ (proper- 



ly, speak against) rivog, 
or Tirog ti, 156. — iyy.ultiv 
(properly, cite a person; 
call him into court) nri 
and Tii i 71, 183. Both are 
judicial words, but used 
with the same latitude as 
our ^ accuse.^ Of the two, 
iyxaltLv should probably 
be preferred, if the charge 
relates to private matters. 

Accustom, i{}i^co, 52. 
(Am accustomed, ei&i(y 
f^ai or acod^Uj 52.) 
Acquire, y.idoixai, 87. 
Act, noitco, 60. 

— insolently towards, v^qC 
(^siv eig Tiva, 138. 

— strangely, Oaviiaazht 
TTOftTv, 259. 

— unjustly (= injure), ddt^ 



t The constructions of KanqyooeXv are very numerous: Karrjyopoj aoM 
rtvoj and TL 't or at tlvos and n ; or aov {and ce) rrcpi tivos ; and x-a-nyopci 
iLara aov. 



198 INDI 

'/leip tiva aiid ti (also dg, 
138. 

Admire, {^av[A,dtco, F. M. 

generally, 8. 
Adopt a resolution, ^ovlevsa- 

dai,. 190. 
Adorn, xoafiecoj 206. 
Advance, TZQoxcoQtco, 274. 
Affair, TTQuyfxa, to, 8. 
Affliction, ndOog, to, 150. 
Afford, nuQrj^co, 214. 
After, fisid {ace), 293*. 
a long time, dia noh 

lov )[q6vov, 270. 
some time, diaXiTzm' 

IQovov, 235. 

^id ^QOVOV, 

270. 

our former tears, in 

7(^P TTQOG&EV dUKQVCfJV, 231. 

the manner of a dog, 

>ivwg dtxrjv, 250. 
Again, av{}ig, 100. 
Against (after to march), 

irri, acc. 24. eig, 259. 
(=in violation of), 

TTUQdj 299. 
(after commit an 

injury), dg or neqi, with 

acc, 138. 

TiQog (acc), 319. 

(after verbs of speak- 

ing, &c.), xccTcc genit,, 

274. 

Age (a person's), rjlr/da, rj, 
144. 

Agreeable, 7}5i;^, 214. 



X.I. 

Agreeable : if it is — , a oot 

^oilofAtrq) ioTi, 206. 
Agricultural population, ol 

dfAq^l y7]v f/ovreg, 278. 
Aid, FTTixoiQtco, dat.^ also acc. 

of the thing, 239. 
Aim at, ozo/^d^oixai, gen, 

156. 

Alas, cpev, — o/Jwof, 144. 
Alexander, 'AW^av^Qog, 24. 
All, 6 ^zas", or 71 dg 6 — . PI. 

TzdvTeg. See note on 44, 

46. 

— but (as-much-as-not), 
ooov ov, 125. 

— day, dva ndaav 7t]v fn^s- 
Qciv, 259. 

Alliance. See Form. 

Allow to taste, yd(o, 150. 

to be done with im- 
punity, neQiOQav {-idtiv, 
-6ipea&ai\ with inf, of 
thing to be prevented; 
the par tic. of a wrong to 
be revenged, 331. See 
note °. 

Almost, oliyov deiVj or 6)Jyoy 

only, 283. 
Already, i^di], 65. 
Also, yMi, 92. 
Although, yiaiTTSQ, 175. 

(a.) 

Am able, dvvccfxai (possum) 
87. — olog 7s elixit [queo\ 
283. See Can. 



t Or 



INDEX I. 



199 



Am (an) actual murderer^ 

avtoyeiQ eifxi, 299. 
. — adapted for, olog eiui, 

2S3. 

— angry with, oQyiZofxai, 
dat, 183. dt Gpyf/g 8YEiv^ 
270. ^ ' 

— ashamed, ahyvvofxcu, 
239. 

— at a loss, aTTootw, 100. 
[See 98, 99.] 

— at dinner, demvicx), 288. 

— at enmity with, di 
&Qag yiyvBdO^ai Tin, 270. 

— at leisure, cxold^co, 112. 

— at liberty. See 249. b, 
^ — - awake, iygriyoQa, 193. 

— aware, fxav{^dvco (?), 239. 

(b.) 

Am banished, qjevyeiv, 270. 

— broken, y.aitaya, 193. 

— by nature, nicpvy^a, 8q)vvy 
214. 

jc.) 

Am come, ^xw, with mean- 
iiig o/perf. 206. 

— commander, GZQatTjyeco, 
52. 

— confident, Tiinoid^a^ 193. 
« — congealed, ninr^ya^ 193. 

— conscious, ovi^oida lixav- 
Tco, 239. 

— contemporary with, ya- 
Ta 70V avTov yQorov yevECF- 
'dat, 183. 

— contented with, dyaTrdoj, 
with acc. or dat., 52. 



(d.) 

Am dishonoured by, an fid* 

Zouai TTQog Tivog, 319. 
— distant from, uTTr/oo, 138 

doing well, ev TTQarroo, 8. 

illj xaxojg fTQdzTCOf 



(e.) 

Am evidently, &c. See 239. 

(f-) 

Am far from., nollov deco, 
283*. 

— fixed, TieTzr^ya, 193 
fond of, dyaTrdco, 52. 

— fortunate, avivxtco, 92. 

(g-) 

Am genera], uTQaTrjyeoj, 52. 
glad, r^dofxai, dat., 20. 

— going (to), fiEllco (aug- 
ment?), 283^ 

— gone, oixofiai(J)j perfect 
meaning, 206. 

— grateful for, ydQiv oida 
(gen. of thing, dat. of 
pers.), 222. [for oida, see 
73.] 

(h.) 

Am here, ndQei/xi, 52. 

Am I . . . ? (in doubtfu% 
questions) 137, note e. 

— ill (of a disease), yidfivoD 



200 ind: 

[lahoro) ; 'AUfiovfxai, -Aty.- 
183. 

— in my right mind, aco- 
q.Qoitco, 125. 

— m a passion or rage, ^a- 
le/iuirco, daL. 183. 

— - in safety, ip toj dGq)a).tl 
cifi!, 299. 

— in the habit of perform- 
ing, TToayaiKog (eliAi), with 
geii. See 149. 

— indignant, ayavayxiai^ 
337. 

— informed of, aia&dvo- 
liai (?), 190 

(10 

Am likely, iiillco (?), 283*. 
— lost, (jz8Qovuai, 168*. r. 

(m.) 

Am mad, fxafvofiai (?), 125. 

my own master, ifiav- 

70V dfxi, 162*. i. 

(n.) 

Am named after, ovoua f/^co 

Ini Tivog, 288. 
near, 6)Jyov dtw, or oA/- 

701' o?^Zy, 283*. 
next to, tjoixaij gen, 

149. d. 

* not a man to, 283. b, 

' afraid of, -^aootoj 

{ace), 138. 

(o.) 

Am of opinion, vo^i^o^, 52. 



IX 1. 

Am of service to, cSgpdfa 

(ace), 82. 
a character (to), ei^i 

oiog, 283. b. 
off, oi)[Oficu (?), pcrf. 

meaning, 206. 
on my gnard, (fvlaTzscj- 

Oai, acc. 190. 
on his side, ui-u jroog 

{gen.l 319. 
on an equal footing 

with, oixoLog eliii, 227. b, 

(P-) 

Am pained at dlytcx), 20. 

persuaded, ;rf;ro/,i?T4, 193. 

pleased with, r^dofAui, 

dat. 20. 

present, Tidneifn, 52. 

produced. See 214. 

prosperous, Evzv/^tio, 92. 

punished, dixr^v didovaij 

or dovvai : ge?i. of thing ; 

dat. of person by whom, 

228. 

, ^':\ 

Am safe, iv roj dacpaln eIial 

slow to, &c., cyolri {by 

leisure), with a verb, 112. 

suffering (from a dis- 
ease). See ' am ill of.' 

surprised at, {>ai\ud^a 

(F. M.), 8. 

(t.) 

Am thankful for, ydoiv oi^a, 
gen. of thing, 222. Foi 
olda see 73, note 



IXDEX I. 



201 



Am the slave of. doi/.eico, 
dat. 359. 

. there, ndosnu, 92. 

to, fiA).(o^{l\ 2S3^ 

Am midone, o/^cc/.a, arzoXco- 

5.«, 193. 
unseen by. /.ar-^urcxi (?). ; 

acc. 154. I 

Am vexed, ayOouai \J) {dat. , 
but irri in construction ex- , 
plained in 19*. c). 20. | 

(w.) 

Am v.'holly Vv'rapt in, ttoo,' 
319. 

wise {= prudent], aw- ■ 

qQOPtoi}, 125. 

with you, 7ido8[ui, 92. ' 

-.within a little. o/Jyov 

deco, 233*. 
without fear of. danmco, 

acc. 13S. 
Ambassador, Tro^'G^Vr, 259. 
Ambitious. qiloTjaog, 214. 
Among the first, translated 

by doidukiog [having be- \ 

gun).' SeeiOO. 
And that too, y.ai zavTa, 206. 1 

yet, eiTct, trreiTa, oio. 

nevertheless, dzu, hei- 

ra, 315. 
Ancestor. TTo6yoio^\ 156. 
Animal, ceo or, 65. 
Annoy, /.U.t/co, 41. 
Ansvv^er, anoy.qtyouai (?),27S. 



Apart, /coo/V, 309. 
ApolLo, '^rro/lcop (?), 341. 
Appear (with part.), cfaiic- 

fica, 239. 
Apt to do, or perform. rrna-A^ 

Tiy.o^ {gen.)^ 150. 
2:overn.cw/(y.6^(^en.) 

150.^ 

Arbitration, dtaiia, 132. 
Are there anv whom . .1 
269. d. 

Arise. Eytfoouai (pass.). 193. 

Arms, 0,7/1," 16S^ 

Army, GToclrevua, to, 24. 

Aronse, lyeloco (perf. with 
Attic Ve6/?79/.;\ 193. 

Arrange, rd^'oo plater Attic 
7«rrco), 96. — yoGutco, dia- 
yoGia'oo (to arrange, with 
a view to a plea si 112^ ap- 
pear a ace of e le ganc e . s y m- 
metrv apt arrangement, 
&c.);206. 

Arrive, dqiy.ysouai (?), 144. 

first, r^'d-riat (?) r'g:* 

iy,6uEro^\ 242. d. 



hut oniv. cc 



35S. 6. 
Art, Tt/i f;, 214. 
As he was, 351. 

— his custom Vv-as. Sea 
Custom. 

-— many as, ojo/, 175. 
possible, ojof 

TzhciGToi, 174. c. 
silently as possible, aiyr^ 

cog drvGTor, 174. b. 

— faras they are concerned^ 
TO I.t!- zovzoig ehai, 206. 



202 



INDEX 1. 



As far at least as .his is con- 
cerned, TOVTOv ye trexa, 
250. 

.4s far as depends on this, 
70VT0V ys ere'Aa, 250. 

— as much as any body. 
See 100. 

— the saying is, to Xsyofxe- 
pov, 137. d, 

— possible ( afler superla- 
tives)^ cog, oil, 171. 

— he possibly could, 174. c. 

— fast as they could, ciog jd- 
yovg tiy^ov, 278. 

— soon as he was borUj^^- 
-Ovg yevofXBiog, 309. 

— long as, tare, 306. 

— to, ooarf, with 211. 

— (before jjartic), die, die 
d/j, 242. a. 

Ask, riQOfArir, aor. 2 : eQcordoo 
used for the other tenses, 
73. 

for alt 80) {tiDO accusa- 
tives)^ 87. 

Assist in the defence of, ^ori- 
{)t&), dat, 121. 

Assistance. See Fly or Run. 

Associate with, 6(ijXeco, dat, 
183. 

Assuredly (in protestations), 

?/ fi/jv, 343. 
(will not), ov iA,rj, 

287\ 

Astonished (to be), {>avud^(o 

(F. M.) 
At,319. 

all, UQXW '^W ^QXWj 
92, 132. 



At. Not at all {ovdev ri). 

— a little distance, di oXiyov 
270. 

— a great distance, did tzoX- 
Xoi, 270. 

— any time, ttote, 

— ease about, OaooeTv neqi 
283*. 

— first, aQyopievog, 235. 

— home, hdov, 125. 

— last, TO reXevialov, 34* ; 
TtXevxcor, 235. 

— least, ye\ 73. 

— once, i'jdt], 65— How to 
translate it by the partic. 
qjddaag, or by ovx dv qjOd- 
t'otg] see 242. e.f. 

— the beginning, aQyofiei^og, 
235. 

— the suggestion of others, 
aTi dvd()dov iieQcoVy 243. 

Athens, 'Adrivai, 15. 

(O) Athenians, co dr^Qeg 

'^dr^vaioi, 337. 
Attach great importance to, 

77^0 TioXXov noitiadai^ 243. 

— neQi TToXXov noieiaOai or 

r^yelGi^ai, 283*. 
Attempt, neiQaoixca, 121. — 

(^=dare) roX^dco, 239. 
Attend to, top row nQoaeyeiVj 

331. 

a master, etg dh 



daay^Xov cpoirdv, 259. 
Avoid = fly from, cpevyeiv,3o. 

B. 

Bad, xaxog, 20. 

Banished (tobe), g)€i57€'>'> 270. 



I.N J. fix I. 



20^ 



Banishment, cpvyri, 156. 

Barbarian, (^idn^aQog, 132. 

Bare, xpV.og, 235. 

Bathe, lovoixca, ISS (1). 

Battle, jxayri, 73. 

Base, ai^ioog, 35. 

Bear, q^c'Qsiv (?), 60. — dvb/o- 
fica {= endure) refers to 
our power of enduring 
{labours, insults, (fcc), 
214. — ToX^udco ('= susti' 
nere), to bear to do what 
requires courage^ 239, 
note y. 

Beautiful, y.alog, 20. 

Beauty, ^dllog to, 8. 

Because ro, &c.), 221. 
b, dp&' (av, 267. 

Become, yiyvofica (?), 15. 

Before.t ttqlv or ;7oJy 307. 

(= in preference to), 

noo {gen.),243: dv7L,ge?i. 
213. e. 

Beget, ysvrdco, 239. 

Begin, dQiojxai, 100. 

Beginning, aQy/j, 132. 

Behave ill to, y,ay,(^g Tzoieh', 
acc. 35. 

Behold, O^adofiai, 87. 

Belong to, gen, with a^xa. 

Belly, yaazriQ, fj (?), 235. 

Benefit, cocpe)J(o (acc), 82. 

Beseech, dtoLtai, 150, (^e/^ 
149. 6.) 88ri60(j,a(; ider^^r^v. 

Besides, inc{dat.). 288. ;ra()a 
{acc), 299. 



Bethink myself, cpnopnXcOf 
288. 

Between, praSu, 28. 
Beyond, j7«^r< \acc,) 299. 
Bid, xfP.£i;co, 112. 
Bird, onvig. See 15, note g, 
youn^ — , 7'£0666g,2l4:, 



Birth, j'H oc, TO, 150. 
Black, fitlag, 87. 
Blame, ixhixc^oiia), dat., ly/.a- 

Itco, dat, 1S3. 
Body, c(oua, 138. 
Boldly, T9"aoo CO j^, part. 331. 
Both, aagpco, «aQ:oT£^Oi,\ See 

28. 

Both — and. y,cii — yal^ or t£ 

— 112. 
Both in other respects — and 

also, ullcog re y.ai, 278. 
Boy, TzaTg, 15. 
Bra.ve, drdoEiogy 175. 
a danger, yAidvrsveiv ylv^ 

dvvov, 131. (Z. 
Bread, ocoroc, 299. 
Break, uyrvfn, yardyvvixi f?), 

193.' 

(a law), TiaQa^aii (0,223, 

Breast, otIqvov, 193. 
Bring, dyco, 341. 

•assistance to, iTTiy.ovotco, 



dat, also acc. of the thing, 
239. 

forth, t/xtco, (?), 15. 

up, TQECfco, 190. — y-rat- 

devco, 214. 

Tosgcca relates to physi- 
cal, TTCiidcvco to moral 
education : i. e. TQscpm. 



t How to translate ' before * by ( 



, see 242, 4 



£04 



INDEX I. 



to the body^ ^cudsvoj 
to the mind, 

bad news, r^ojTSQov ii 

dyytlltir, 318. ^. 
Brother, abelq.og, 20. 
Burn out, h'Acd(x3, 341. k«i'(jco, 

&C. — sy.avdr^v. 
But; ds — (a fib'v should be in 
the former clause), 38, 
note h. 

— for, 8L [U] did, with acc. 

125. 

Buy, dyoQul^G), 163. 

vTzo, with ge?i» of 
p I agent, 326. 

I TTQog, after to bepr^ais- 
[ ed or blamed bv. 
close by), ttqoc, 319. 

— (== cause), imo, gen, and 
after passive verb, 326. 

~ Jupiter, &c. rtj vri 

70V /I la, 341. 
- - the hands of, vno, gen. 
326. 

— the father's side, nqog 

TTCiTQOg, 319. 

— fives, &c., dva ntvTe, 259. 

— what conduct? tC dv 

TToiovvTeg ; 340. a. 
■ — compulsion, vii dvdyy,7jg, 
326. 

C. 

Calculate, loyiXeo^ai TTQog 

^'fVZGV, 319. 

Ca.amniously : to speak — 
of, Xoidooboiiai, dat, 1 S3. 

Can, dvwafAca {jjossiim)^ 87. 
~OiO^ T8 eiiii (qiieo), 283. 



The former relates ts 
porcer, the latter to con 
d it ion or qualification. 
Aug. of dvtafual 



Can ; that can be ] 




taught, ^ j 
Care for, yJ^dofxai {gen.), 156, 
CarefuUy provide for, ^yea- 
Oai, gen. 149. d. 



Cares, cfQOvzidtg, 150. 
Carry a man over, TTi^Qcuoir, 

188(1). 
Catch (in commission of a 

crime), dliGyoixai (?), 73, 

note s. 
Cause, (UTiov, 100. 
to be set before me, 

TZUQCCTLd^i'l.iai, 188. 

Cavalry, iTTTzeig {pi. of ir- 
nevg), 96. 

Cease, Travouca of what may 
be only a temporary, 
h]y(x) of a final cessation, 
at least for the time. Iriyta 
terminates the action ; 
navopLca breaks its con- 
tinuity, but may, ox m ay 
not, terminate it. They 
govern gen. ,154:. 188 (1). 
Tzavo/j-ai with partic, 239. 

Certain (a), jfg, 12. d. 

Character: of a — to, elvai 
olog {in fin.), 283. 

Charge (enemy), iXavveir slg^ 
sometimes sW, 96. 

— with, iyxaltG), dat. 

of pers., acc. of thing, 183. 



INDEX I. 



205 



Charge.y,ciT?]yooEco,'fgen.l56. 

: prosecute on a — , 

diooy.Eir, gen. of crime, 35. 



am tried on a — . 
cfsvyeiy, gen. of crime, 35. 
Chase, {^r.oa, 154. 
Chastise, y.olullco, F. M., 121. 
Chatter, ;.«?.eco, 2SS. 
Child, naidiov, 150. 
Childless, uTzaig, 150. 
Choose, aloEouuL (?), 190. a. 

: what I choose to 

do, (1 doy.Ei {uoi), 96. See 
Diff. 33. 
Citizen, nolljyig (?). 8. 
City, nohg, rj. 8. — aarv, ro. 
2*4. "L^dTf refers to the^zVe 
or buildings : nohg to the 
citizens. Hence liatv 
never means ^state.^ as 
nohg so often does. The 
aaxv was often an old or 
sacred part of a rro/./c. 
Clever, (jor/oV, 20. ^f/roc, 214. 
Cleverness, cocfla, 24. 
CUng to, E-rcGdai, gen. 149. ri. 
Close by, 67r/, c/a^ 2SS. 7[o6.\ 
319. 

Collect, cv^^oo/too, 175. 
Combat, a disorder, iniy.ov- 

QHv voaop, 239. 
Come, tQxoixai. (?). 112, note 

b. 

: am, — r^yco, j^erf, 

meaning, 206. 

(=be present to as- 
sist), TTaqmaij 92, 



' Come for this (to effect it), 
i OMhv ln\ 701 zcp. 

— ; — (^to fets^i it), 

I i/.OtTp En\ 70V70. 

I off, auaV,u77(X) (ex 01 

I dno), 154. 

I Come on or up, nQoaEiin, 175. 

I next to, E'/EGx^ai, gen, 

! : said that he Vv^ould — , 

tqr^ r.hir, 91. 5, or elttev oti 
r^^oi, 205. e. 
Command (an army), jcqu- 
I 7t-ytco, 52. 

I Commence a war, aoaad^ai 
\ TTfiLEuov noog, acc, 188. 
^ Commit, E:7i7ot7tco, dat. 132. 

' a sin, duao7drco (?) 

I {eig or tteoi, with ace), 154. 



an injury, ddixeip 
ddizlav, 138. 
Compan3^ huTuu, 112. 

'—\ keep — , oujltoDf 

dat. 

Complaint (a),f/(7i>e^Vaa (= a 

iceakncss, \i\ injirmity)^ 

319. 
Concerned, as 

far as this is. 
as lar ) J.^^ 

at least as 

this is. 

Condemn, y.a7ayiyv^J)Gy,^ (?) 

156, obs. 
Condition : on — , e(^ o5 oi 

wrf, 267. 
Confer benefits on, tl nomv^ 

acc, 35. 



t See note on Accuse. 



206 



INDEX I. 



Confess, ofioloytoDj 190. 

Confide to. i/rnQencx), 132. 

Conquer, nxaoj (yincere ; 
gain a victory over ene- 
7nies ;) neQiyiyv^oDai (?), 
overcome [gen.) 53^' In' 
omitted after conquer 
when it stands before 
'battle.' 

Consider, axontw (of care- 
fully examiiiing and re- 
flecting on a point, 100. — 
g:QovTiX(x> (of anxious con- 
sideration), 288. — with 
oneself, ttuq mvxov ((Txott- 

HV or G}i87T7EO&ai), 319. 

Considerable, ovxvog, 163. 
Consideration, a^icofza, 144. 
Constitution, nohiEia, 206. 
Consult, ^ovieveip, 190. 
together, ^ovlevea- 

^ai, 190. 
Consume, avoili6'/.co (?), 235. 
Contemporary with, to be. 

See 183. 182. a. 
Contend with, eQiL^od, dat. 

183. 

Contention, eQig, idog, 183. 

Continuous, ovxvog^ 163. 

Contrary to, TTagd {acc.) 299. 

Contrivance, 7tjv7]y2lA. 

Corn, cLTog, 259. 

Corpse, t'e-AQog, 150. 

Country, x^Q^ country), 
24. — TzaTQig (native coun- 
try or L ative city), 228. 

Crocodile, xQoxodetlog, 28. 

Cross (a river), TieQatovad-ai, 
with aor. pass, 188 (1 ). 



Crowded, daavg, 160. 
Crown, (jit'cpavogy 144. 
Cry, >{^a/co (?), 150. daxovm 
283\ 

Cultivate, acrxtco, 121. Aor, , 

mid.? 190. d. 
Custom : ac- ] 
cording to — , [y.aTccTo 

: as his f elcod^og, 52. 

was, J 

Cut, 78fAVCO (?), 46. 
out, EXKOTlTCOy 132. 

to pieces, yiaiaKOTTimf 

132. 

Cyrus, KvQog, 24:. 

D. 

Damage : to inflict the mos*;, 
TzXetaTa xayiovQyelv {accU" 
sative.) 

Damsel, y^oQrj, 15. 

Dance, lOQdcxi, 168*. 

Danger, mrduvog, 132. 

(to brave, incur, ex- 
pose oneself to a), yuvdvvev^ 
eiv yivdvvov. 

Dare, rol^udco, 239. 

Daughter, OvydnjQ (?), 20. 

Dead, veyQog^ 150. 

Death, d-dvarog, 41. 

Deceive, aTiazdco, e^anardca^ 
41. 

Decide, ^qlvco (?), 92. 
Defend, dixiveiv with 

only, 222. 
Dehberate, ^ovlsveaO^ai tcbqi^ 

gen. 190. 
Delight, r€();7oa, 41. 
Deny, aQvsofiai, 293, 



INDEX I. 



207 



Depends on vou^ h cro! iozi, 
259. 

Deprive of. anooTenbO). 125. 

oztotco, 16S*. 
Desire, inidiuc'oo, gen. Ittl- 

dvfiiu, 156. 
Desist from, ),rja),g'en. 154. 
Despicabie, qaiO.o^', 144. 
Despise, ohycoo^'o:, gen. 

y,UTaqooitojj ge?i. 156. 
Destroy, diaq.x^8iQco (?), 92. 

«;7o;j.iJ|Mt (?), 193. 
Deternained (when or 

though we have. (fee). 

^oJr^r r^uTr, 249. C. 
Die, i9r/;(7xo3, fLTOL>;7;(Txco (?). 

125. 

Differ, ^zafj^/ooj (?), ge?i, 154. 
Difficult, yaunoq, 65^ 214. 
Dine, ^^.Trt'co, 2S8. 
Dining-room, clrco/ecor, ro, 
96, 

Directl)', f i 309. 

■ J hy q:\)di'C0j 240. 

■ to, d&v{gen.), 309. 

Disappear : to make to — , 

aq)(aiZ(x}, 306. 
Disappeared, cfooldog. 65. 
D i sbe h e ve . a r ^'co/ia ^ . 1 32 . 
Disease, tooog, r^, 154. 
Disgraceful, aW/ooq, 35. 
Dishonour, ani^id^co, 319. 
Disobey, drnfjitoh dat. 132. 
Disposition, Idog, ro, 13S. 

700770^", 150. 

Dispute with, /ouco, cZa^. 
183. 

Do, 8, TTQUTTeiv {=agere 
and gerere) denotes gen- 



erahy the exertion of 
power upon an object : 
to do ; to em-ploy oneself 
about something already 
existing ; lience, to man- 
age or administer any 
thing; to conduct a busi- 
ness. Hence used vith 
generul notions, as oidtv, 
fir^dtv, and with adverbs, 
ei'j &c. — TTOtELP [facere), 
to make, to prepare, (tc: 
also 'do' generally, when 
the object is a neuter pro- 
noun, as in ' v:hat m.ust 1 
do V — TToazTHv denotes 
activity generally ; rro/^n-, 
productive activity. 

Do the greatest injury, 
u'cyicja pM.TZTciv (ace.) 

— : to be doing well or ill^ 
ev or y.cc/.ag TTodzTciv. 

— any thing whatever for 
the sake of gain, dno Tzav 
rog y.EodairEii'j 2S3. 

— evil towards, y.ay.ovoytoo, 
222. 

— good to. ev TToiHP, acc. 35. 

— harm to, yc^yovoybco^ 222 

— injustice to, ddiy.eoj, 138. 
- — kind offices to, ev noieiPy 

acc. 35. 

— nothing but, ovdlv lillo 
r- [noiCiv often omitted) 
356. e. 

— service to. dqelm, 82. 

— with (a thing), yodouai, 
dat. (contraction?) 138. 

Dog, y.vojv (?), 41. 



208 



INDEX 1. 



Doors : in — , erdov, 125. 
Down, xaro), 28. 

from, xazd {s;en.)^ 

274. 

Downwards, xccr 03, 28. 
Drachma, dgayjArj, 163. 
Draw up (of an army), raV 
(TCO, 96. 

• , = arrange, ^oj- 

fisco, 206. 
Drawn up four deep, im 

TEtTaQcov TBrd'^d-ai, 288. 
Drink, mvco (?), 144. 
During the disease, y.ara ttjv 

roGov, 274. 
Dwell, oLKtoj, 274. 

E. 

Each, TTag, 46. 
Eagle, dsrog, 36. 
Ear, ovg, coiog, to, 20. 
Early in the morning, jt^jco'/', 
193. 

Easy, Qcidiog. See 65. 
Eat, ia&ico (?), 144. 
Educate, Traidevco, 214. 
Egg, coov, 15. 

Elect = choose, aiQuaO^ai (?), 

{dvri), 190. a. 
Elephant, ilecpag, vzog, c, 35. 
Empty, fidzaiog, 206. 
Enact laws: when x?^£rr«« 

v6fJiovg7 when •^iaOail: 

See 188. 
Endeavour, nuqaoiJiai, 121, 

206. 

iJndure, dv^yoiiai (?), 214. 
Enem"', (the), oi noXeiiioi, 

m. 



Engage in a war, a(>a(T^£ec 
TTohfiov TtQog, acc. 188. 

Enjov, a;7o^cd2!o} (s^enitiveSy 
259. 

Enough: to be — , aoxa>, 
175. 

: more than enough, 

mQirxk 7^v aQKOvvzcov, 



174./. 



, rd aQxovrr^K, (i. e. 



things that suffice). 
Entrust, ijnzQmco, TTiarevoo, 
132. 

to, IniTQ^nco, (lays 

more stress on the entire 
giving up of the thing in 
question, so thatit is now 
quite in the other person's 
hands). — ttigtsvco (gives 
more prominence to the 
fact that I put sufficient 
confidence in the other 
person to entrust the thing 
in question to him), 132. 
jEnvy, g)i9oVo4,^: {v.) q)&oveco, 
I dat, 183. 

I Equestrian exercises, rd Irt- 
\ Ttixd, 163. 

j Equivalent to, dvrl, adv. 
'Err, dfiaQrdvco (?), 154. 
I Escape from, cpEvyco, acc. 87. 
Especially, dlXcog rs xai, 
278. 

: and — , xa/, re- 
ferring to dllog, 346. 
Even, xai, 82. 

Ever, Tzore, 87. aQ^i^y or zt]9 

dqiYiv, 132. 
Every, nag, 46. 



INDEX I. 



20$ 



Every body, nag rig, 52. {gv- 

8e)g oaiig ov, 277.) 
— — day. ai^a Ttaaav, r^fAe- 

Quv, 259. 
five yearSj dta tisvzs 

izojv, 269. 
Evidently. See 239. 
Evil-doer, y.ay.ovQyog, 222. 
Evils {=had things), y,ayJ, 

20. 

Exact (payment), TTQccTzea- 

'Oat, 163. 
Examine (a question, &c.), 

ayoTzeco, 100. 
Except, nlriv {geii.) 

if, nlriv el, 309. 

Excessive, 6 ayav {adv. with 

arL\ 223. 
Excessively, aydp, 228. 
Exclude from, eiQyo), 154. 
Exercise, dayeco, 121. 
Existing things, ra optu, 65. 
Expediency, to avfxq)eoov, 

228. 

Expedient, 228. Vide Ttis. 
Expedition (to go on an), 

ajQarevco, 65. 
Expose myself to a danger, 

yivbvvEVEiv yivdvvov, 132. 
External (things), r« f|oa, 

125. 

Extremely (like). See 87. 
Eye, ocf &aliAog, 132. 



Faiih; marig, rj^ 132. 
Faithful, Ttiarog, 87. 



Fall, TztTZTco, (?), 293.^ 

in with, hzvyydvcoy (?) 

dat. 183. 

Fall into a person's power 
293. 

Family, ytrog, ro, 150. 
Far, far on, noooco : == much^ 

TTOlv, 144. 

from it, TTollov d£Lv,283*. 

Fast, ra^vg, 35. 
Father, Tzari^Q, (?). 20. 
Fault: to find — with, iniTi' 

fidco, dat. 183. 
Fear, cpo^eoixau (fut. mid. 

and pass. : aor. pass.), 41. 

— deidco (of a lasting ap- 

prehensionordread),293*. 

{subst.) cpo^og, 

deog, TO, 326. 

Feasible, di'V(yT6g, 175. 
Feel grateful or thankful, 

y^aQiv eLdivaiyt gen, of 

thing, 222. ^ 

pain, dlyeoj, 20. 

sure, TZBTTOid'a {nsid-co), 

120. 

Fetch (of thing sold),€i'^icr>ca> 

GO, 87.^ 
Fight, f^dyoixat (?), 73. 

againsi,;7f>oVTf^'cc,319 

on horseback, ucf in^ 



7T(OV, 243. 

■ wiih^ lidyoiiai X datx 

183. 

Find, £VQL6y:o^ 87; to be 
found guiliy. dXwvat, with 
gen. 73. 



t For conjug. of elotvai 
t For conjug. see 73. 



see p. 36, note 



210 



INDEX I. 



Find a man at home, ei'dop 

Kazala^tTv, 125. 
■ -fault with, imiffidoo, 

daf. 183. 

■ out, eVQLGKtlV ('?). 

Fire, ndQ ro, 41. 

First (ihe — of all), Iv joTg 

TTQojTog. Sec 259. 
Fit to govern, doxixog, gen. 
Five-and-five, dvcc Tiavie. 
Fix, nriyvviii, 193. 
: am fixed, nknrffa^ 

perf. 2. 
Flatter, xoP.«x£i'oo, 87. 
Flatterer, y.olai, 87. 
Flesh, y,Qeag, ro, (G. aog, cog,) 

144. 

Flog, ixaazTyoco, 235. 

Flow, ^£co (?), 132. 

with a full or strono; 



stream. See 132. 
Flj^ from, cpevyod^ 35. 
for refuge, ^aracpEvyco, 

41. 

• to the assistance of, 

^or]d^tco, dat, 121. 
Follow, tnoiiai, dat. 1S3. 
Folly, ixcoQia, 156. 
Fond of honour, cfikotTiiog^ 

214. 

g^iti, q:iXoy,£Qd}]g, 

319. 

Food (for man), Gizog, 259. 
Foot, TTOvg, TTodog, 6,20. 
For (=in behalf of), ttqo, 
243. 

For, ydg, 41 ; for ojie\'i inte- 
rest, 319. 
such a man as me at 



least, otcp ys iiioi, 279^ 
note t. 

For the sake of, EveTia gen. 

214. xaQiv gen. 250. 
For my sake, yuQiv Efxtjr, 250. 

• praise, stt inaivcg, 288. 

the present at least, to 

ye rvv elvai^ 206. 
this cause or reason, 

8>i ravirjg T?jg aiiiag, ix tov- 

Tov, 224. 
your years, TiQog rd sttj, 

175. 

a long time, gen. xQovov 

GV^VOV, TToXloiv r?fitQ(^Vy 

162*. e. 
Force, ygdrog, ro, 41. 
Forefather, TTQoyovog, 156. 
Foresee, nQoyiyvcoa-AEiv. See 

235. 

Forget, iTTilavd^dfOfiaiy (?) 

gen. 156. 
Form an alliance, avfAfiaxop 

noiEia&ai jiva, 188 (2). 
Former, 6 ttqIv, 156 (27). 
Formerly, ndlai, 28. 
Forth from, ba, ii, gen. 
Fortify, leixi^co, 222, 
Fortune, r?!///, 92. 
Forwardness, ro TZQo&vfxov- 

adj. 60. 
Fountain, 7T7]y7], 132. 
Fourth, rhaQTog, 52. 
Fowl. See 15, note g. 
Free, iXevO^sQog, 150. 

from, dTzaXldzTco, g'm 



154. 

Freedom, iXev&eQui, 150, 
Frequently, noXXdmgy 8, 



INDEX I. 



21 i 



Friend, qllog, 20. 

Fiom (after receive, learii^ 

brings come), nuod, 299. 

vno {ge?i.)^ 326. 
(after heai\) ttqo^ 

(gen.), 319. 
our very birth, evi^vg 

yei oLievoi, 309. 

fear, irzo dtovg, 326. 
— — (of cause), sign of dat. 
Front, 6 TTQoa&ev, 283*. 
Full of, fieaiog, 150. 
Full speed (at\ aicc y,odzog, 

41. 

Future (the), jo fieV.or. 235. 
G. 

Gain, -/.eoduiiod, y^iodog, to, 
233\ 

Gate, nvXrj, 193. 

General, GToairiydg, 52. 

Gentle, TTQaog (?) 13S. 

Geometer, yeauerQr^g, ov, 24. 

Get, yadoixiu (of what will 
be retained as a posses- 
sion)^ 87. — Tvy/diEiv with 
g-e/z. (of what is obtained 
accidentally^ by ^oorf 
Z^^c^•, &c.) 183, note b. — 
evQi6/,8a^ai (to get posses- 
sion of an object sought 
for). 

— 7L';7«^'w, gen. 183, note 
b. EVQiayouai, 188. 

— hold of, yoazeoD, 163. 
off, dfTuV.dzKX) iy. or urzo, 

154. 

Get (teeth, (fcc.) g;i;ca, 214. 

— taught, didday.ofxca, 188. 



Get the better of, 

(gen.), 87. nsQieiiAi [gen.\ 
156. 
Gift, dojoovy 175. 
Give, didcofxi, 41. 
one trouble; ;7oVo^' or 



214. 

orders, eTzizdzzco, 359. 

a share of, ,uezudido^ui, 

175. 

some of, fiezadLdo3U[f 



175. 

a taste of, -/ezJf ^i^, acc. of 

pers., gen. of thing. 

to taste, yevix) {gen. of 

thing), 150. 

Given : to be — , doztog^ 144. 

Gladl)^, f^dtcog. 

Go, EQ/oiiai (?); 112. 

— away, aTTsif^i {=ioill go 
away. See 65, note g), 
— antoy^oixai, 112. 

— in to, Hctoyouai naqa 
lll.d. 

— into, el680'/ofica, 112. 

— on an expedition, ozQa' 

TSVOD, 65. 

— and do a thing, 350 (A), 
349. 

God, Oeog, 

Gold, yovaog, 6, as a sum of 
gold money, ynv6Lov, 35. 

Golden, yovaeog, ovg, 144. 

Good, dyuOog — dixmo^v, uqu* 
zog, 35. 

Govern, doyco {gen.)^ 150. 

Government, doyj], 132, 

Gratify, yaQiXouai, 273» 

Great, ^tyug (?). 



212 



INDEX 1. 



Greater, greatest, ^ue/fooy, 
{Aty^Gzog, 46. 

Greatly (with injure, bene- 
fit, &C.), lAb'ya. 

= far^ TTolv, 156. 

Greece. 'EXXdg, adog, rj, 144. 

Greek, '^ED.rjv. ijvog, 144. 

Grudge, qjO^ovt'o^y gen. of ob- 
ject, dat, of pers. 183. 

Guard, q)vldT7oo, 190. e. 

against, q)vld7T8G&ai^ 

2CC. 190. 

Guard, ) ") ^ r \ 

Guardian, \ 9^^'^^' 

H. 

Habit: in the — of perform- 
ing, 7T()(xyaiy.6g,gen.l4,9. a. 

Hair, dQi^, ^^Q^y/'Q^ ^» 17^5- 

Half, 7jia.6i'g. See 59. 

Hand, /f/^, i), (?) 20. ^ 

Hang oneself, dTzdyxoficci, 
188,(1). 

Happen, Ttjx^hco.'t 242. 6. 

Happened : what had — , to 
yeyovog. 

Happy, ddai'i-mv, ovog, 20. 

Harass, Tzoror or Ttqayixara 
naQ^itiv^ 214. 

Hard, lalenog, 65, 214. 

Hare, lay(og. See 15. 

Harm : come to some — , 
nciddv Ti (suffer some- 
thing). 

Haste, aTTovdt], 183. 

Have, k'xco. See 15, note i. 

a child taught, didda- 

HO^ai, 125, t. 



Have anopp^ortunity; wher, 
or though you have, &c. 
250. 

a narrow escape, 7rc<(?« 

fU'AQOV i)M8iv, 299. 

. ^(^Q Qliyof 

diacpsvysiv, 299. 

any regard for, xtldo 

156. 

cjonfidence in, ninoix^a 
193. 

— done supper, dno deiTZ 
vov yertaOai, 243. 

— in one's hand, dia 
Qog eyatv, 269. 

lost, OT8Q80Jy 168^. 

no fear of, daootoj, acc. 



138. 

slain a man with one's 

own hand, avT6)[S(Q uvai^ 
299 

the tooth ache (= suf 

fer pain in my teeth), 
d7.y&) tovg odovrag- See 
19*. b. 

Head, ^ecpalij, 20. 

Hear, d^ovco, F. M. 92. — on 
its government, see 14S. 

Hearing: there is nothing 
like — , ovdsv oiov dxovaat 
278. 

Heavy, ^aQvg, 183. 
Heavy-armed soldier, oTzh'' 

T/]g^ 154. 
Hen, oQvig. See 15, note g. 
Henceforth, to ano Tovds^ 

Hercules, 'HQa>cl7]g, 183. 



t For conjug. -rvvy^dvo), see 183. 



INDEX 1. 



213 



Here, h&dds, 28, 

Hide, dooci, 35. 

>winico, arro'AovrrKXi. 

125. 
Hiil. /,6q:o^\ 2SS. 
Hiiidefj y.oo/.icx), clno'/.co/.Lco, 

293. 

Rue^i^iG&ovuca, ISS. 
Hit (a mark). Tvy//aco, 1S3. 
note b. 

Hold a magistracy or office, 

ao'/Eii' cco^rr, 132. 
cheap. o/.iyoooHo [gen.) 

156. 

my tongue about. 

(ii(X):7uoj, F. 31. sr. 
■ (without ace). 

ar/dco. F. M. 270. 
Home : at — , hdor, 125. 
to find a man at — . 

u dov 'AUTCila'^Hv. 125: 
Honey, fxih, nog, tc, 132. 
Honorable, y.cdog. 32. 
Honour, rjur, 150. 
Hope. i),7Tuco, ST. 
Hoplite. onliT^g, 154. 
Horn, yjoag, ro, (?) 35. 
Hor?e. ITT nog, 15. 

soldier. InnEvg, 96. 

House, ohog, 41. 
How much. noGor, ST. 
Hunting. ^i;occ, 154. 
Hurt; pAmoo, S2. 

I. 

I at least, ^';'co;.'f, 155. 
I for my part, Eyooye, 156. 
Idle, aoyog, 299. 



If an)' body has ... it is you, 
t\ Tig '/at a/log {Jl^i^y &c.) 
174. d. 

— it is agreeable to yon, g 

COL 30V/,0!JJ:lCp laii. 206. 

— it should appear that I . . . 
Id V or a 1 1 DDL I a i. 6zc. iv i th 
fartic. 239, note c. 

— you are willing, u coi 
flovXoutrq) sail, 206. 

in, y.ci'/.ojg, S. 

— adj.= 2veak),uG^eii;g,3l9. 
Imitate, uiiaouai. 
Immediately, a'.^i'?, 309. — 

how to translate it by 

Cfddaag, (fcc. see 242./. 
on his arrival, 

cixfl-g r//,cor, 309. 
Immortal, df^diaiog, 125. 
Impiety, d-tSua, 156. 
Impious. dyoGLog, 299. das- 

3/;g, 156. 
Impossible, ddirurog. 65. 
Impudence, di aidcia, ST. 
Impunity: with — , yaiom- 

{rejoicing). 
In addition to, ha 'dcit.) 2SS. 

Tioog TovToig, 319. 

— (in answer to ichere 7) h, 
dat. 259. 

— (a man's) power, hlicith 
dat. of the person. 65. 

— (after to conquer): omit- 
__ted, 131. e. 

— all respects. Trdvra^ 134 
y.azd rrdiTa, 274. 

— an uncommon degree, 

235. 



t For coning of r 



see 133. 



214 



INDEX I. 



In behalf of, ttqo, 243. 

— comparison of, nQo^y 3) 9. 
_ ( = in doors), tvdov^ 125. 

• — preference to. avxi, 214. 

— proportion to, Kaxd {ace), 
274. 

' — reality, rw oni, 65. 

— reference to, f^-, 259. 
TTQog, acc. 319. 

— (space of time), avd, 259. 

— tiie time of, lo it It gen, 
65. 

habit of doing, nQay.- 

TiKog, 150. 
world, who ? rig ttots, 

150. 

Incur a danger, xivdvveveiv 

yiivdvvov, 132. 

danger, >iivdvv£V£iv,13l, 

Indeed, fitv, 38, note f. 
Infinitely many, fiVQiot, 228. 
Infirmity, do\>tv£ia, 319. 
Inflict damage on, y^ay^ovQ- 

pw, 222. 
Injure = hurt, ^XcctiicOj 82. 

ddixsca, 138. 
Injury : do an— to, ^XaTrrco. 
Injury: to commit an — , 

ddixsLV ddr/Jav, 138. 
Injustice, ddiyia, 82. to do — 

to, ddixtco, 138. 
Insolence, ifgig, ?/, 138. 
Insolent person, i^Qiarrig. 
Instead of, dvrl, 214. 
Insult, v^Qi^cOf acc. v^Qig, rj, 

138. 

Interest for a man's — to be 
translated bp nqog, loith 
the gen. of ^person, 319. 



Intermediate, fiera^v, 26. 
Into, tig, acc. 
Intoxication. (abO^)], 326. 
Is a good 
thing for, 

— advantage- 
ous to, 

— character- ,^r^'T^,, 
istic of, (^'^^^)' 219. 

— consistent 
with, 

— like, 

— enough, or sufficient forj 
ccQxel, 175. 

— to be, iitllu eaaod^at^ 
283. A. 

— of a character to, iazh 
oiog, 283. b. 

It being disgraceful, aiaxQov 
or, 250. 

— being evident, dJiXov or, 
250. 

— being fit, TzgoaTjyov, 250. 

— beiijg impossible, ddwa- 
70V ov, 250. 

— being incumbent, ttqogI]' 
yov, 250. 

— being plain, ^ryP.oi^oV, 250. 

— being possible, dwaiov 
ov, 250, 

— depends on you, ip col 
hji, 259. 

— is allowed {licet), t^eaii, 
112. 

— is -expedient, GVfjicpEQti, 
dat. 228. 

— is necessary, drdyy^ 
{omitting the verb), 65. 

— is not a thing that every 



INDEX I. 



215 



body can do, ov navxog 
ioTi, 158. 

It is not every body that 

can, 163, 283. 
' — is possible, olovri io7iy233. 

— is profitable, avfxq)£oe(, 
dat., 228. 

— is right, oQdojg f/^ei, 222. 

— is right that, diKaiov laii, 
358. a. 

— IS the nature of, Tzeqjvxa, 
sqivv, 214. 

— is the part of, s6ti (gen.), 

^62^/i. 

J. 

Jaw, yvd^og, rj, 20. 

Journey (v.), noqevoiiai, 24. 
6Tt)louai(l\ 188 (1). 

Judge, y^QiTYig (general term), 
8. — dtxaazi^g (only of a 
judge in the strict sense), 
239, x: [verb) xqivco, 92. 

Jupiter, Zevgy Jiog, &c. voc. 
Zei, 193. 

Just, dtxaiog, 87. 

Just as he was, ^tzsq or coV 
7T8Q eJ'/^evj 351. 

K. 

Keep company with, b^i- 

)Jco, dat. 183. 
(for one's self), aiQua- 

d^ai, 188. 
Kill, anoy.7eiv(xi (?), 82. 
King, ^aGiXtvg, 24. 
Knee, yow, yovar^ to, 20. 
Knock out, ixxoTTTco (aor 2 

pass.), 132. 



Know, oida (of positive 
knoioledge)^ 73. — yiyrc^G- 
'/.CO (seek to become ac- 
quainted with), aor. ty^ 
rcov, know (from ac- 
quaintance with it) : 
(wiih partic, 229.) 

(yiyrcoGy.oo), 235. 

how, Eniazaixai (?). 



293. 



: I don't— , ov>i 'iico^or 
ovK oida, 67. 

L. 

Labour, Ttovog, (v. novtco,) 
154. 

Laid myself down, xarsxli- 

{>nv, 19G. 
Lamb, uixvog, 41. 
Large, fxtyag. 

(At) last, 70 relevraiov, 34*. 

/• , , 

Laugh, y8)Mco, aaofxai, ^ 
222. I F. 



at, xarayeldco, 



Hi 



278. ' j 

Laughter, ysloog, corog, 278. 
Law, 'pojuog, 132. 
Lawful, {}8i^[g, {=fas), 65. 

oaiog^ dUaiog, 293. 
Lay down, y.aTari&r^ixi, 163. 

eggs, tUtco (?), 15. 

to the charge of, y^arri 

yoQtw, 156. 

waste, T^'wrco (?), 46. 

Lazy, doyog, 299. 

Lead, ayco, 341. 

Lead (of a road), gp/^eo, 73 

Leaf, q!.vlXor, 214. 



213 INDE 

Leap, aXlouca, 273. 
Leanij (with ijartic) f^iav- 

^drco (?), 239. 
Leather bottle, aaxog, 15. 
Leave off, hiyco, gen., 154. 

TTUVOfiai, 188 (1 ). 

Leisure, (Jxohjy 112. 
Let for hire, fxiaOoco, 188. 
Liberty, ehvdeQia, 150. 
Lie dowD, y.aiayJ,[voixai 

Tsy.lt&jjv), 190. 
luife, ^loc, 28. by hi fin, ^ to 

rfji;, 150. 

Lift up, aiQEiv, 188^(2). 
Like a dog, ywog dixTjv, 
250. 

ofAoiog, {flat.), 183. 

dyuTidco, 52. 

to do it = do it gladly 

(r^dtcog). 
— should like to . . . ^^^g- 

00^ av, 87. 
, should extremely like 

to . . . Tidiaz av, 87. 
Likely, dyog {iieiit. joart.), 

331. 

Lily, yqlvov (?), 144. 
Little (a little), oA/^ro, 168*. 
Live, fctoa, 131. d. note b. 
(= spend one's life), 

diaTelsco, 60. 
about the same time, 

y.aru top avTov yoovov ys- 

vsodat, 183. 
Long (of thne), (jvyrog, 163. 

^.axQog, 214. 
ago, ndlai, 28. 



[ I. 

Loss : to be at a — , drtffoito^ 
99. 

Love, (fOJco (of love arising 
from regard, and the per- 
ception of good and ami- 
able qualities), 20. — dya- 
Tzdco (stronger: implying 
affection arising from the 
heart, &c.), 52. — igdcot 
(of the passion of love), 
274. 

Lover of self, cpilavrog, 222. 
Lower, 6 yidrca {art. with 
adv.) 

M. 

Madness, ^arU, 24. 
Magistracy, aQxri, 132. 
Maiden, yoQr^, 15. 
Maintain, rotcpoi (?), 190. 
Make to cease, navm, gen 

of that from which, 154. 
to disappear, «g)a^/fco 

206. 

a great point of, mi)t 

nollov noiHad^ai or ijhcj 
{)ai, 283. 

progress, TTQoycoQtai, 

274. 

immense (or aston- 
ishing) progress, {^avfiacj- 

70V OaOV 77Q0yCOQ8LV, 273. c. 

self-interest the object 

of one's life, TTQog to avfi- 
qtQov ^fiv, 228. 

for one's interest, nva:. 

TTQog {gen.\ 319. 



t Aorist generally of sensual love, but epaaOai rvpawiSos common. 
{Fape.) 



INDEX I. 



217 



Male, doQiiv, 150. 
Man, 46' [Obs.) 

: am not a man, 283, 

note a. 
Slanage, Trndrrco, 8. 
Many, nolvg, 46. the many. 

Ql Tl0).).0l\ 46. 

— times as many or 

much, nollanldaiOL {ai, «), 
175. 

numeroaSj noX- 



Xa7i7,daioi, 175. 
March, D.avvco (?), ttoqevo- 
jxaiy 24. 

of a single soldier, 

f7ut (J), 96. 
i>Iare, innog, tj, 15. 
Mark, a-AOTzog^ 183, b. 
Market-place, uyogd, 154. 
Master, deanoirig, 222. 
di8day.ulog (= teach- 
er), 168. 

(v.) y.Qurtco, (gen.), 

156. 

May (one — ), a^eazi, 222. 
{though or whe}i I 

may), tzuqov, 250. 
Meet, ivTvyydvco, dat. 183. 
Might (one—), i^r^v, 222. 
[lohen or though /, 

&c. might,) ;7aooV, 250. 
Mild, 7TQaog(l), 138. 
Milk, 7ctA«, ydla'AT, to, 132. 
Mina, ^^-a, 82. 
Mind (as the seat of the 

passions), ^vfiog, 121. 
Mine, ^^u6g, 20. 
Minerva, A&riva, 3_41. 
Misdeed, y,axovQyr]iia, ro,222. 

10 



Miserable, c/Mhog, 273. 
Misfortune, diGTrodyca, 125. 
Miss, duaordrco, [gen.), 154. 
Moderate (in desires, &c.), 

COJCfOCOVj 125, u. 

Moderation, / ocDCfooamri, 
Modesty, ^ 125, u. 
Molest, Tzoyop or TTodyfiara 

TTUQt^Ed', 214. 

Money, yoruuza, 125. 
iMonth, ,«/^'z^, 0, 138. 
More than (-=beycnd), rra- 
gd (ace), 299. 

— than, iicOj.ov — //, 



41. 



than any other single 



person, 174. e. 
enousfh. 



nsoiTza 



xSiv aQy.ovrTcop, 174, f. 

could have been 



expected, &:c., 168. d. 
More (after a numeral,) €^f, 
193. 

Morning : early in the — , 

TTQCoty 193. 

Morrow (the), rj avniov, 26. 
Mortal, ^vrjTog, 125. 
Most, nleTazoi, 175. 

of all, ndjAGTCi TzdvTCOVy 

309. 

his time, tu nolld^ 



137. 

Most men, or people, ol noX' 
lo!, 46. 

Mostly, 7d TToUd, 137, 282. 
Mother, fii^i?jo (?), 20. 
Move, yji'tco, 28. 
Mourn for, rOlsa^ai^acc), 
188(1). 



218 INDE 

Much, Tiolvgy 46. 

(with compar.)^ nok- 

l^, 16S^ 
Multitude (the), ol ttoIIol, 

46. 

Murder (to be tried for), 

qjevyeiv (^o't^ov^ 35. 
Murderer (the actual — ), 

avToxeiQ, 299. 
Must (= ought), dai, 60. 
, how translated by 

verbals in rtog, 114. 
My, ii^og, 20. 

N. 

Name (by name\ ovoixa, to, 

138. 137. a. 
Named : to be — after, ovofia 

£)[siv Ini Tivog^ 288. 
Nation, 'id^vog, zo, 65. 
Natural. See 331. 
Nature: it is the — of, &c., 

213. a. 

Near, Tzilag, 28. ttXt^giov, 

309. iyyvg, gen, 150. 
Nearly, ollyov daiv or oXiyov 

alone, 28d*. 
related to, iyyvrara 

thai yivovg^ 149, e. 
Necessary : it is — , avdynT], 

65. 

— , it would be — to, 

(verbal in rsog), 114. 

Necessity, avdyyn], 65. 

Need, if there is any, idv ri 
dsTj, or SL 7L dsoi, 92. 

Neighbour, 6 nlriaiov, 28. 

Neither — nor, ovra — ovrSy 
fti^te — iii^TS, 112. 



K. I. 

Neither — nor yet, ovts—oih 
ds, firjre — fxrids, 112. 

Neptune, IIoGeidoov, ^vog (?), 
341. 

Nevertheless, oficog, 288. 
Next, 6 ixo(X£vogy gen, 149. 
d. 

day, rj avQiov, 26. on 

the — , TTi v(j78Qaia, 183. 

Nightfall, about, vtto rvxra, 
326. 

Nightingale, d7]dc6v{l\ 341. 
No, by Jupiter, (fee, i^a /lia, 
341. 

— longer, omiri, fAijKtri, 
112. 

Nobody, ovdsig, f^7]deig, 112. 

Nose, Qig, Qivog, rj, 35. 

Nostril, 35. 

Not, 107-111. 

Not a single person, ovda 

slg, firjds elg, 112. 
at all, ovdev {ri), firjdtp 

(rO, 150. 

— even, ovds, 82. fjir^ds, 112. 

— only — but also, ovx on 
— dXla 'Aai, 82. 

— yet, ovTico, 214. 
Nourish, rgaqjco, 190. 
Now, i^vv, 28. (= already/) 

Tqdi], 65. 

o. ^ 

O Athenians, & drdQsg ''A&yi- 

Obey, nud^ea^ai, dat, 120. 
Obtain, rvjxdvcoj gen., 183j 
note b. 

Occasion : if or when th^^re 



INDEX I. 



219 



is any — , ear ri dtri, or h 

ri dtoij 92. 
Of {themselves^ myself. 

&C.), ocip savToov, 243. 
Of old, (as adj.) I 6 Tidlai, 



- times. 



26. 



Of those days, 6 tots, 26. 
Olfer, TzaQr/co, 214. 

for sale, Ticoleoj, 86*. c. 

Offices : do kind — to. See 
Do. 

Often, TToUdyug, 8. 
Ointment, fxvQov, 150. 
Old, ol ndlai, 26. 
On account of, ^id {acc.\ 
269. ere-xa, {gen.), 214. 

— an understanding that, 

£711 7Q), 288. 

' - condition that, iqj oj, 267. 

CpTEy 2^8. 

. — condition of being . . . , 
ini rm tlvai^ &c. 
horseback, icp innov or 
288. 

— (space or time), avdy 259. 

— the contrary, 137. d, 

— the father's side, TTQog 
TtarQog, 319. 

the next day, varE- 
qaia, 183. 

— the plea that, ca? ovtcog, 
86*. 

— your account, ^la os, 
269. 

Once anai, 341. 
One, eig {fiia, av), 87. 
One = a person, rig. 

r may, t^san, 222. 

. — might, i^r^rj 222. 



One more, hi eig, 193. 
who has never tasted, 

&c., dyevotog, 150, 
who has slain another 

with his own hand, avro- 

XeiQ, 29. 
One's neighbour, 6 nlmlov, 

28. 

own things, ta savrov 



Only 

Open, dvoiyco, dv ecp^^a, P erf. 1. 
: stand — , dvkorm, 

Perf.2. 
Openly, dno no) TTQOcpavovg, 

243. 

Or, (in doiA)le questions), ij, 

after 7t6z£qov, 328. 
Or both, ^ dfA.q)n78Qay 345. 
Order, Kalavco, (the loeakest 

word = bid, tell,) 112. — 

iTtlTaTTCO, 

rdaaco, 96. iTtiTdtrco, 



359. rdlig^^G. 

(in good), svidxrog 



96. 

Other (the — party), o/ etsook 
46. 

Others (the), ot alXoi, 46. 
Ought, to; (?), 60, 92 
117. 

: what we — , ra ds- 

orra, a XQV^ ^0^* 
Ours, TjiibTtQog, 24. 
Out of, fx, fJ, gen. 224. ^Jco, 
309. i/ro, 326. 

the way, ifi^rodm^ 



293. 

Outside, 125 



220 



INDEX I. 



Outside : the people outside, 
01 «|a). 

Outward (things), rix, a^oa, 
125. 

Overcome, neQiyiyvonai, 

{gen.\ 156. 
Overlook, ImcAonicOy 206. 
Own, to be translated by 

gen. savzov^avTovJiavzoov, 

&c.) 

P. 

Pain (v.), IvTitco, 41. 
Pained , to be — , alysco, 20. 
Parent, yovEvgy 121. 
Part (the greater), 59. e, and 
58. 

• (it is the), son, with 

gen. 163. 
Passion (anger), 'Ov/A,6g, 121. 
Passions (the), Ttdx^ea, jy, 150. 
Pay, (n.), fiiax^ogj 87. 
attention to, top vovv 

noQct/^eiv, or TTQOoexsiVy dat. 

331. 

close attention to, nQog 

ToTg TTQclyixacSi ylyvEa&ai, 
319. 

Peace, elqrifri, 214. 
Peacock, racoV, 341. 
Peloponnesus, neloTzowrj- 

cog, 71, 60. 
People, 24; = persons {ol 

— ), see 29, z. 
Perceive, aiad^dvo^ai, (?), 

190, 239. 
Perform a service, vTZQijarico, 

52. 

Perfume, fjivQov, 150. 



Perish, aTZ-oXXvfiai, 193, Sc 
Permit, idco (augm. ?), 12L 
Persian, TleQGrjg, ov, 24. 
Pereon, aco/icc, 138. 
Persuade, 7ZHn(o {ace), 12ft 
Philip, QHXinnoq, 24. 
Philosopher, cpd6aoq)og, 15. 
Physician, iaiQog, 154. 
Piety, evoi^eia, 156. 
Pious, evoe^i^g, J 56. 
Pitcher, pr(>a, 193. 
Pity (v.), 150; (phrase) 269. 

0ixTeiQ03, di oi>iTov 'iieiv. 
Place guards, ^Aaraarriaac- 

d^at cpvXaxag, 188 (2). 
Place on, ImxL&rnJt, dat. 144. 
Plea. See 86*. Examp. c. 
Pleasant, ribvg, 214. 
Please, dqEay-co, dat. 331. 
: what I — , d fioi do- 

xa, 96. 
Pleasure, to take, ^doixat. 
Plot against, im^ovXevco, dat. 

183. 

Pluck, TiXlsiv, 188(1). 

Plunder, diaQ7Td^co,fut. mid. 
(sometimes dcco, B.), (gen- 
eral term plunder, rob,) 
144. — Xri'i^oixai (make 
6oo^z,),235. 

Poet, noiritrig, 24. 

Possess, ^syarjixai, 87. Fut. ? 
See 199. 

Possession, xz^/ea, ro, 87. 

Possible, dvvazog, 65. 

it is, oioj' T£ £(jrt, 

283. a. 

■ (it is ne t), ovu &:Tif^ 

84. 283. a. 



INDEX I. 



22^ 



Pot. )fi'T()tt, 193. 

Power: in the- -of. inl,2i'llh 
dat of person^ 65. 

Powerful, dwarog^ 16S*. 

Practise, aayJco, (general 
term) 121.— f«£Afz'«co, (re- 
fers to the carefulness 
with Yv^hich the thing is 
practised,) 163. 

Praise, inaivtco, F. M., 60. 

Praiseworthy, inaiveiog, 60. 

Pray doiiH do this, ov iiri 
\Yi\hfut, 287*. e. 

Preference : in — of, avri 
{gen), 214 

Present, naq^ov, partic. 

Present circumstances, con- 
dition, &c., ra naQovia, 
52. See 293*. 

, as adj, 6 vvv, 26. 

Prevent, ifinodojp elvai ^;/, or 
fir] ov, {with infin,) xg^Ai'oo, 
anoK(xi},vo3. See 293*. 

Procure, evQiaKOfiai, 188 (2). 

Produce (laughter), tzouco. 

Production, '^Qyov, 121. 

Pronounce happv, evdai^ori- 
Coj, 150. 

Property : — generally omit- 
ted, the art. being put in 
neiit. pL See Diff. 10. 

Prosecute, dico-Asiv, 35. 

Prosecuted (to be), q^Evyeiv, 

DO. 

Prosper, evrvx^'(o, 92. 
Protect myself, auvvofiai, 
222 



Provide, TraQaaxsva^oo, 188 




for one's safety, 



aaOai ocoTrjoiagy 150. 

Prudent. Gojqgojv (one whose 
thoughtfulness and sound 
sense has become a habit), 
125, u. — q:o6nf.tog (one who 
pai/s attention to his con- 
duct and character), 144.t 

Punish, xolarco, F. M., 121. 

Punished (to be), dixriv dido- 
rat, or dovvai, gen. of 
thing, dat. of person by 
whom, 228. 

Pupil, (xadrjTrig, 168*. 

Purchase, ayoQc/Zco, 163. 

Pursue, dic6'Aoo {fut. mid. 
best), 35. 

Put forth (naturally), q)vco, 
214. 

— — off, £'a8vC0, 125. 

on, h'dvco, 125. 

to death, aTTOKTELvco (?), 

82. 

: to — a man over a riv- 
er, neQaiovv {iivaj, 183, 

a. 

Gluick, raxvg, 35. 
(Quickly, rayv, 35. 
{partic), 242./. 

R. 

Race, ylvog, to, 100. 
Rail at, Xoidoosouca, dative 
183. 



t (ppdvifiov Sel yivtoBai rov uzWovra a(j(ppova latcQaiy {CyrO'p. Ll. 1, 10)* 



222 



INDEX 1. 



Raise a war, iyeioeiv noleixov, 
193. 

Rank, rdhg, 96. 
Rascal, xaxovQyog, 222. 
Rather than, fiu/dov ij, 191. 

Ravage, t^'iivcxi (?), 46. 
Ready, sroi^og, 65. 
Reality (in), rep ovn, 65. 
Really, tq5 ovn, 65. 
Rebuke, sTiizi^dco, dat, 183. 
Receive, rvyidvcoj 183, b. la- 

^eiv, 190. 1 ). ^4o|t^af , 190. 3). 
Reconcile, dialveiv, 190. 
Reconciled : to be — to each 

other, diaXvea{)^ai nqog 

(ace), 190. 
Rejoice, ijdofiai, (refers to the 

feeling of delight; to its 

sensual gratification), 20. 

— yaiQcoy (general term), 

239. 

Relations, rtQoariy.ovreg, 283. 
Remain, with, TzaoaixerG), 
222. 

Remarkably, diacfsgovrcogy 
235. 

Remember, iiiuvrniai,^ gen. 

156, 239. 
Repel, dfAVfOfxat (ace), 222. 
Repent, fxerafieXci ^oi, 239. 
Reputation, dh^oofAa, to, 144. 
Require, see Want, 
Requ\tejd^vvofxa(.{acc.)^222, 
Rest (of the), 6 dllog, 46. 
Restore an exile, -Aardyod, 

331. 



Restrain by punishment, 

xo;iaC(«, F. M., 120. 
Return from banishment^ 

Return like for like, lolg 

o^OLOig dfivvsod^af, 222. 
thanks for, x^Q^^ 

eldsvai {gen, of thing), 222. 

See 73, note q. 
Revenge myself, diivvoi.iai, 

ace, 222. 
Reverence, aid80[xai, acc.^ 

138. 

Rhinoceros, pivoxsQoog, cotog 
35. 

Rich, nlovaiog. 
Ride, llavvEiv (?), 41. 
on horseback, ^cp innm 

o^HGdai, eg) itttzco TZOQEved- 

dai, 288. 
Right, oniog, dixaiog, 293. 
, it is, oQO^g ij^if 

222. 

River, norajxog, 132. 

Road, odog, rj, 73. 

home, rj oixade odog, 

331. ^ 
Rock, TztzQu, 235. 
Roman, 'Pco/xaTog, 293. 
Rule over, aQX(o, (gen.) 
Run, r^f/oo (dQaix), 65. 
to the assistance of, 

^o7]d8(o {dat.\ 121. 
away from, anohb- 

QdoK(o, acc, 138. 
Running, the act of, dQOfiog^ 

183. 



t Fox fut. see 199- 



INDEX I. 



Safe, a(jgp«^?;i,% 299. 

Safety, ducpdleia, 193. 

(from danger), d(j- 

qjdlsia, 299. 

Said, elrzov, 60. 

Sail away, dTzoTzJJco (?), 188. 

Sale. See Offer. 

Same, 6 avzog, 41. 

Say, &c. ^£700 {= speak, of 
a connected speech ; also 
tell). — siTTSLv (60, c), q)7]fii 
(= say). — PwCcAai/ (= chat- 
ter, talk: especially of 
children who are begin- 
ning to speak). — cpd<jy.co 
[=give out; intimating 
that the thing is not so), 
222. 

Science, Bniarrnjiri, 293. 
Scold, loidoQtofxai, dat. 183. 
Scourge, fiaazTyoco, 235. 
Scythian, 2Jy.vd-rjgy ov, 24. 
Sea, d-dXacjcja, 154. 
Secretly, 242. c (2) ; part, 

Xad^cav, 241. 
Security, d6q)dleia, 299. 
See (= behold), •dedoiiai, 87. 
— (with part,), oQaco (?), 

73, 239.^ 
Seek, C^reoa, 100. 
Seems (good, videtur), doxsT, 

96. 

Self, avTog, 39 (1). 

love, (filavTia, 228. 

— — loving, cpilavTog, 228. 
^ — restraint, ocoqjQoovvri, 
125. 

Selfish, cfllavtog, 228. 



Selfishness, qilavna, 228 
Sell, 7zcd7Jco, 87. 
Send, GTtllm, 188, (1). 
(a boy) to a master, 

Hg didaoxdlov niyLnuv, 259. 

for, fXEiaTTeixTTOfAca, 259 

Senseless, dp67]Tog, 214. 
Sensible, cpQonfwg, 140. 
Sensual pleasures, at ^caza 

TO oSiixa ydovuL, 274. 
Serve, vTzrjQszeco, dat. 52. 
Service: do a — to, cogjsAsoa, 

Set about, iTrr/eiQsco dat. 121 

out, 770Q8VOpiaf, 24. 

Severe, jj^^^i'^;, 183. 
Shameless, dvaidr/g, 87. 
Shamelessness, dvaidsca, 87. 
Shed tears, da-AQvco, 282. 
Sheep, 67^, 41. 
Ship, (?), 125. 
Should, del (?), 60. 
Shown, having, iTtidedeiyfis* 

vog, 188, 3. 
Shun = fly from, cpevyo, 35. 
Silence, oicom], 96. 
Silently, aiylj, 175. 
Sin, dfxaQzdTco, eig or tteqi 
(with accus.),against,\b^ 
Sing, «5c», F. M. 168*.^^ 

better, y.dlliov ddsiVj 

168^ 

Single (not a single person)j 

ovds eig: ^Jtrfis eig, 112. 
Slave, dovlog, 20. 
Sleep (to), xoiixdofiat, sub, 
132. 

Slow, [^Qadvg, 175. 

. am slow to do it =^ 



224 INDE 

will do it hy leisure^ (^Xo7ai, 
112. Diff. 35. 

Slowly, (jyolxi (literally hy 
leisure: see 112.) — ^qa- 
dtcog^ 175. 
Smell of, o'Cco (?), 150 ^ 
So — as to, oodTf with injiii., 
212. 

— great, TtjlrAovrog, 22S. 

— many, looog, Toaoade, 
roaovTog, 65. 

— powerful, jr^hy^ovzog, 228. 

— that, oa(T7£ with infin. or 
indie. ^ 212. 

— , to be, ovT(og r/eiv, 
- — to say, (hg 'inog htteTv, 144. 
Socrates, ^co><^«r7^?. See 15, 
note f. 

Soldier, GTQaTioizrjg, ov, 22S. 
Solon, 2^6lcov, oDvog, 183. 
Some, eoziv oiy evioi, 264. 

others, ot ^tv — ot 

dt', 41. 

Sometimes, e^ziv ore, 204. 
Somewhere, eativ onov, 264. 
Son, Tzaig (general term, 

15). — vtog, (with respect 

to his parents). — often 

omitted, 23. b. 
Sophroniscus, Zo3(pQovia>iog, 

24. 
Soul, xpvyj]. 

Spare, cfeidoiiai (genitive), 

156. 
Speak, )Jy(o, 35. 
calumnionsly of, Iol- 

doQtOfiai, dat. 183. 
ill of, 

acc, 35. 



X I. 

Speak well of, sv Uyeiv, acc 
35. 

the truth, a).7]^Ev(a, 82. 

Spear, doov, xo^T) 193. 
Spend, aralioxco (?), 235. 
Spring, taQ, ro, ge?i. r^nog 
341. 

Stadium, orddiogy or aiddtop 
136. 

Staff, (m^dog, ij, 138. 
Stag, tlacfog, 35. 
Stand open, avtcoya, Perf 2 
193. 

by and see, &c., 

neQioQUG), 331, note o. 

State, nohg (eccg), i^, 8. 

Stay (in a town), diazQi^oj, 
96. 

Steal, 'AltTTTcOf F. M., {-ae-aXo' 

cpa,) 73. 
Stick, Qci^dog, ri, 183. 
Still, £T/, 168*. 
Stomach, yaaTi[o, 8(jog (?), rj^ 

235. 

Stone, ).i\}og, TZETQog, 235. 
Stop, (trans.) Ttavco, (in* 

trails.) Tzavouai, 188(1); 

with j)artic. 239. 
Stove, y.dixTvog, 282. 
Straight to, ev&v (gen.) 30G 
Strange, davfiaarog, 259. 
Strangle, dndyyeiv, 18S (1). 
Stream: flows with a full 

or strong — , nolvg qel. 
Strength, x^aroiT, 41. ad^erogi 

TO, 319. 
Strife, toig, t8og, rj, 183. 
Strike, TiXr^aaco (used by the 

Attics in the perf, act 



INDEX I. 



225 



and in the pass. natdcFaBiv 
being used for the other 
tenses), — ivntto, 
Vomel says rvntco the 
general term for strik- 
ing on any thing : 
naico to strike a per- 
son : to gi\re blows 
for correction : con- 
nected with nalg (!). — 
nXrixt^ is TvntG) and 
Tialto strengthened. 
Strip, i'Advco, 125. 
Strong, lo'/vQog, 35. 
Succour, iTTi'AovQtco, clat. also 

acc. of the thing, 239. 
Such a man as you, 6 olog 

(jv avriQ, 271. 
Suffer (=allow)j idco, 121. 
— TTctaxco (of suffering 
painful things), 168*. 

a thing to be done, 

331. 

from a disease, y.dfivo),t 

183. 

pain, dlysco, 20. 

punishment, diy.7]v dido- 

vai^ gen. of thing, dat. of 
person by whom, 228 

Suffering, Tzd&og^ 150. 

Sufficient: to be — , dgyeTv, 
175. 

Sufficient: more than — , 
TTSQirra roov doy.ovvT(oVy 
174, f. 

Suggestion, 243. 

Superhuman (of — size), ^e/- 



l^cov ri yar dvd^QconoVy 168. 
d. 

Superintend, imaxoTzeco, 206 
Supply to, TzaQtjco, 214. 
Surpass, n^Qmixi [gen,),\5& 
Surprised (am), d^avixdl^Gi^ 

F. M., 8. 
Surprising, davfxaarog, 259 
Surprisingly, {^avuaoioog d)g 

273. d. 

Suspect, V7T07T7EVCO, QCC^ of 

pers., 293*. 
Swallow, i^WwVy ovog 
341. 

Swear by, ofivv^i, acc. (?). 
351. 

Sweet, r^dig, 214. 

T. 

Table, rgdire^a, 188. 
Take. Xafi^dvoj (?), 92. 

QHV, 190. 

away from, dq^aiqicoj 

125. 

place. See Happen. 

care, qfQovrii^co, 288. 

hold of, la^iad^ai, 163. 

in hand, imitiqtGi^ 

dat. 121. 
myself off, dna71dr- 

TOfxai, i54. ^or. 190. 4. 

off, ixdvojy 125. 

pleasure in, rjdofxai^ 

dat. 20. 

up, aiQEiv, 188 (2). 

Talent, rdlavTOVy 82. 
Talk, laXeco, 35. 



t KafiOViJiai^ KEKfXTJKa. 

10* 



226 IND] 

Task, ^gyov, 121. 

Taste : give to — , allow 

to — , y8v(o [ace. of person, 

gen. of thing). 
Tasted, one who has never, 

ayevGzog, with gen. 150. 
, to have never,= ^o 

be uysvaTog (with gen,) 
Taught, that can be — , 

dida'A76g, 293^. 
Teach, didmxco (?), 125. 
Teacher, 8idd6xalog, 168*. 
Tear, ddxQvop, IGS'^. 

shed, — , dayQvco, 282. 

Temper, dvfxog, 121. 
Temperance, acocpQoavvr], 

125, u. 

Temperate, acocfQcov, 125, u. 
Temple, ^aog {itoog, Ait.). 
41. 

Ten thousand, iivQioiy 228. 

Terrible, deivoQ, 214. 

Thales, Qall^g (?), 183. 

Than any other single per- 
son, Etg avt]Q, IT A. e, dg ye 
dvrjQ oaj^5 172. 

— ■ — ever, avrog with gen. 
of reciprocal pronoun, 
167. 

Thankful to be or feel, 
Xdoiv eldsvaijt gen. of thing, 
222. 

Thanks, to return, x^^Q^^ 
8id8vai,t genitive of thing, 
222. 

That, ixsTvog, 46. 

— — ^ in order that, iva, 73. 



:x I. 

That (after verbs of tet^ 

ling), 071, 73. 
The — the, (with compar.)j 

oacp — roaovTco, 168*. 
The one — the other, 6 ixtp 

—6 dt, 38. 
The morrow (the next day)^ 

rj avQioVy 26. 
Thebahs, Qri^aToi, 125. 
Theft, •alonri^ 73. 
Then [time), jots, 92. 
(of inference), ovv. 

100. 

in questions, drcx,, 

318. A. mma, 318. i, 
{See 315.) 

There, ku, 28. 

(^^Oj ^^Qsifif, 92, 

being an opportuni- 
ty, naqov, 250. 

, to be, TrdpEiui. See 

91. b. 

Therefore, ix ravTTjg r'rjg at' 

Tiag, B'A TovTov, 222. 
Thick, daovg, 150. 
Thickly planted with trees, 

daavg dtvdQcov, 150. 
Thine, aog, 20. 
Thing, TTQayixa, 8. 
Things that are ; existing 

things, rd o'pra, 65. 
Think, To/AtXco, 52. oio/xai 

(2 sing, oiei), 87. 
happy, evdai[xovi^(x)^ 

150. 

Third, TQirog^ 52. 
This, ovTog, ods, 46. 



t For siSlvai, see 73, note q. 



INDEX I. 



227 



This being determinedj do- 
^av zavra, 249. c. See 
note o. 

being the case, ek tov- 

rov, 224. 

Three, jQaTg^ TQia, 15. 

Through (of space, time, 
and means), dia (zoJ), 
269. — (cause), dice (roV), 
326. vTTo, gen. 

(the whole coun- 
try), ava Ttaaav rriv rriv, 
259. 

Throw, QiTTTooy 235. 
Thy, a6g, 20. 

Till late in the day, ^e^^t 

TTOQQCO Tjjg 7JfX8Qag, 144. 

Time, xQofog, 28. 

, it is, ojQu, 65. 

, in my, (fee etz iixov, 

65. 

To, 288, 319. 

To Sardis, Chios, &c., im 
• 2id(jdeG)v, -inl Trig X/oi;,288. 
To speak generally, c^g enog 

£177 8tV, 144. 

Together with, avv (omit- 
ted before avzoj, aviri, (fee), 
345. 

Toil, TTovog, 154. 

To-morrow, avQiov^ 28. 

Too (and that — ), >iai ravza^ 
206. 

great for, (fee, compar- 
ative with ?} xarcc before a 
subst., ^ 00678 before in- 
Jin., 168. 

• — soon (after cannot), 
242. e. 



Tooth, bbovg, G. obovrog, 6, 
20. 

Touch, anroixaiy 150. 
Towards, after ^to act in* 

solently, eig, 319. 
TTQogy 319. Eig, 

259. 

■ • — — home, £71 oiKov, 

288. 

Town, aaTVy to, 96 
Transact, ttqcHttcOj 8. 
Transgress, naqa^aivm, 
228. 

Treat ill, y.ay.^g Tiomv, acc, 
35. 

well, £v TTOieTv^ acc. 35. 

Treaty, cnovdat, pL 228. 
Tree, dtvdQov (?), 144 
Trick, T£xr7], 214. 
Trouble, novog, 154. 
True, 274. 
happiness, ^ oo? akri- 

d^mg EvdaijAOvia, 27 A. 
Trust (1) (== am confident) 

ninoid^a, 119, note i ; 193. 
(have confidence in), 

mGT£v(o, with dat, only, 

132. 

Truth (the), to aln^^lg, 27 L 

, alrid^Eia, 274. 

Try (for murder), dic6x£iy 

q)6yov, 35 ; (am tried,) q)£V' 

y£iv, gen, 
— — , 7T£iQ(wfiai (governs 

gen,), 121. 
Tunic, ;f«rcaV, 125. 
Turn, TQ£7T(0y 73. ^If^ 
Turned (am — into), y/yyo/ia* 

(?),15. • 



228 



INDEX I. 



Twice as many, dmXaaioi, 
175. 

Two by twOj y^aik dm, 274. 
U. 

Uncommon degree (in an), 

diacpSQOVTcog, 235. 
Unconsciously, 242. c. 

Uncovered, xpTlog, 235. 
Under, vtto, 326. 
Undergo, vno^ivco^ 214. 
Understanding, on an, zn\ 

70) thai, &c. 227, n. 
Undertake an expedition, 
24. 

Unexpected, anQoobo-Arirog, 
224. 

Unexpectedly, aTiQOGdoK- 

rirov, 224. 
Unfortunate, aa-Aodaiixcor, 

144. 

Unjust, cldrAog, 138. 
Unknown to myself, 

242. c.^ 
Unless, el p/, 112. 
Until, axQh H'^lQh '^^^9 icyre, 

306. 

Up {adv.) J avco, 28. avd 

{prep.), acc. 259. 
Upper, 6 avco, 28. 
Upper-chamber, vtzsqwovj 

96. 

Upwaras, avco, 28. 
U.*^.. yQcHoixaij dat. {conir. 7) 
138^ 

Used to, imperf., 95, t. 
Useless, fidzaiog, 206. 
Utilityj TO (jvfji^tQov, 228. 



V. 

Vain, fidraiog, 206. 
Value, Ttfxdofiai, 163. 
Value very highly, 7r(}o ;7oi 
Zoi; TTOieiGx^ai, 243. ;7f^i 
jToHoi; noieiod^ai or ^j'ad* 
^a/, 282. 
Vanished, cfQovdog, 65. 
(A) vast number, aL'()/of., 228. 
Very, ttcIw, 214. 7rf(>, 78. 

highly, ^lu6Tov, 

162*. i. 

many, ^jlvqIoi, 228. 



well, 



Vexed, am — at. axO^opicu (?), 

rfa^.20. 
Victory, r{x7], 132. 
Villages, in — , xazL y.c6fxctg^ 

274. 

Villain, xaxovQyog, 222. 
Villainy, xa>iovQyLa,222. 
Violet, (02/, 144. 
Virtue, aQsirj, 8. 
Voluntarily, id^elovrrig, o5,* 
299. 

Volunteer (as a), ix>elovr7jgj 
299. 

W. 

Wall, V. Tsiyi^co, {subst.) xu- 

yog, TO, 222. 
Want, btoiiai, 150. 
Wanted, if I am, (fcc, lay 

71 dtri, or £rTt^£0«, 91. a. 6. 
War, TTohfiog. 

Ward otr, d^vreiv rm^ 
222. 

from myself, afiv 



vopiaif acc* 222. 



5 



INDEX 1. 



22& 



Was near (= almost), oUyov j 
deiv, 283. c. 

Wash.loveiv, 1S8 (1). 

Watch over, iyQ^yoQtvain^Qi. 
gen, 193. 

Water, vdojQ^ to, 15. 

Way, o^oV, ^7, 154. 

Weak, ad&evijg, 319. 

Weakness, aad^tveicc, 319. 

Wealthy, nlovaiog^ 20. 

Weep for, y.axaylaUiv (?), 1S8 
(2), 278. 

^\eigh anchor, aioEiv {an- 
chor^ subaiicl.), 188. 

Well, 6?, 8. 

— to be, y,al(^g lyuv. 

What? tI; 

' kind of? TToTog; 

is, ra ovra, 65. 

■ comes from (the 

gods) r« 7^v d^E^v, 54. 

comes next (to), ra 



ixofxtra, gen. 149. d. 
induces you to . . ? 



fiad^cop ; 313. 

possesses you to . . ? 



ziTradcov; 318. 
, to — place, noT, ottci, 

144, 72, p. 
we ought, (1 iQYi, 91. 

c. — ra deovra, 206. 
Whatsoever, oazig, 92. ei! rig, 

269. ^ ^ 
When, or?, iTreidi]^ ineiddv, 92. 

' ?;7or£;92. 

■ you, { may, ^ ttccqovj 

he, &c, ^ might, ) 250. 
you ought, &c., ^aW, 

250." 



When it is your duty, deor^ 

TTQOOr^XOV, 250. 

— or whereas it icas 

said J dnriixtvov, 250. 

thereis any occasion, 

XI derj (or, after an histori- 
cal tense, frz/^/o/l, 91. a.b 

Whence, Tzod-ev, 100. 

W'henever, onorey 96. 

Where, ttov, 144. onov, 72. p. 

Wliether, el', 335. idv, 336. 

Which way = v hither, ttoT; 
— in dependent questions 
regularly, onoi, 72, p. 

Whilst, ayQi, ecog, 306. 

— he was walking, ^5- 

ra^v TieoiTzatcoVy 288. 

Whither, ttoT, 73, 144. in 
depe?ide?it sentences, 0710 1, 
72, p. 

Who? rig; in dependent 
sentences, regularly oang, 
72, note p. 

in the world? Tignors; 

150. 

Whole (the), 6 nag, or nag 0, 
45. 

, oAo^, 138. 

Whosoever, oarig, 92. frr/g", 
269. 

Wniy? Ti Oxdia Ti; 183. 

Wicked, novr^Qog, [immoral^ 
vile), 188. — aj^oVfo^? (one 
who breaks the divine 
and natural laws. See 
o(T/o?, in 293*,) 299. 

Wickedness, novrjQia, 188. 

Widow, xriQa, 235. 

Will certainly, 358. d. 



230 



Willing: if you are — , ei 
601 ^ovXoixtvq) iaTi, 206. 

Willingly at least Jxc6v flvai, 
144. 

Wine, ohog, 15. 

Wing (214), nztQv^ ^aluj 
the wing with reference 
to the wing-joint, — ttt^qov 
^penna^ the wing with 
reference to the wing- 
feathers [Dbderleiii.) 

Wisdom, 6oq}ia, 24. . 

Wise. (7or/-oV, 20. 

Wish, 100 [distinction be- 
tween ^ovlofiai and idslco, 
100]. 

Withjdw {datX[A8Td (gen.)^ 
24. 

(by ])artic.), f/cor, 

aymv, cptQcov, yQoo/.i8vog, 235. 

With a view to, ttqc^ {acc.)j 
319. 

what object or view, 

71 ^vXo^Evog, 341. 

■ impunity, iaiQ(av, 154. 

three others, ikaQtog 

avTcg, 68. 
you (us, &c.), to be, 

TTaQEifAL See 91. 6. 
Within, eidov, 125. 
Without, ^Joo, gen, 125. avev, 

gen. 150. x<»Q^99 309. dixcc, 

309. 

■ being dis- 



covered 



sensed, 



ob- 



■ seen, 



■knowing it, ^ 



242. c. 
^241. 



Wolf, IvKog, 41. 

W^oman, yvvri, R. yvvaiH, V 

yivai, 15. 
Wonder at, .'&aiud^G)y F. 

M. 8. 
Work, EQyov, 121. 
Worthless, cpavlog, 144. 
Worthy of, (J|fo^, 65, 150. 
Would probably have been, 
ixii^dvv8VG8v av (with in- 
jin,\ 359. 

rather— than, ribiov 



av — o/. 

that ! 8id8, 8L\f (Sq)8lov 

{8g,8), 81 ydQ(Scp8},ov,d)g ooq)£- 
lov or ojcptXov alone^ 206. 

Wound, ri7Qc6oxcOy 269. 

Wretched, yiaxodaiixoov, (ill- 
fated), 144. a^;ito?, 274. 

Wrong, aj^ocrto?, 299. See 
293. 



Year, hog, to, 144. 
You are joking, sx^v, 
350. g. 

do nothing but, ovdsp 

alio ri — , 357. 

there ! omog {avzrj) ! 



325, d. 
Young, v8og, 168^ 

bird, vsoaaog, 214. 

Yours, vfi878Qog, 24. 
Yourself, 48, 49. 

Z. 

Zeal, 70 TiQOx^viiovy {cidj.\ 
60. 

Zealous, nqo^vfjiog, 221. e. 



INDEX li 



List of Phrases aiK 
A. 

(6) ayviv qo^og, 228. 
ayuniiv loi^ Tzaoovat or ra 

TzaQovza, 73. 
^^ycov (=ivith), 235. 

, , ^ TZOIHV ) p. 107, 

aiaxvrofiat ^ ^^^^^ J ^^^^^ 

atiEiad^ai {mid.)^ not with 
two accusatives, 124, note 

Altiavboog 0 (PiIctttiov, 23. 
alio 71 rj — / (illoTi ^' 318. 
alloog 78 '/Mi^ 278. 
alojrai xlonrig, 73. 
ifAq^ozeoov {-ci)j 345. 

coi', 267. 
aiG), 8. 

a;ro aoi) dg^dfierogy 100. 

deiTTvov ysvto&uL 243. 

TOi; TTQOCfarovg, 243. 

138. 

ocQ'/jlv or r//^ do'/)]Vj 132. 
235. 

aVToTg drdQaaiv, 350. 

avTog, 39. avTog aviovy 166. 

ag)' iaviav, 243. 



Yv^oRDs explaitied.t 



/9/oi; ^/i£(^, 206. 

dtdoyn^vov, 249 note n. 
dtn'6za7og caviov r^ada, 168 

note m. 
249. a. 
dr^log tiui, 239. 
dialinooi' yoorov, 235. 
^i' oo;'5Jb ^'/£n', &C.. 270. 
di'y.uiog tl^i, 358. 
(3/x?;j^ didoruL [gen.)^ 228. 
dicoy.E(V (forov, 35. 
^oxoi'r, 249, note n. 
^oJ«^ (do^up 7avra, &C.), 

249. c. 
^ooj fA^rr, 193, note u. 
dvi aTODTSQOi avTOi av76iv, 

168. c. 

^I'ou' dtovTCi {not deovtoivX 
283. 

K 

sai/rou 162*. i. 



t Phrases not found here may be looked for their Alphabetica* 
lUce in the last section. 



232 



INDEX II. 



iynaleiv 7i tin, 183. 

ei aoi ^ovXo[^8vq> iariv, 206. 

el iitllu yEvta&ai, 283. 

el [Jii] did, 125. 

— rig, 268. 

ical (ilXog, 174. d. 

ei{f Scfslov {eg, «), 206. 
eiQyoj, eiQyG), 154, note b. 
250. 
174. e. 

Big didaaadlov {neixneiv^ qjoi- 
rav), 259. 

' 71]V 0lll7r7TOV, 23. 

elolv 01 Xeyovzeg ) 263, note 

0? XtyovGi ) a. 

ixivdvvevaev av diaq)d^aQ^vai, 
359. 

144. 

i^TTodojv ehai, 293*. 
iv\oTg TTQMTog, 259. 

250. 

evdov TiazaXa^eiVy 125. 

dTTQoado'AriTov, 224. 
fgoV, 249. b. 
en Ffxoi, 65. 

65. 

227. b. 
239. 

iariv oil {= enoi), 263. 

ovarifag . . . . y 269. d, 

ev&v Trjg noXscog, 309. 
evd^vg rjxcoVj 309. 

(J or (^7£, 266. 
eiead^aiTirog, 149. c?. 
6/001^ {=with)^ 235. 

27. 

^ avQiov, 27. 

5 3<«r«, with acc. 168. c?. 



^ oodrf, with 168. e. 

rj TToXXrj Trig %MQag (not to 

TToXv), 58. 

rjdsojg av d^eaaal^riv, 86*. 
^;7g^ 351. 

0. 

^avfidaag e^co^ 350. 
'OarfxadLo^g o^g^ 273. c?, 
'&avfxaaTov ooor, 273. c. 

0^, 40. c. 
— ravTa, 206. 

270. 

xccroo, 28j note x. 
xfj^o? dixijv^ 250. 

Xavd^dva, with par tic. 242, c, 
Xeyeiv, [ev, xay.oogy &C.), 35. 
XrjQtig 8)^03Vy 350. g'. 

M. 

jMcc ^/a, 341. 

fiavd^dvco (with part,) 239. 
fieydXa dcpeXeiv, ^Xdnreiv, &C. 
82, 

fisXXco yodcpetr, &c., 283. 
fzerafAtXei (with part.), 239. 
fxeza^v 7T8Qi7Tat6ov, 288. 
^fjfot ;70^^ca Tj^BQag, 144, 

fiVQlOl, fiVQlOly 228. 



^^//a, 341. 



IXDEX II. 



23a 



0. ' 

c ds, 40. ^ ^ ^ 

6 i]iaav^ Tov yoorov, 59. e. 

6 oiog ov ca f;o, 273. ! 

01 uf^cpi "Avvtor, 2S3^, note x. 

yl^v iyovzeg^ 27S. 

770UJ}'l, 45. I 

— TTooali'/.orT^g, 219. ' 

2S3. 

Of CO)' (= Orf TOIOVT(OV). 25S. 6. 

iyliyov dtco, dny, (fcc, 2S3. 
ofivvi^iL (rovg xteovg^, 351. 

2S7*. 

0(JOV 01'. 125. 

0 (J 0 r ^ ^ r ( ^ r 0 /T A £ /(J r 0 r 5* . 1 7 4 . c . 
OaCp TOGOVTOl, 16S*. 

ort iityiaiog, 174. 6. 

lah]6Eig ; (fcc, 2S7*. 

— TiaiTog dial, 162*. ?. 

ov, not simply reflexive, but 
used in dependent sen- 
tences to denote the sub- 
ject of the principal sen- 
tence. 50. p. 29. 

— £ not u?ed by Attic prose- 
writers, except Plato. 50. 
p. 29. 

OVA tativ. 

— f/ca (=-- non haheo). 72. h. 
oi'de^g oazig ov, 277. 

ovdev o'lov a-Aovaai, 27S. 

7f, 150. 

oi-ro^^ ! 325. d. 
o'vTcog eysiv, 72. c. 
oiy CTi — a)j,c\ y,ai\ 82. 

27. 

rzuQCi urAoov uMuv, ifcc. 299. 
naQ hXiyov biiqevyoVi (fcc. 299. 



TTciaa 7] Tiohg, 45. d. 

nohg, 45. d. 

TTtumog avTog, (fcc, 51. d. 

TTto] 7I0U.0V -OlElG&aij 2S3*. 

331. 

ritoiTja 1031' acr/.ou TO^y, 1^4.^ 
208. 

TTOiHv {ev. y.ccxcog^. 35. 
rr 0 /. /. a n /. a cioi c3 ; ■. 1 / 4 . y. 
132. 

yTo'ooco Tiig ?;).iy,iag, 143. 

7TQ0 TTOlloV TlOUiad-Cily 243. 

331. 

■TTooaJjy.oy, 250. 



avroidci lucu'Tcp (aocfog cap 01 

(Toqrcp oiT/), 238^. 6. 
(7;<0A7j (n'0//;(Jco), 112. 



tayiTEoci r; corfcozEoa, 174. a 
TelevTOjy, 235. 
7/ uadcop : 317. 

— Tzad'oop : 317. 
T/V 7Z0TE ; 150. 

TO «,T0 Toide, 34*./". 

— ^^'^ f?j "^^^^ 206. 

— £.t! TovToig ehcUj 206. 

7Tq6\^1'UOV, 60. 

7£/.£VTaiOr, o4 .J. 

701' (with in fin.) J 216, 
7orjar7( or, 137. 
TOiyoucCj 137. 
rovTOv ys ?y£ya, 250, 
OJT^, 65. 



0. ^ 

g:/oco>' \with\ 235, 



234 



INDEX IT. 



cpEQcov, 350. h. 
CfEvyeiv cpjrnv, 35. 

, = (pvyetr, 270. g, 

(f&dvco (&c.) 242. d, e.f. 35S. 
5. c. cZ. 

X 

XCiQf^v ifii]r, 250. 
^^caufyo^? (=with), 235. 



53. 
444. 

OVVe7,6vTI eiTTHT^ 444 

— Tdj^iorUf 174 A. 

— 7ci)[ovg el'/ov, 278. 
^(jneQ eiy^v, 351. 

i aq^sXov, 206. 



INDEX III 



List of Words that have some irregularity or Declen* 
sioN or Conjugation. 



A. 

dyvvui, 193. 

adco', F. M., 168*. 

cu]8c6r, 341. 

aiQtco, 190. 

aiod avowal, 190. 

d'Aoico, F. M., 92. 

a/.ia'AOf,iai, 73. 

a/.lojjar^ 274. 

ciuuQzdrco, 154. 

drtyofAca^ 214, note i. 

dviwyuj dvtwyfxai,193. noteq. 

fXPOlJCO, 193. 

d7Zoy,QivofiU(, 278. 

(iTTolaVOOy 259. 

'Anoll^v, 341. 
«()£(7>{(», 337. 
«()v£oa, F. fjco, 175. 
u'/^O^oixai, 20. 



i^ccfVco, 228. 



r. 



ydXa, 132. 

yfP.aoo, d(yofxaty 278 

YLypoi4,aij 15. 



^/y'lcocrxoa, 156. 
j'OJ'i', 20. 
15. 

/I 

^£r, 60. 

deldo), 293*. 
^ac)>or, 144. 

diduay.oj. 125. 
didQuaxco, 138. 
dixpdco, 131j note b. 
^o>, 193. 
do'Ato3, 95. 
dvrafiai, 87. 
^iJoaj 125. 



341. 

(i<?^o), 65. 
f?;70i', 60. 
ElavrcOy 24. 

87zaiP8(x)j gen., F. M.5 60, 
293*. 

8710 uaiy 183. 
f^aco, 274. 
8Qj^0{Xai, 112. 

£(Ti9^/ca, 144 



236 

evQiayico^ 87. 
gj^oo, 15. 

faco, 131, note b. 

11, 

rjxo), 206. 
58. 

HQaylrjg, 183. 
riQoiiriv, 73. 

0. 

OaATjg, 183. 
■&vi^6y.co, 125, 
'&vydtr]Q, 20. 

7. 

hvioucu, 242, note k, 
>{lat'co, 150. 

xXf 77705, F. M., 73. 

>co;iafw, F. M., 121. 

144. 
xtSwj', 41. 

^. 

7((fiBavoi), 92. 
/.«»'i/«Vaj, 154. 

\v(o, 190. 

M. 

125. 

fid)[Ofia(, 73. 

IU]TT]Q, 20. 

fav^, 125. 



INDEX III. 

o 

o5oi;V, 20. 

150. 

olda, 73, not3 |, 
o/xa^f, 331. 
oiofxai, 87. 
o/V, 41; note * 
o"iofAai, 206, i< >te ^ 
ollv[xi, 193. 
ofjtvvfii, 343, note s. 

oQaco, i o. 
o^)^f^, 15. 
o?^,20. 
6q)sil(o, 206. 

77. 

Tzaltco, 343, note u, 
>7«(T^^ca, 168*. 
Tieivdco, 131, note b. 
rvyvvfxiy 193. 
144. 

nXsco, 188. 

24. 

Uoaeidcov, 341. 
;70i't,% 20. 
TTQaog, 

2. 

aiydco, F. M., 269*. 
arro^, 259, note v. 
(7XO770O, 336, note L 
aTeQOVfiat, 168*. 
2^G)>iodzvg, 15. 

r. 

rtfivco, 46, note 

TIHTOJ, 15. 

ziTQcaaxoDy 269*. 



fQsxM, 65. 
TV'}2dvc0y 183. 

r 

vdcx)Q^ 15. 



INDEX III. 

(p{>dyo3, 241. 

X 

ysiQ, 20. 
;^e?w/5coi', 341, 
XQ^ofiai, 13], noteb. 
91, note i 



THE EOT). 



D. APPLET ON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. 



Short and Comprehensiye Greek Grammar. 

By J. T. CHAMPLIX, Professor of Greek and Latin in WatervHle 
College. 12mo, 208 pages. 

In compiling tliis Grammar, Professor Champlin has drawn upon the best critics and 
grammarians, and mtli the results of his research has interwoven much original mat- 
ter suggested during several years' experience in teaching, and editing Greek authors. 
His design is to exhibit the essential facts and principles of the language in the clear- 
est, briefest, and most practicable form possible. With this view, all theories and 
complications belonging to general grammar have been avoided, and only their results 
used. The amplification and illustration of principles have been carried only so far 
as is necessary to their comprehension. In this way all the real wants of the Greek 
student are met, while his attention is not distracted by unnecessary and embarrassing 
details. Materials for oral exercises are supplied, ancTa sketch of Greek versification 
is given in an appendix. 

From the Eev. Me. Axdeeson, Hew Orleans. 
" I believe the author has fully accomplished what he proposes in his preface. To 
those wishing to study Greek, I am satisfied he has presented a book which will much 
tend to simplify the study to beginners ; and at the same time, without being too 
voluminous, presents as lucid and full an exposition of the principles of the language 
as can be contained within so small a compass."' 

Kiilmer^s Greek Grammar : 

Translated by Professors EDVv^ARDS and TAYLOR. Large 12mo, 
620 pages. 

Kiihners is universally acknowledged to be the most accurate, comprehensive, 
clear, and practical grammar of the Greek language now extant. It is the work of one 
who devoted his life to Greek philology, and spent years of patient labor in perfecting 
this work. Too full and learned for the beginner, it is just what is needed for the 
college curriculum, containing all that a book of reference should contain. The student 
will never appeal to its pages in vain. In fulness of illustration, copiousness of 
reference, and philosophical analyses of the various forms of language, it is unsurpassed, 
we might say unequalled. 

The present translation is made by two distinguished American scholars, who 
have revised the whole, verified ths^ references, and appended an original treatise of 
t their own on Greek versification. As now presented to the public, it is believed to 
be as perfect a grammar of the Greek language as enlightened research and profound 
idiolarship can produce. 



I 



D. AFPLETON & CO: 8 PUBLICATION'S, 



Greek Ollendorff ; 



Being a Progressive Exhibition of the Principles of the Greek Grammar. 
By ASAHEL C. KEXDRICK, Professor of the Greek Language and 
Literature in the University of Rochester. 12mo, 371 pages. 

The present work is what its title indicates, strictly an Ollendorff^ and aims to 
apply the methods which have proved so successful in the acquisition of the modern 
languages to the study of Ancient Greek, with such differences as the different genius 
of the Greek, and the different purposes for which It is studied, suggest. It differs 
from the modern OUendorffs in containing Exercises for reciprocal translation, in 
confining them within a smaller compass, and in a more methodical exposition of the 
principles of language. 

The leading ohject of the author was to furnish a book which should serve as an 
introduction to the study of Greek, and precede the use of any grammar. It will 
therefore be found, although not claiming to embrace all the principles of the Gram- 
mar, yet complete in itself, and will lead the pupil, by insensible gradations, from the 
simpler constructions to those which are more complicated and difficult. The excep- 
tions, and the more idiomatic forms, it studiously avoids, aiming only to exhibit the 
regular and ordinary usages of the language as the proper starting-point for the student's 
further researches. 

In presenting ihese, the author has aimed to combine the strictest accuracy with 
the utmost simplicity of statement. His work is therefore adapted to a younger class 
of pupils than have usually engaged in the study of Greek, and will, it is hoped, win 
to the acquisition of that noble tongue many in our academies and primary schools who 
have been repelled by the less simple chai-acter of our ordinary text-books. 

Exercises in Greek Composition. 

Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon's Anabasis. By JAMES R, ■ 
BOISE, Professor of Greek in the University of Michigan. 12mo, 
185 pages. 

These Exercises consist of easy sentences, similar to those in the Anabasis, having 
the same words and constructions, and are designed by frequent repitition to make the 
learner familiar with the language of Xenophon. Accordingly, the chapters and sec- 
tions ill both are made to correspond. No exercises can be more improving than those 
in this volume ; obliging the student as they do, by analysis and synthesis, to master 
the constructions employed by one of the purest of Greek writers, and imbuing him 
with the spirit of one of the greatest historians of all antiquity 




11 




o 0^ 




' 0 



rV) ■ s ^ * -3'-' ,^ 



3 0 



•7*,, 




no' a 



0 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper pro 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

PreservationTechnolo 

A WORLD LEADER |N PAPER PRESERV 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township PA 160 
(724)779-2111 



.0 



^ - 0 . 




1 \ 



.0- 



o 0 




,0 c 



• 0' 



